A book By Mr. Ashish Patel 
(Software Engineer and Professor and CEO at SAPTRSI) 
Page 1
INDEX 
1. Introduction 
1.1. Basic DOS Commands 
1.2. Concept of Windows, Icon, Menu 
1.3. Desktop 
1.4. Creating Folders and Shortcuts 
1.5. Finding Files & Folders 
1.6. Creating, Copying, Moving and Deleting files 
1.7. Windows Explorer 
2. Word Processing Package 
2.1. Typing, Editing, Proofing & reviewing 
2.2. Formatting text & Paragraph 
2.3. Automatics Formatting and Styles 
2.4. Working with Tables 
2.5. Graphics and Frames 
2.6. Mail Merge 
2.7. Automating Your Work & printing documents 
3. Spreadsheet package 
3.1. Concept of worksheet 
3.2. Working & Editing in Workbooks 
3.3. Creating Formats & Links 
3.4. Protecting and Hiding data 
3.5. Built in Functions 
3.6. Formatting a Worksheet & Creating graphics objects 
3.7. Creating Charts (Graphics), Formatting and analyzing data 
3.8. Organizing Data in a List (Data Management) 
3.9. Sharing & Importing Data 
3.10. Printing 
3.11. Macros 
4. Presentation Package 
4.1. Creating and Editing Slides 
4.2. Creating and Editing objects in the slide 
4.3. Animation and Running Slide Show 
4.4. Creating and Running Slide Show 
4.5. Templates 
4.6. Interface with other packages 
5. Internet 
5.1. Concepts 
5.2. Working 
5.3. Mailing & surfing tools 
Page 2
MS - DOS (Microsoft Disk Operating System) 
® MS-DOS is an operating system designed for the IBM PC by Microsoft in 1981. 
® The first personal computer version of DOS, called PC-DOS, was developed for IBM 
by Bill Gates and his new Microsoft Corporation. He retained the rights to market a 
Microsoft version, called MS-DOS. 
® MS DOS is Microsoft Disk Operating System. It is a text based OS. 
® It was a command-line interface, meaning the user had to type in commands to use it, 
unlike Windows which is a Graphical User Interface. 
® MS DOS commands were either stored as individual programs, known as external 
commands, or in a file called Command.com, which stored more commonly used 
commands. These were called internal commands. 
® Included in these would have been commands like COPY, DEL, DIR, CD and RD. 
COPY enabled the copying of files. 
DEL deleted files. 
DIR gave a listing of files in a directory (now called a folder). 
CD changed from one directory to another. 
RD removed a directory. 
 AUTOEXE.BAT: 
® AUTOEXE.BAT is a system file found originally on DOS-type operating system. 
® It is a plain text batch file that is located in the root directory of the boot device. 
® The name of the file is an abbreviation of “automatic execution” , which describes its 
function in automatically executing commands on system startup. 
® AUTOEXE.BAT is most often used to set environment variables such as keyboard, 
soundcard, printer and temporary file locations. 
 COMMAND.COM: 
® It is the filename of the default operating system shell for DOS Operating systems 
and the default command line interpreter on Windows 95, Windows 98 and Windows 
ME. 
® It has an additional role as the first program run after boot, hence being responsible 
for setting up the system by running the AUTOEXE.BAT configuration file, and 
being the ancestor of all processes. 
® COMMAND.COM’s successor on OS/2 and Windows NT-based operating system is 
cms.exe (Command Prompt). 
® COMMAND.COM has two distinct modes of work. First is the “interactive mode”, 
in which the user types commands which are then executed immediately. The second 
is the “batch mode”, which executes a predefined sequence of commands stored as a 
text file with the extension .BAT. 
Page 3
DOS Commands: 
Internal Commands External Commands 
BREAK 
CALL 
CHCP 
CHDIR(CD) 
CLS 
COPY 
CTTY 
DATE 
DEL(ERASE) 
DIR 
ECHO 
EXIT 
FOR 
GOTO 
IF 
MKDIR(MD) 
PATH 
PAUSE 
PROMPT 
REM 
RENAME(REN) 
RMDIR(RD) 
SET 
SHIFT 
TIME 
TYPE 
VER 
VERIFY 
VOL 
APPEND.EXE 
ASSIGN.COM 
ATTRIB.EXE 
BACKUP.EXE 
CHKDSK.EXE 
COMMAND.COM 
COMP.EXE 
DEBUG.EXE 
DISKCOMP.COM 
DISKCOPY.COM 
DOSKEY.COM 
DOSSHELL.COM 
EDIT.COM 
EDLIN.EXE 
EMM386.EXE 
EXE2BIN.EXE 
EXPAND.EXE 
FASTOPEN.EXE 
FC.EXE 
FDISK.EXE 
FORMAT.COM 
GRAFTABLE.COM 
GRAPHICS.COM 
HELP.EXE 
JOIN.EXE 
KEYB.COM 
LABEL.EXE 
MEM.EXE 
MIRROR.COM 
MODE.COM 
MORE.COM 
NLSFUNC.EXE 
PRINT.EXE 
QBASIC.EXE 
RECOVER.EXE 
REPLACE.EXE 
RESTORE.EXE 
SETVER.EXE 
SHARE.EXE 
SORT.EXE 
SUBST.EXE 
SYS.COM 
TREE.COM 
UNDELETE.EXE 
UNFORMAT.COM 
XCOPY.EXE 
DOS Commands 
1. Dir 
® The dir command allows you to see the available files in the current and/or parent 
directories. 
Syntax: 
Dir [drive:][path][filename][/p][/w][/A:Attributes][/O:order][/S][/L] 
Where, 
[drive:][path][filename]: Specifies drive, directory, and/or files to list. 
/P: Pauses after each screenful of information 
/W: uses wide list format 
/A: Attributes: 
H | -H : Hidden (or not hidden ) files 
S | -S : System (or non system) files 
D | -D : Directories (or files only). 
R | -R : Read-only (or read/write) files 
A | -A : Archivable (or already archives) files 
/O:order: 
N | -N : By name (alphabetical or reverse alphabetical) 
Page 4
E | -E: By extension (alphabetical or reverse alphabetical) 
D | -D: By date and time (chronologically or reverse) 
S | -S: By size (increasing or decreasing) 
C | -C: Sorts by Double Space compression ratio lowest to highest or highest to 
lowest (version 6.0 only) 
G | -G : Group directories( before, or after) other files. 
/S: Displays files in specified directory and all subdirectories. 
/L: uses lowercase. 
Example: 
® Dir 
Lists all files and directories in the directory that you are currently in. 
® Dir /s 
Lists the files in the directory that you are in and all sub directories after that 
directory, if you are at root “C:>” and type this command this will list to you every 
file and directory on the C: drive of the computer. 
® Dir /p 
If the directory has a lot of files and you cannot read all the files as they scroll by 
you can use this command and it will display all files one page at a time. 
® Dir > myfile.txt 
Takes the output of dir and re-routes it to the file myfile.txt instead of outputting it 
to the screen. 
2. Md / mkdir 
Allows you to create your own directories in MS-DOS. 
Syntax: 
MKDIR [drive:]path OR MD [drive:]path 
Examples: 
® md test 
He above example creates the “test” directory (folder) in the directory you are 
currently in 
® md c:test 
Create the “test” directory in c: drive. 
3. Rd / rmdir 
Removes empty directories in MS-DOS. 
Syntax: 
RMDIR [drive:]path OR RD [drive:] path 
Examples: 
Page 5
® rmdir c:test 
removes the test directory, if empty. 
4. Cd 
CD (Change Directory) is a command used to switch directories in MS-DOS. 
Syntax: 
CHDIR [drive:][path] OR CD[drive][path] 
CHDIR[..] CD[..] 
Examples: 
® cd 
Goes to the highest level, the root of the drive. 
® cd.. 
goes back one directory. For example, if you are within C:WindowsCommand > 
directory, this would take you to C:Windows > 
Windows 95,98 and later versions have a feature in the CD command that allows 
you to go back more than one directory when using the dots. For example, typing: 
cd… with three dots after the cd would take you back two directories. 
® cd 
Typing cd alone will print the working directory. For example, if you are in 
c:windows> and you type the cd it will print c:windows. For those users who 
are 
familiar with Unix/Linux this could be thought of as doing the pwd (print 
working 
directory) command. 
 FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 
5. Copy 
Allows user to copy one or more files to an alternate location. 
Syntax: 
Copy source [destination] 
Examples: 
® Copy *.* a: 
Copy all files in the current directory to a: drive 
6. Del / erase 
Page 6
Del(erase) is a command used to remove files from your computer’s hard disk and 
or other writable media. 
Syntax: 
DEL [drive:][path]filename[/P] OR ERASE [drive:][path]filename [/P] 
Where, 
[drive:][path]filename: specifies the files(s) to delete. Specify multiple files by using 
wildcards. 
/P: prompts for confirmation before deleting each file. 
Example: 
® Erase c:windows*.FAK 
Delete any files that end with the FAK extension. 
® Del c:windowstemp?est.tmp = (? is a single wild character for one letter). 
This command would delete any file ending with est.tmp such as pest.tmp or 
zest.tmp…. 
7. Copy con 
To create a new file 
Syntax: 
copy con [filename] 
Example: 
® Copy con test.txt 
A user can create a file using the copy con command as shown above, which 
creates the test.txt file. Once the above command has been typed in, a user 
could type in whatever he or she wishes. When you have completed creating the 
file, you can save and exit the file by pressing ctrl + z, which would create ^Z, 
and then press enter. An easier way to view and edit files in MS-DOS would be 
to use edit command. 
8. Ren / rename 
Uses to rename files and directories from the original name to a new name. 
Syntax: 
Renames a file/directory or files/directories 
RENAME [drive:][path][directoryname1][filename1][directoryname2][filename2] 
OR 
REN[drive:][path][directoryname1][filename1][directoryname2][filename2] 
Examples: 
® rename c:chope hope 
Page 7
rename the directory chope to hope. 
® Rename *.txt *.bak 
Renames all text files to files with .bak extension. 
® Rename *1_ 
Rename all files to begin with 1_. The asterisk (*) in this example is an example 
of a wild character; because nothing was placed before or after he first asterisk, 
this means all files in the current directory will be renamed with a 1_ in front of 
the file. For example if there was a file named hope.txt it would be renamed to 
1_pe.txt. 
 GENERAL COMMAND 
9. Type 
Allows the user to see the contents of a file. 
Syntax: 
Type [drive:][path]filename 
Examples: 
® Type c:autoexec.bat 
This would allow you to look at the autoexec.bat 
10. Date 
The date command can be used to look at the current date of the computer as well as 
change the date to an alternate date. 
Syntax: 
DATE [date] 
Type DATE without parameters to display the current date setting and a prompt for 
a new one, press enter to keep the same date. 
Examples: 
® Date 
Display the current date and prompt for a new one. If no date is entered the 
current date will be kept. 
11. Time 
Allows user to view and edit the computer’s time 
Syntax: 
TIME[time] 
Type time with no parameters to display current time setting and a prompt for a new 
one. Press enter to keep the same time 
Examples: 
Page 8
® Time 12:00 
Set the time to 12:00 
12. Cls 
Cls is a command that allows a user to clear the complete contents of the screen and 
leave only a prompt. 
Syntax: 
CLS 
Examples: 
® Cls 
Running the cls command at the command prompt would clear your screen of 
all previous text and only return the prompt. 
13. Ver 
Displays the versions of MS-DOS (operating system) 
Syntax: 
VER 
Examples: 
® Ver 
Display what version of MS-DOS or windows command prompt you’re using. 
Below is an example of what this may look like. 
Microsoft Windows XP [version 5.1.2600] 
14. Edit 
Edit allows you to view, create and/or modify their computer files. 
Syntax: 
Edit FileName 
Examples: 
® Edit c:user.txt 
This would look at the user.txt. However, if the file is not found , you will have a 
blank blue screen , when editing this or any file, ensure that you know what you 
are placing in the files improperly editing the file can cause issues with your 
computer. 
Using edit you can also create files; for example, if you wanted to create a file 
called myfile.txt, you would type: edit myfile.txt this would bring up a blank 
blue screen , as long as the file is saved upon exit, this will create the file 
myfile.txt. 
15. Print 
This command allowed users to print a text file to a line printer, in the background. 
Page 9
Syntax: 
Print filename 
® Examples: 
print c:file.txt 
16. Format 
It is used to erase all of the information off of a computer diskette or fixed drive 
When using the format command, remember all information on the drive you wish 
to format will be completely erased, 
Syntax: 
Format drive 
Examples: 
® Format c: /q 
Quickly erases the contents of a C: drive. 
17. Unformat 
Used to unformat a drive that has been formatted, 
Syntax: 
UNFORMAT drive: 
Examples: 
® Unformat c: 
Command specified to unformat drive c: if it was unformatted. 
18. More 
Allows information to be displayed one page at a time 
Syntax: 
Command-name | MORE [drive:][path][filename] 
Where, 
[drive:][path][filename] : Specifies file(s) to display one screen at a time. 
Command-name : specifies a command whose output will be displayed. 
Examples: 
® Dir | more 
Allows you to view the directory listing one page at a time, if applicable, this 
would be the same as doing dir /p. 
® More myfile.txt 
Would display the contents of a page one page at a time. Pressing space would 
go to the next page and pressing enter would go down one line at a time. 
Page 10
19. Fdisk 
It is used to divide a hard drive or hard disk into the number of partition, if divide 
your hard disk into partitions you can efficiently organize directories. 
Syntax: 
FDISK 
20. Find 
Allows you to search for text within a file. It is case sensitive command. 
Syntax: 
Find “string” filename 
Example: 
® Find “hope” *.txt 
This command searches for any txt file (.txt) that contains the text text hope in 
the current directory. 
21. Defrag 
When you work on the PC, you delete files from your hard disk and create new files. 
At that time DOS first tries to reuse the space occupied by the deleted files so that 
new file gets fragmented, It means different parts of the same files get stored on 
different areas of hard disk. Overall period of time when you create and delete many 
files, they will be fragmented as defragment your disk using defrag command. 
Syntax: 
Defrag drive 
Example: 
® Defrag C: 
22. Attrib 
Attrib allows a user to change the properties of a specified file. 
Syntax: 
ATTRIB [+R][-R][+A][-A][+S][-S][+H[-H][[drive:][path]filename][/S] 
Where, 
+ : Sets an attribute 
- : Clears an attribute. 
R : Read-only file attribute 
A : Archive file attribute 
S : System file attribute 
H : Hidden file attribute 
/S : processes files in all directories in the specified path 
Examples: 
® Attrib 
Page 11
It will display all files in the current directory and each of their attributes. If any 
file is hidden it will also display those files. 
® Attrib +r user.txt 
Add the read only attribute to the user.txt file so cannot be modified until the 
read only attribute is taken off. 
23. Label 
It is used to view or change the label of the computer hard disk. 
Syntax: 
Creates , changes or deletes the volume label of a disk. 
LABEL [drive:][label] 
Example: 
® Label a: mydisk 
This would label the disk currently in the drives to “mydisk”, but will not label if 
your disk is write protected 
24. Vol 
Displays the volume information about the designated drive. 
Syntax: 
VOL [drive:] 
Examples: 
® Vol c: 
25. Tree 
Allows a user to view a listing of files and folders in an easy to read listing. 
Syntax: 
TREE Drive:path /f /a 
Where, 
Drive:path : drive and directory containing disk for display of directory structure. 
/f: displays file names in each directory. 
/a: ext characters used for linking lines., instead of graphics characters /a is 
used with code pages that do not support graphic characters and to send output to 
printers that do not properly interpret graphic characters, 
Examples: 
® TREE 
26. Deltree 
Short for delete tree. It is a command used to delete files and directories 
permanently from the computer. 
Page 12
Syntax: 
DEL TREE [/Y] [drive:][path] 
Examples: 
® Deltree c:fake010 
It deletes fake010 directory and everything in it. 
27. Prompt 
Allows to change the MS-DOS prompt to display more or less information. 
Syntax: 
PROMPT [text] 
The prompt can be made up of normal characters and below special codes. 
$Q = (equal sign) 
$$ $ (dollar sign) 
$T current time 
$D current date 
$P current drive and path 
$V windows version number 
$N current drive 
$G > (greater –than sign) 
$L & (less-than sign) 
Examples: 
® Prompt $t $d $p$g 
It displays the time and the date above your prompt when in DOS. 
28. Chkdsk 
It is a utility that checks the computer’s hard disk drives’ status for any cross-linked 
or any additional errors with the hard disk drive. 
Syntax: 
CHKDSK [drive:][[path]filename] [/F][/V] 
Where, 
[drive:][[path] : specifies drives and directory to checks 
Filename: specifies the file(s) to check for fragmentation 
/F: Fixes errors on the disk 
/V: displays the full path and name of every file on the disk 
Examples: 
® Chkdsk 
29. Scandisk 
It is a software utility capable of checking the hard disk drive and/or floppy diskette 
drive for any disk errors. 
Page 13
Syntax: 
Scandisk drive: 
Examples: 
® Scandisk c:autofix 
30. Diskcopy 
It allows a user to copy the complete contents of a diskette to another diskette. 
Syntax: 
DISKCOPY [drive1:[drive2:]] [/1][/V][/M] 
Where, 
/1: copies only the first side of the disk 
/V: verifies that the information is copied correctly 
/M: force multi-pass copy using memory only. 
Examples: 
® Diskcopy a: 
This would make a copy of a disk that is currently in your drive. 
31. XCOPY 
It is a powerful version of the copy command with additional features. It has the 
capability of moving files, directories and even whole drives from one location to 
another. 
Syntax: 
XCOPY source [destination] /P /S 
Where, 
Source specifies the file(s) to copy 
Destination specifies the location and/or name of new files. 
/P: prompts you before creating each destination file. 
/S: copies directories and subdirectories except empty ones. 
Examples: 
® Xcopy c:temp /e 
32. Diskcomp 
Compare the contents of a floppy disk in the source drive to the contents of a floppy 
disk in the target drive. 
Syntax: 
Diskcopy [drive1: [drive2:]] 
Examples: 
® Diskcopy A: B: 
Page 14
This command cannot be used with a hard disk drive and must be only used with 
floppies that are the identical size. 
The diskcomp exit codes are: 
0 – disks are the same 
1 – disk are different 
2 – process aborted with ctrl + c by user 
3 – Critical error 
4 – initialization error 
33. Comp 
A simple compare that compares two or more files. 
Syntax: 
Comp filename 1 filename 2 
Example: 
® Comp file1.txt file2.txt 
34. Move 
Allows you to move files or directories from one folder to another, or from oe drive 
to another. 
Syntax: 
move path 1 path 2 
path 1 specifies the full path of source files with drive and folder 
path 2 specify full path of a destination folder where you want to move 
Examples: 
® Move c:windowstemp*.* c:temp 
Move the files of c:windowstemp to the temp directory in root. 
Read more: http://wiki.answers.com/Q/What_is_MS-DOS#ixzz23yfPJ7U6 
Page 15
Concept of Window, icons and Menu 
ICON: 
An icon in windows is a small picture or object that represents a file, program, webpage or 
command. Most of the time, the icon picture relates to the function of the item that it 
represents. 
For example, if the icon is attached to an e-mail program, it might be a picture of a letter. 
Icons are located on the desktop, in the start menu , and various other places. 
If you are using Windows 95, 98 or 2000, you can see several icons right now on your 
desktop. 
MENU: 
A menu is a list of commands presented to an operator by a computer. They may be thought 
of as shortcuts to frequently used commands that avoid the operator having to have a 
detailed knowledge or recall of syntax. 
· A computer using a Graphical user interface (GUI) presents menus with a 
combination of text and symbols to represent choices. 
· By clicking on one of the symbols, the operator is selecting the instruction that the 
symbol represents. 
· A common use of menus is to provide convenient access to various operations such 
as saving or opening a file, Quitting a program, or manipulating data. 
· Most provide some of pull-down or pop-up menu. 
· Pull –down menus are the type commonly used in menu bars(usually near the top of 
a window or screen), which are most often used for performing actions. 
· Pop-up (or “fly-out”) menus are more likely to be used for setting a value and might 
appear anywhere in a window. 
Page 16 
Menu 
Pull Down Menu
WINDOW: 
In windows operating system, a window may represent several things, such as a document, 
an application (e.g. word processor or spreadsheet program), a folder (an MS-DOS sub 
directory in windows in called the folder), a dialog box (where the user enters some 
information) etc, you can keep several windows open at a time. 
A Window is a visual area containing some kind of user interface. It usually has a 
rectangular shape. It displays the output of and allows input of one or more processes. 
Windows are primarily associated with graphical displays, where they can be manipulated 
with a mouse cursor. 
Windows are two dimensional objects arranged on a plane called the desktop. They can be 
resized, moved, hidden, restored or closed. 
Windows can be composed of other windows. 
One program can have multiple windows. For example in a text-editing program a user 
might benefit from working with several text files available at once. Those “child” windows 
“containing” text files can either be left separate from the main window or be encapsulated 
under the main “parent” window. 
TOOLBAR: 
In a graphical user interface on a computer monitor a tool bar is a panel of which onscreen 
buttons, icons, menus or other input or output elements are placed. 
Earlier forms of toolbars were defined by the programmer and had set functions, and thus 
there was no difference between a toolbar with buttons or just a row of buttons. Most 
modern programs and operating systems however, allow the end user to modify and 
customize toolbars to fit their personal needs 
An example of a web browser toolbar, the google toolbar, in firefox. 
Page 17
TASKBAR: 
In computing, a taskbar is a term for an application desktop bar which is used to launch and 
monitor applications. Microsoft incorporated a taskbar in Windows 95 and it has been a 
defining aspect of Microsoft Windows’s graphical user interface (GUI) ever since. 
The windows taskbar can be modified by users in several ways. The position of the taskbar 
can be changed to appear on any edge of the primary display. 
Users can resize the height (or width when displayed vertically) of the taskbar up to half of 
the display area. 
TITLE BAR: 
In computing, The title bar consists of that part of the window where the title of the window 
appears. Most graphical operating systems and window manager position the title bar at the 
top of the application window as a horizontal bar. 
Default title-bar text often incorporates the name of the application and/or of its 
manufacturer. The name of the host running the application also appears frequently. 
The Title bar often contains icons for system commands relating to the window, such as a 
maximize, minimize and close buttons; and may include other content such as an 
application icon, a clock, etc. 
DESKTOP: 
A desktop commonly refers to a style of graphical user interface (GUI) that is based on the 
desktop which can be seen on most modern personal computers today. 
Page 18
· These graphical user interfaces are designed to assist the user in easily accessing and 
configuring (or modifying) the most important (or frequently accessed) specific OS packed 
features. 
· A desktop environment typically consists of icons, windows, toolbars, folders, wallpapers. 
· Software which provides a desktop environment might also provide drag and drop 
functionality and other features which make more complete. 
· Today, most popular personal computers come pre-installed with an OS that provides a 
desktop environment. Traditionally these computers have used Microsoft Windows and to a 
lesser extent Mac OS whose desktop environments are relatively unalterable. 
· The most common desktop environment on personal computers is the one provided by 
Microsoft Windows; another common environment is the one provided by Apple Mac OS. 
NETWORK NEIGHBORHOOD: 
If your PC is connected to a network, the network neighborhood folder displays all 
computers in your network. To open the network neighborhood folder, double-click the 
network neighborhood icon on your desktop or in window explorer. Then windows display 
the network neighborhood window. This network neighborhood displays a list of all 
computers that are connected to the network. 
On double clicking icon, window will display the resources of the computer which you have 
access right to. Therefore, you may not be able to access all folders on all hard disks on a 
particular computer. Moreover, depending on the different types of rights (such as read, 
write, delete etc,) you may be able to open , edit or delete files on the folder of other 
computer on the network. 
If you are connected on a network and you have rights to save files on other computer, you 
can specify the other computer’s folder as the path. 
Page 19
WHAT IS FILE? 
File is a collection of text or data stored on a storage device, such as a floppy disk or hard 
disk. You can store different types of documents in conventional file, the file that stores 
letters, memos, documents, etc is known as document or text file. The file that stores 
database information, such as an address list or sales information for a period is called 
database file. A file that contains instructions written in a programming language is called a 
program file. 
Control Panel, recycle Bin and Page Orientation 
 Control Panel 
The control panel is used to control the computer system. For example, you can control the 
behaviour of your mouse, keyboard, display, modem, printers, etc. Let us have a look at the 
control Panel. 
® Open the start menu by clicking the start button on the taskbar. 
® Choose the settings command from the start menu. (you can choose a command 
either by clicking / moving the mouse on the command or by using the keyboard) 
® Windows displays a submenu of commands for settings. This submenu contains 
‘Control Panel’ besides other commands. 
® Choose the control panel command. 
® Windows displays the control panel window that contains several icons as shown in 
the following figure: 
Page 20
® To see additional information about any icon, you click on that icon and windows 
displays a brief description about the clicked item. To change the settings for any item, 
open that item by double-clicking the mouse on that icon. Let us open Date/Time that is 
used to change the system date or time. 
® Double click the Date/Time icon in the control panel and windows opens the Date/Time 
properties windows as shown in the following figure: 
Page 21
® After adjusting the date and / or time, click the OK button to ask Windows to use the 
new settings and close the Date/Time Properties window. However, if you do not 
want to use the new date/time settings, click the Cancel button or close button in 
the title bar. 
RECYCLE BIN 
Microsoft introduced the recycle bin in the windows 95 Operating System. The Recycle Bin 
keeps files that have been deleted, whether accidentally or intentionally. Users can review 
the contents of the Recycle Bin before deleting the items permanently. The Recycle Bin 
holds data that not only lists deleted files, but also the date, time and the path of those files. 
The Recycle Bin is opened like ordinary Windows Explorer folder and the files are viewed 
similarly. Deleted files may be removed from the Recycle Bin by restoring them with a 
command, or by deleting them permanently. 
In Recycle Bin window, you can restore (i.e. undelete) all items back to their original 
locations by clicking restore all. If you want to restore selected items, select the require 
items and then choose the restore command from the file menu or from the right click 
menu. If you want to get details about any item in the Recycle Bin, select the item and the 
recycle bin displays it in window. 
The number of items the recycle bin can hold is limited by the hard disk space allocated to it 
by windows. Therefore, you should periodically empty the recycle bin by deleting those 
items from the recycle bin that you no more want to restore. For doing this, select the items 
and use the delete command from the file or the right click menu. to remove all items from 
the recycle bin, use the empty recycle bin command from file menu. 
The recycle bin’s icon indicates whether there are items in the Recycle Bin. If there are no 
files or folders in the Recycle Bin, then the icon resembles an empty wastepaper basket. 
Othwerwise if there are files and/or folders the icon resembles a full wastepaper basket. If 
your recycle bin window is empty, it indicates that currently there are no deleted items. 
The recycle bin can be accessed via the desktop or Windows Explorer. Files are moved to 
recycle bin in a number of ways. 
® By right clicking on a file and selecting delete from the menu. 
® Selecting a file and pressing delete key. 
® By dragging and dropping a file into the recycle bin icon. 
The recycle bin only stores files deleted from hard drives, not from removable media, such 
as memory cards, floppy disks, pendrives. It also doesn’t stores files deleted from network 
drives. 
PAGE SETUP 
Question: What is page orientation? 
Ans: When you create a new document , word picks up a paper size, which is usually the Letter 
Size (8.5” wide x 11” long), or A4 Size. Let us check up the paper size that is in use for the 
current document. 
Page 22
® Click the paper size tab boxes in the page setup dialog box. This tab is located on the 
right side on the Margins tab (See in the figure) 
· Word displays information about paper size in the page setup dialog box as shown in 
the figure. 
· Click the drop down arrow on the right side of the paper size box and word displays 
a list of standard paper sizes. 
· If you are using a paper size that is there in the list, you can select it from the list. 
· Word allows you to change the orientation of the page. 
· The default orientation is portrait. 
· If you change the orientation to Landscape, word swaps the width and height of the 
page. 
· That is in the landscape orientation, the letter size page becomes 11” wide and 8.5” 
high. 
· It increases the width of the page but reduces the height. 
What is a Computer? 
Computer is an electronic device, which can automatically accept and store input data, 
process them and produce output results according to the instructions given by the 
programmer or user. 
Explain the characteristics and Limitations of a computer. 
Characteristics: 
® Speed: 
Page 23
It is a very fast device. It performs the task in few milliseconds, for which a normal human 
being may take years to complete. Speed of computer is measured in terms of 
milliseconds (10-3), microseconds (10-6), nanoseconds(10-9), or picoseconds (10-12). 
® Accuracy: 
Accuracy of computer is very high. In most cases errors are due to human factors rather 
than technological factors. For example, errors caused due to improper thinking of 
programmer, or incorrect input data, often called as GIGO(Garbage In Garbage Out) 
® Diligence (carefulness): 
Computer is free from monotony, tiredness and lack of concentration. It never gets bored. If 
10 million calculations have to be performed, a computer will perform the 10 millionth 
calculation with same accuracy as 1st one. 
® Versatility (flexibility) / (usefulness): 
Computers are capable to perform almost any task, if the task can be reduced to a series of 
logical steps. The same computer can be used for multiple tasks. For example, you can 
prepare your bio-data in word, simultaneously you may be printing a report or surfing 
the Internet etc. 
® Power or remembering: (Storage capacity): 
Computers can store and retrieve any amount of information because of its secondary 
storage. The information is retained accurately as long as desired by the user. 
Limitations: 
® No I.Q.: 
It has no intelligence. It has to be told what to do and in which sequence. Computers can not 
take decision on its own. 
® No feelings: 
Computers have no natural feelings since they are machines. Their feelings are based on the 
instructions given to them in the form of programs written by us. 
What is an Operating System? 
An Operating System is an integrated set of programs (collection of programs) that controls 
the resources (such as, CPU, memory, I/O devices, etc) of a computer system. It acts as 
an intermediary between the hardware and its users. 
OR 
An Operating System is a set of programs that controls and coordinates the use of computer 
hardware among various application programs. It provides an environment within which 
user can execute programs. 
A computer can be divided into four components : the hardware, the operating system, the 
applications programs, the users. It is the operating system that manages all the above 
components. The various functions of the operating system are : 
® Controlling Input/Output devices (Keyboard, Mouse, Monitor, Printer, Plotter etc..) 
® Memory and File storage management 
® CPU Scheduling and controlling processes 
Page 24
® Loading, initiating, executing and supervising user applications programs 
® Handling errors and restarting 
® Providing command interface between user and computer system 
Examples of Operating system are : UNIX (Solaris, IRIX, HPUnix, Linux, DEC Unix) 
Microsoft Disk Operating System (MS-DOS), WIN95/98, WIN NT, OS/2 etc. 
(http://www.imtech.res.in/raghava/slides/prephd/doslec.htm) 
Types of Operating Systems 
Within the broad family of operating systems, there are generally four types, categorized 
based on the types of computers they control and the sort of applications they support. 
The categories are: 
· Real-time operating system (RTOS) - Real-time operating systems are used to control 
machinery, scientific instruments and industrial systems. An RTOS typically has very 
little user-interface capability, and no end-user utilities, since the system will be a 
"sealed box" when delivered for use. A very important part of an RTOS is managing the 
resources of the computer so that a particular operation executes in precisely the same 
amount of time, every time it occurs. In a complex machine, having a part move more 
quickly just because system resources are available may be just as catastrophic as 
having it not move at all because the system is busy. 
· Single-user, single task - As the name implies, this operating system is designed to 
manage the computer so that one user can effectively do one thing at a time. The Palm 
OS for Palm handheld computers is a good example of a modern single-user, single-task 
operating system. 
· Single-user, multi-tasking - This is the type of operating system most people use on 
their desktop and laptop computers today. Microsoft's Windows and Apple's MacOS 
platforms are both examples of operating systems that will let a single user have several 
programs in operation at the same time. For example, it's entirely possible for a 
Windows user to be writing a note in a word processor while downloading a file from 
the Internet while printing the text of an e-mail message. 
· Multi-user - A multi-user operating system allows many different users to take 
advantage of the computer's resources simultaneously. The operating system must make 
sure that the requirements of the various users are balanced, and that each of the 
programs they are using has sufficient and separate resources so that a problem with one 
user doesn't affect the entire community of users. Unix, VMS and mainframe operating 
systems, such as MVS, are examples of multi-user operating systems. 
Main Functions of an Operating System? 
The main functions of an Operating System is as follows: 
(1)Process Management: 
Page 25
The process management module of an operating system takes care of the creation and 
deletion of processes, scheduling of various system resources to the different processes 
requesting them and providing mechanisms for synchronization and communication 
among processes. 
(2) Memory management: 
The memory management module of an OS takes care of the allocation and deallocation 
of memory space to the various programs in need of this resources. 
(3) File management: 
The file management module of an OS takes care of file-related activities such as 
organization, storing, retrieval, naming, sharing and protection of files. 
(4) Security: 
The security module of an OS protects the resources and information of a computer system 
against destruction and unauthorized access. 
(5) Command interpretation: 
The command interpretation module of an OS takes care of interpreting user commands, 
and directing the system resources to handle the requests. With this mode of interaction 
with the system, the user is usually not too concerned with the hardware details of the 
system. 
Main Features of an Operating System? 
Different operating systems have differing features, though they all have the primary function 
of 
controlling the software and programs running on a computer or other device. 
http://www.teach-ict. 
com/as_as_computing/ocr/H447/F453/3_3_1/features_of_os/miniweb/pg11.htm 
You now have read about the various kinds of operating systems that are part of computers 
ranging from a humble mobile phone to a mighty supercomputer taking up an entire 
building. 
But they share some common features, some of which are more important than others 
depending 
on the type of operating system Scheduling The task of handling how active processes are 
making efficient use of the CPU processing cycles is called scheduling. There are many ways of 
doing this, which is covered in another mini-website. 
Memory Management 
The operating system has to make sure that applications are able to run in the amount of 
memory 
available and that they do not interfere with one another. There is a separate mini-website on 
this 
topic. 
Page 26
Allocation of resources 
The operating system will provide a working area for each user. This includes 
Disk space quota for their files ( especially on shared network drives) 
A personal GUI set up for each user (multi-user operating systems) 
Perhaps how many processing cycles they are allowed to use (especially on mainframe) 
How much printer output they are allowed (networked and mainframe) 
How high a priority they can assign to a job (mainframe) 
Keeping track of usage 
The cost of using large computers is shared amongst the users. So the operating system will 
have 
an accounting / tracking system in place that : 
Counts the processing cycles used per user 
Print out jobs completed 
Batch jobs completed 
Time spent logged in 
Other resources used 
And so on. A regular bill is then sent to the user account providing an itemized (detailed) 
charge. 
Data and User security 
Each user has to be authenticated with an username and password (network and multi-user 
operating system). 
Their data and files will be kept private from other users, unless they choose to make some 
shareable with others. The operating system will only allow administrators ('super 
users') to change parts of the operating system and install applications. 
Providing system services such as print spooling 
Printing out is a time consuming process, so it makes sense to allow users to hand-off a print 
job 
to the operating system so they can get on with other things. This is called 'print spooling' and is 
common on multi-user and networked operating systems. 
Managing input / output 
Data and applications are stored on secondary storage devices such as hard disks, optical drives, 
magnetic tape when not in use. The operating system has a file management system that allows 
the user to organize their files, to move, delete and copy files as they wish. 
Specialized input devices such as graphics tablets and scanners are also handled by the 
operating system. 
Page 27
Handling Network communication 
Data packets traveling to and from the connected computers on the network are handled by the 
operating system. 
When an user drags a file from their hard disk to a shared networked drive, they do not care 
how 
it happens - the operating system takes care of all the details 
EXPLAIN BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A COMPUTER: 
INPUT UNIT: 
PROCESS 
A.L.U. 
C.U. 
Registers 
Main 
Memory 
Data and instructions must be entered into the computer system before any computation can 
be performed on the supplied data. The input unit performs this task. It links the external 
environment with computer system. Functions performed by an input unit are as 
follows: 
® Accepts or reads the list of instructions and data from the outside world. 
® Converts these instructions and data in the computer acceptable form (binary codes). 
This transformation is done by units called input interfaces. 
® Supplies the converted instructions and data to the computer system for further 
processing. 
® Input unit consists of one or more input devices like keyboard, mouse, scanner etc. 
OUTPUT UNIT: 
Page 28 
INPUT OUTPUT 
C.P.U. 
Secondary Memory
The job of output unit is reverse of input unit. It links the computer system with external 
environment. Tasks performed by output units are as follows: 
® Accepts results produced by the computer, which are in the coded form and hence 
cannot be easily understood by us. 
® It converts coded results to human acceptable (readable) form. 
® It supplies the converted results to outside world. 
® Output unit consists of one or more output devices like printer, monitor, speaker etc. 
C.P.U.: (Central Processing Unit): 
The C.P.U. is the heart of the computer. It comprises of : 
C.U. (control unit): 
Control unit is mainly responsible for controlling all the unit of operations in the computers. 
It obtains instructions from the program stored in main memory; interpret the 
instructions; and issues signals that cause other units of the system to execute them. 
A.L.U. (Arithmetic Logical Unit): 
ALU is the place where the actual execution of the instruction takes place. All the 
calculations and comparisons are performed in ALU. Almost all ALUs are designed to 
perform the four basic operations – add, subtract, multiply, divide and logic operations 
or comparison such as less than (<) or greater than (>). 
REGISTERS: 
Registers are small high speed memory used to store temporary results and certain control 
information. Each register has a certain size and function. Registers can be read and 
written at high speed since they are internal to C.P.U. 
STORAGE UNIT: 
This unit holds all the data to be processed and instructions required for processing, 
intermediate results of processing, and final results of processing before these results are 
released to an output unit. Two major types of storages are: 
(1) Primary Storage / Main Memory / Temporary Storage: 
It holds the part of instructions and data of currently running program, intermediate results 
of processing and final result of processing unit until it is transferred to some 
appropriate space. The CPU can access the content of RAM directly. It has limited 
storage capacity. It is expensive. It is volatile i.e. it losses content if power supply is cut 
off. It is faster than secondary storage, e.g. RAM, ROM, Cache etc. 
(2) Secondary Storage / Auxiliary Storage / Permanent Storage: 
It is used to store large amount of instructions and data. C.P.U. is not capable of directly 
accessing data and programs residing on the secondary storage. So, if data need to be 
processed or instruction needs to be executed, it must be transferred to primary storage. 
It is cheaper than primary storage. It is non volatile i.e. it retains content even though 
power supply is cut off. It is slower than primary storage. e.g. Hard Disk, CD, DVD, 
Floppy Disk etc. 
Software: 
The set of computer programs, procedures and associated documents (flowcharts, user 
manuals etc,), which describes the programs and how they are to be used, whose 
objective is to enhance the capabilities of H/W. 
Page 29
Software 
System Software Application Software 
System 
Management 
Programs 
System 
Support 
Programs 
System 
Development 
Programs 
General 
Purpose 
Application 
Software 
Special 
Purpose 
Application 
Software 
A Software can be divided into two major categories 
System Software 
System Software is a set of one or more programs, designed to control the operation and 
extend the processing capability of a computer system. System software makes the 
operation of computer more effective and efficient. Actually, system software is any 
computer software which manages and controls computer hardware so that application 
software can perform a task. 
In general system software performs following functions: 
® System software performs tasks like transferring data from memory to disk, or rendering 
(Representing) text onto a display device. 
® Specific kinds of system software include loading programs, operating systems, device 
drivers, programming tools, compilers, assemblers, linkers, and utility software. 
® It supports development and execution of other application software. 
® It monitors the effective use of various hardware resources, such as CPU, Memory, 
peripherals etc,. 
® It communicates with and controls the operation of peripherals devices, such as printer, 
disk, tape, etc. 
® E.g:. Operating systems, such as Microsoft Windows, Mac OS X or Linux, are well-known 
examples of system software. 
System software mainly includes 3 different types of programs: 
(1) System Management Programs: 
They manage Hardware and Software of computer system. 
e.g. Operating Systems 
(2) System Support Programs: 
They provide support services to users. e.g. Utility Programs. 
Page 30
(3)System development Programs: 
It helps developers in designing and building system. e.g. 
Language translator (compiler, interpreter etc.) 
Application Software 
Application Software is a set of one or more programs, design to solve specific problem, or to do a 
specific task. This application software can be classified into two categories: 
(1) General Purpose Application Software: 
General purpose application software provides certain generalized facilities. They are 
generally pre-written. e.g. Word Processing (MS-Word), Spreadsheet Application (MS 
Excel), Database Application packages etc. 
(2) Special Purpose Application Software: 
Application programs specific to certain area / users for their specific requirement are 
called Special purpose application software. They are custom build. e.g. Inventory 
management, Payroll System etc. 
Difference between System Software and Application Software 
System Software Application Software 
1 It is a set of one or more 
programs, designed to 
control and co-ordinate 
the operations of a 
computer system. 
1 It is a set of one or more programs, 
designed to solve specific 
problem or to do a specific task. 
2 It is machine oriented 2 It is user oriented. 
3 It can execute without help 
of other software 
3 It generally takes the help of system 
software to execute. 
4 e.g. operating system, 
utility software etc. 
4 e.g. Student Management system, 
Payroll System etc. 
 Levels of programming languages: 
OR 
 What are High level and Low level language? 
Ans: 
Programs are classified under three main categories. They are 
1. Machine level 
2. Assembly level 
3. High Level 
1. Machine level language (MLL): 
It is 1st Generation language. It is a language of 1’s and 0’s. This 1’s and 0’s are referred as 
binary code or machine code. Computer can understand this binary code directly or easily. 
Advantages: 
Page 31
® Faster execution 
® Computer understands easily 
Disadvantages: 
® It is machine dependant and not portable 
® Size is larger 
® Difficult to code 
® Debugging (Error solving) is very difficult 
2. Assembly level language (ALL): 
It is an intermediate language. It is written using mnemonics and 1’s and 0’s. This is the 2 nd 
generation language. It is also known as low level language. Since computer cannot understand 
it directly it needs to be translated into machine level language. It requires a program called 
assembler for converting assembly code to machine code. 
Advantages: 
® It is convenient than machine language. 
® User friendly as user can code it easily compared to MLL. 
® Size of the program is reduced as compared machine level language. 
Disadvantages: 
® It is machine dependant and so not portable 
® Takes more execution time than machine level language. 
® Computer cannot understand directly it requires translator. 
3. High Level Languages (HLL): 
Programs are written in English. The Programs cannot be executed directly. It needs to be 
converted to machine level language for execution. It requires a translator called Compiler or 
Interpreter for converting HLL to MLL. Programs are written in BASIC, COBOL, FORTRAN, 
PASCAL, C etc. These programs are also called Procedure Oriented Languages. These languages 
are also called 3rd Generation languages. Programmer needs to specify complete instructions in 
order to perform a task. 
Advantages: 
® Portable i.e. Machine Independent 
® User can understand easily 
® User can write programs easily 
Disadvantages: 
® Execution time is more 
® Computer cannot understand directly. 
4. Fourth Generation Language: 
These are Non Procedure Oriented Languages. It requires outline not detailed instructions to 
perform a task as compared to HLL. It is commonly referred to as 4GL. They are used to work 
with files and databases. They are also called as query languages. 
Page 32
Que: Difference between primary memory and Secondary memory. 
Ans: 
Primary Memory Secondary Memory 
1 It stores programs and data 
which are currently 
needed by the CPU. 
1 The information which is not 
currently being processed 
resides in secondary memory. 
2 Semiconductor memory is 
used as primary memory 
2 Magnetic or Optical memory is 
used as Secondary memory 
3 It is faster compared to 
secondary memory 
3 It is slower compared to Primary 
memory 
4 It has higher cost per bit of 
storage 
4 It has lower cost per bit of storage. 
5 It has low storage capacity 5 It has much large storage capacity 
than primary memory. 
6 The CPU communicates 
directly with main 
memory, 
6 The CPU does not communicates 
directly with secondary 
memory. 
7 It is usually contained on the 
mother board. 
7 The secondary memory is the 
external memory. 
8 E.G. RAM, ROM, etc,. 8 E.G. Hard Disk, CDs, etc,. 
Page 33
MS-Office is a product of Microsoft Company. Ms office is a collection of Application 
Software. Mainly three Software are there: 
(1) Microsoft Word (2) Microsoft Excel (3) Microsoft Power 
Point 
MS-WORD Microsoft Word is a Word Processor Software. (શબદ પર પિકયા કરનાર સોફટવેર). It is a Window bases 
Application software. Into which user can do different types of work, for example, document 
typing, letter typing, bio-data and application making etc. 
Steps for Start: START  All Programs  Microsoft Office  Microsoft Word 
Screen Introduction of Word: 
http://www.functionx.com/word/Lesson01.htm 
Page 34
On the most left side of the title bar, there is an icon that represents the application. That 
application icon also represents menu used to perform many operations related to 
Microsoft Word as an application. 
To use the system menu on the application icon, click the small icon 
A menu appears. From the system menu, click Restore 
To maximize the application again, click the icon again, and click Maximize from the menu. 
On the right side of the icon, there are two groups of words. When Microsoft Word starts, it 
creates an empty document called Document1. It is called default name of Microsoft Word. 
You can then type your text. If at one time you find that you need another document, you 
can initiate a second one. In that case, you would have Document2. Eventually you can 
add more documents. We will come back to that feature. DocumentX represents the name 
of the file you are working on. If you save your document under an appropriate name, the 
new name would display in that area and Document1 or DocumentX would disappear. 
On the right side of Document is the name of the application. Microsoft Word would like 
you to know that it is the running application. 
On the right side of the application’s name, there is a long empty bar; this is the main area 
of the title. As empty as it looks, this area can be used to perform many actions because it 
has a menu of its own. 
To experiment with the title bar, double-click it. The window is restored 
The File extension for the Microsoft Word file is .doc (in MS word 2003) and .docx (in MS 
word 2007). 
 F ile Menu: (alt + F) 
® N ew (ctrl + N): With the help of this option you can create a new file in your word 
document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on File Menu 
(2) Click on New option 
(3) Select blank document 
(4) Click on OK button. 
® O pen (ctrl + O): With the help of this option you can open a previously created file in 
your word document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on File Menu 
(2) Click on Open option 
(3) In Look in: box, select a folder where your file is located. 
(4) In File name: box, give a file name to open. 
(5) Click on Open button. 
Page 35
® Save (ctrl + S): With the help of this option you can save a file. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on file menu. 
(2) Click on Save option. 
(3) In Save in: box, select a folder, where you want to save your word file. 
(4) In File name: box, give a proper file name to save your file. 
(5) Click on Save button. 
® Save As: With the help of this option you can save a file with different / another name. 
it 
means you can create a copy of a file. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on file menu. 
(2) Select Save As option 
(3) In Save in:, box, select a folder, where you want to save your word file. 
(4) In File name: box, give a proper file name to save your file. 
(5) Click on save button. 
® Close: with the help of this option you can close a word file. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on File menu. 
(2) Select close option. 
® P rint (ctrl + P): With the help of this option you can take a print of your file. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on file menu. 
(2) Select print option. 
® Print Preview: With the help of this option you can view a file before taking a print. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on file menu. 
(2) Select print preview option. 
® Page Setup: With the help of this option you can set your page. It means you can set a 
page margin as well as gutter (a Space for biding). You also set orientation 
(Portrait, Landscape). 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on file menu. 
(2) Click on page setup option. 
(3) Set Left margin, Right margin, Top margin , Bottom margin and Gutter 
for the page. 
(4) If you want to set orientation, then click on PAGE SIZE button / tab. 
(5) Select one of the two orientations. 
(6) Click on OK button. 
® Exit: With the help of this option you can close a word or exit from the word. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on file menu. 
(2) Select Exit option. 
Steps for save a file with Password: 
(1) Click on File Menu. 
Page 36
(2) Click on Save As option. 
(3) Click on Tools. 
(4) Click on General Option / Security Option. 
(5) In Password to open: box, give a password 
(6) Click on OK 
(7) In Reenter Password to open: box, reenter the previously given 
password. 
(8) Click on OK button 
(9) In File name:, box, give a proper file name 
(10) Click on save button. 
 E dit Menu (alt + E): 
® Undo (ctrl + Z): With the help of this option you can cancel your last command effect. It 
means it allow us to reverse the last action we have performed. Undo 
is 
one Step backward from the Current Step. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Edit menu. 
(2) Select Undo Option. 
® Redo (ctrl + Y): With the help of this option you can cancel your undo effect. It 
means it allow us to redo an action that we undid by mistake. Redo is 
one Step forward from the Current Step. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Edit menu. 
(2) Select Redo option. 
® Copy (ctrl + C) & Paste (Ctrl + V): With the help of this option you can copy a text and 
picture. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a Text or Picture you want to copy 
(2) Click on Edit menu. 
(3) Select a copy option. 
(4) Set your cursor position 
(5) Click on edit menu again 
(6) Select paste option. 
® Cut (ctrl + X) & Paste (Ctrl + V): With the help of this option you can move a text and 
picture from one location to another location. (One 
place to another place) 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a Text or Picture you want to cut / move 
(2) Click on Edit menu. 
(3) Select a cut option. 
(4) Set your cursor position. 
(5) Click on edit menu again. 
(6) Select paste option. 
® Clear (del): With the help of this option you can delete a selected text and picture. 
STEPS: 
Page 37
(1) Select a Text or Picture you want to delete 
(2) Click on Edit menu. 
(3) Select clear option. 
® Select All (Ctrl + A): With the help of this option you can select a whole document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Edit menu. 
(2) Click on Select all option. 
® Find (Ctrl + F): With the help of this option you can find a text in your word file / 
document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Edit menu. 
(2) Click on find option. 
(3) In Find what: box, type a word or a text, which you want to find. 
(4) Click on “Find Next” button. 
® Replace (Ctrl + H): With the help of this option you can replace a text(word) by another 
text (word). 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Edit menu. 
(2) Click on replace option. 
(3) In Find what: box, type a word or a text which you want to replace. 
(4) In replace with: box, Type a word or a text by which you want to 
replace a previous word or a text. 
(5) Click on Replace button. 
® Go to (Ctrl + G): With the help of this option you can jump to the particular line number 
or particular page in your word document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Edit menu. 
(2) Click on Go to option. 
(3) In Go to What: box, give a line number or page number on to which you 
want to jump. 
(4) In Enter number: box, give a number to jump. (If you want to jump 4 
line forward from the current line then write +4, or if you want to jump 
4 line back ward from the current line then write -4 in the box.). 
(5) Click on Go to button. 
 V iew Menu (alt + V): 
® In Ms Word, there are mainly 4 types of viws: (1) Normal (2) Print Layout (3) Web 
Layout (4) Outline 
(1) Normal: With the help of this option you can view your document or a file in normal 
view. In this type of view margin, header, footer and page border does not displayed. 
STEP: 
(1) Click on View menu. 
(2) Select normal option. 
(2) Print Layout: With the help of this option you can view your document or a file in Print 
Layout view. In this type of view margin, header, footer and page border has been 
displayed. 
Page 38
STEPS: 
(1) Click on View menu. 
(2) Select print layout option. 
(3) Web Layout: With the help of this option you can view your document or a file in 
HTML or web layout view. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on View menu. 
(2) Select Web layout option. 
(4) Outline: With the help of this option you can view your document or a file in outline 
view. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on View menu. 
(2) Select outline option. 
® Tool Bar: with the help of this option of view menu you can ON or OFF a toolbar. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on View Menu 
(2) Select toolbar option 
(3) Select toolbar which you want to ON or OFF. 
® Ruler: With the help of this option you can ON or OFF a ruler. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on view menu 
(2) Select Ruler option for ON or OFF. 
® Header and Footer: With the help of this option you can insert a header and a footer into 
your document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on View menu 
(2) Select Header and Footer option 
(3) In Header box, Give a header 
(4) In footer box, give a footer 
(5) Click on close 
® Full Screen: With the help of this option you can view a document file in a full screen 
mode. In full screen mode Menu bar, Tool bar and a task bar does not 
displayed. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on view menu 
(2) Select full screen option 
(3) For close a full screen click on close full screen button. 
® Zoom: With the help of this option you can view your document in bigger size than the 
normal size. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on view menu 
(2) Select zoom option 
(3) In Zoom to box, give a percentage to view 
(4) Click on OK button. 
 I nsert Menu (alt + I): 
Page 39
® Page Break (ctrl + Enter): With the help of this option you can insert a page break into 
your document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert Menu 
(2) Select Break Option 
(3) Select Page Break from it 
(4) Click on OK Button. 
® Page No: With the help of this option you can insert a page no into your document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert Menu 
(2) Select Page No option 
(3) Select your cursor position 
(4) Select Alignment 
(5) Click on OK button. 
® Date & Time: With the help of this option you can insert date and time into your 
document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Inset menu 
(2) Select Date & Time Option 
(3) Select any one format of Date & Time. 
(4) Click on OK Button. 
® Picture  Clip Art: With the help of this option you can insert a Clip Art in your 
document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert Menu 
(2) Select picture option 
(3) Click on clipart option from it 
(4) Select any one category of a picture 
(5) Click on Insert Clip button 
(6) Close Clipart dialog box. 
® Picture  Word Art: With the help of this option you can insert a Word Art in your 
document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert Menu 
(2) Select Picture option 
(3) Select WordArt option 
(4) Select any one WordArt Style 
(5) Click on OK button 
(6) Write any text. 
(7) Click on OK button. 
® Picture  Auto Shape : With the help of this option you can insert a Auto Shape in 
your 
Document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert Menu 
(2) Select Picture Option 
(3) Select Auto Shape option 
Page 40
(4) Select any one category of Auto Shape 
(5) Select any shape from it 
(6) Drag and drop a mouse. 
® Text Box: With the help of this option you can insert a Text Box in your 
Document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert Menu 
(2) Select Text Box Option 
(3) Drag and Drop the mouse to set that Text Box in your document. 
(4) After Writing the text into the textbox, click outside of the Text Box. 
® Symbol : With the help of this option you can insert a special Symbols into your 
document which are not available onto your keyboard. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert Menu 
(2) Select Symbol option 
(3) Select any one symbol from it 
(4) Click on Insert Button 
(5) Click on close button. 
® Auto Text: With the help of this option you can insert an auto text into your document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert menu 
(2) Select Auto text option 
(3) Select Auto text option in another text box also. 
(4) Enter a text which you want to add into your document. 
(5) Click on Insert button. 
STEPS FOR INSERTING A TEXT IN AN AUTO TEXT GROUP: 
(1) Click on Insert Menu 
(2) Select Auto text option 
(3) Select Auto text option in another text box also. 
(4) Enter Auto Text Entry Here  Add a text which you want to add in auto 
text group 
(5) Click on ADD button 
(6) Click on OK button 
 Format Menu (alt + O): 
® Font : With the help of this option you can format a font, for example, you can 
change font type, font colour, font style, underline style and colour and 
also can apply effect to the text. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a text which you want to format 
(2) Click on Format Menu 
(3) Click on Font option 
(4) Select Font, Font size , font style etc. 
(5) If you want to put underline then select underline style and colour and 
also choose effect for the text 
(6) Click on OK button 
STEPS FOR SUPERSCRIPT (A2 + B2) AND SUBSCRIPT (H2O): 
Page 41
(1) Write A2 + B2 first 
(2) Select 2 from it. 
(3) Click on Font option 
(4) Select Super script or Subscript effect as you want 
(5) Click on OK button 
® Bullets and Numbering: With the help of this option you can insert bullets and 
numbering 
into your document 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Format menu 
(2) Select bullets and numbering option from it 
(3) Select bullets Or Number option from it. 
(4) Select any one style of a bullets 
(5) Click on OK button. 
® Border and Shading: With the help of this option you can insert border and shading on 
selected text as well as also apply shading and border to the 
document page also. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a text on which you want to apply shading or border’ 
(2) Click on format menu 
(3) Click on border and shading option 
(4) Select any one style of a border 
(5) Select any one border colour 
(6) Click on OK button. 
® Paragraph: With the help of this option you can set an format a paragraph into your 
document. For example you can set alignment, and space between two lines 
as 
well as character etc. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a paragraph which you want to format 
(2) Click on format menu 
(3) Click on paragraph option from it 
(4) In Alignment box, Set your paragraph alignment. Indent your paragraph 
left or right according to your requirement. Also set spacing between two 
lines. 
(5) Close Paragraph dialog box. 
® Columns: With the help of this option you can divide a document into more than one 
part or a column. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Format Menu 
(2) Select column option 
(3) Select any column style from it. 
(4) Click on OK button. 
® Drop Cap: With the help of this option you can apply a Drop Cap effect on a character. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a Character on which you want to apply a Drop Cap Effect. 
(2) Click on Format Menu 
(3) Select Drop Cap option 
Page 42
(4) Select any one effect from it 
(5) Click on OK Button. 
Drop Cap: A drop cap is a single letter made large than the others in a paragraph. It is 
the first letter in a section and, as a drop cap, is in a separate text box. It is used to 
draw the eye to the beginning of the section. Drop caps are often seen at the 
beginning of novels. 
® Change Case: With the help of this option you can change a case of a text. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a text 
(2) Click on Format Menu 
(3) Select Change Case option from it 
(4) Select any one case from it 
(5) Click on OK button 
NOTE: Refer Big Question of Change Case and steps 
® Back Ground: With the help of this option you can apply or insert a background into 
your 
document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Format Menu. 
(2) Select Background Option from it. 
(3) Click on Fill Effect 
(4) Click on Present 
(5) Click on Present Colour 
(6) Select any one colour from the present colour 
(7) Select any one shading style 
(8) Click on OK button. 
 Table Menu (alt + A): 
Table: Combination of Rows and Columns is known as table. 
Rows: In Table, Horizontal Lines are called as Rows. 
Columns: In table, Vertical lines are called as Columns. 
Cell: Intersection of Rows and Columns are known as cell. 
® Table  Insert  Table: With the help of this option you can insert a table into your 
document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on table Menu 
(2) Click on Insert option 
(3) Select table sub-option from it 
(4) In Number of Column box, give a number of columns as you want. 
(5) In number of rows box, give a number of rows as you want. 
(6) Click on OK button. 
® Table  Insert  Cell: with the help of this option you can insert a cell into table. 
Page 43
STEPS: 
(1) Set a position of a cursor in a table 
(2) Click on table Menu 
(3) Select Insert option 
(4) Click on Cell sub-option from it 
(5) Click on OK button. 
® Table  Insert  Column: With the help of this option you can insert a column into 
your 
table. 
STEPS: 
(1) Set a position of a cursor in a table 
(2) Click on Table menu 
(3) Click on Insert option 
(4) Choose columns to the left or right according to requirement 
(5) Click on OK button 
® Table  Insert  Row: With the help of this option you can insert a rows into your 
table. 
STEPS: 
(1) Set a cursor position in the table 
(2) Click on table menu 
(3) Select insert option 
(4) Choose rows above or below according to requirement 
(5) Click on OK button 
® Table  Delete  cell: With the help of this option you can delete a particular selected 
cell from your table. 
STEPS: 
(1) Selecta cell which you want to delete. 
(2) Click on Table menu 
(3) Select delete option 
(4) Select cell sub-option from it 
(5) Select an option (up, down, entire row) as according to requirement 
(6) Click on OK button 
® Table  Delete  column: With the help of this option you can delete a particular 
selected column from your table. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a column which you want to delete 
(2) Click on Table Menu 
(3) Click on Column option 
® Table  Delete  Row: With the help of this option you can delete a particular 
selected 
row from your table. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a row which you want to delete 
(2) Click on Table Menu 
(3) Select a delete option 
(4) Select a row sub-option from it. 
® Table  Delete  table: With the help of this option you can delete an entire table. 
Page 44
STEPS: 
(1) Set your cursor position anywhere in the table 
(2) Click on Table Menu 
(3) Select Delete option 
(4) Click on Table sub-option from it. 
® Table  Merge cell: With the help of this option you can merge two or more than two 
cells. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a cells or a rows or a columns which you want to merge 
(2) Click on Table menu 
(3) Select Merge option from it 
® Table  Split cell: With the help of this option you can split or divide a cell into two or 
more than two parts. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a cell which you want to split 
(2) Click on Table Menu 
(3) Select Split cell option 
(4) In Number of column box, give a number into which you want to split a 
cell 
(5) In Number of rows box, give a number into which you want to split a 
cell 
(6) Click on OK button. 
® Table  Split table: With the help of this option you can split an entire Table. 
STEPS: 
(1) Set a cursor position from which you want to split your table 
(2) Click on Table Menu 
(3) Click on Split table Option 
® Table  Auto Format: With the help of this option you can Apply a predefined 
formatting style on to your table. 
STEPS: 
(1) Set your cursor position into table 
(2) Click on Table Menu 
(3) Select Auto format option 
(4) Select any one format from it 
(5) Click on OK button 
® Table  Auto fit Auto fit to the contents: With the help of this option you can set a 
table according to content size 
STEPS: 
(1) Set your cursor position into table 
(2) Click on table menu 
(3) Select Auto fit Option 
(4) Select Auto Fit to the content option from it 
® Table  Sort: With the help of this option you can sort a table Ascending or descending 
order. 
STEPS: 
(1) Set your cursor position into the table 
Page 45
(2) Click on Table Menu 
(3) Select Sort option 
(4) Select options according to your requirement 
(5) Click on OK button 
® Table  Formula: With the help of this option you can apply a predefined formula into 
table. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a cell into which you want to apply a formula 
(2) Click on Table menu 
(3) Select a Formula option 
(4) In Formula box, give a formula as you want for example sum(right), 
sum(left), sum(above) etc 
(5) Click on OK button 
® Table  Select  cell: With the help of this option you can select a cell. 
® Table  Select  row: With the help of this option you can select a row. 
® Table  Select  column: With the help of this option you can select a column. 
® Table  Select  table: With the help of this option you can select a table. 
 T ools Menu (alt + T): 
® Spelling and Grammar check (F7) : With the help of this option you can check a 
spelling 
and grammar of typed paragraph of your document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Tools menu 
(2) Click on Spelling and grammar option 
(3) According to your need click on a suggestion CHANGE, IGNORE, ADD 
button. 
(4) Click on OK button 
(5) For adding a spelling click on ADD button. 
® Word Count: with the help of this option you can count (know) total characters (with 
space and without space), total line numbers, total paragraphs, total page 
numbers and total word into your document. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Tools Menu 
(2) Select Word Count option 
® Auto Correct: With the help of this option you can replace a text or a wrong word from 
the other text or a word. 
® Mail Merge: Refer Big Question of Mail Merge and steps 
BIG Questions: 
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/word_2010/index.htm 
http://www.easykey.net/word/word-97-2003-changing-capital-letters-to-sentence-case 
Page 46
This chapter will teach you how to change cases of your text in Microsoft word 2010. You can 
also capitalize a character you are typing by pressing and holding SHIFT while you type. You 
can also press CAPS LOCK to have every letter that you type be capitalized, and then press 
CAPS LOCK again to turn off capitalization. 
Change Text to Sentence Case: 
A sentence case is the case where first character of every sentence is capitalized. This is very 
simple to change selected text into sentence case by following two simple steps: 
Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text 
selection method to select the text. 
Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select Sentence Case option to capitalize the 
first character of every selected sentence. 
Change Text to Lowercase: 
A lowercase: is the case where every word of a sentence is in lowercase. This is very simple to 
change selected text into lowercase by following two simple steps: 
Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text 
selection method to select the text. 
Page 47
Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select Lowercase option to display all 
selected words in lowercase. 
Change Text to Uppercase: 
An uppercase is the case where every word of a sentence is in uppercase. This is very simple to 
change selected text into uppercase by following two simple steps: 
Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text 
selection method to select the text. 
Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select UPPERCASE option to display all 
selected words in all caps. All characters of every selected word will be capitalized. 
Page 48
Change Text to Capitalize: 
A capitalize case is the case where every first character of every selected word is in capital. 
This is very simple to change selected text into capitalize by following two simple steps: 
Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text 
selection method to select the text. 
Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select Capitalize Each Word option to put a 
leading cap on each selected word. 
Page 49
Toggle the Text: 
Toggle operation will change the case of every character in reverse way. A capital character 
will become lower case and lower case characteter will become upper case. This is very simple 
to toggle case of the text by following two simple steps: 
Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text 
selection method to select the text. 
Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select tOGGLE cASE option to change all 
lowercase words into uppercase and uppercase words into lowercase. 
Page 50
D b paste and paste special. 
Answer: 
In word programs, there is normal pasting which is normally done with images, text, etc, 
then there is special pasting which allows you to copy a section of text from word for example 
and past it into another word program as a picture eg. It just allows you to copy one type of 
information and paste it as another. 
The paste special command has a number of useful tools built into it. Besides allowing you to 
paste values, it also allows you to transpose lists (columns to rows or rows to columns), 
multiply, add, skip blanks and paste links. The paste special command has a number of useful 
tools built into it. Besides allowing you to paste values, it also allows you to transpose lists 
(columns to rows or rows to columns), multiply, add, skip blanks and paste links. 
------------- 
= 
Db copy paste and cut paste. 
Answer: 
When you copy and paste, you leave the original copy where it is and make a second copy 
where you desire. 
When you cut and paste, you take the original copy and move it elsewhere. 
Page 51
Copy and paste copies what you have selected, so you can paste it elsewhere, but the original 
remains. Cut and paste does the same thing, but it deletes the original. 
== 
Cut will remove the original text, while copy leaves the original in place. Paste is the same; it 
makes a copy of the text in the location you choose. Cut and Paste is the same as move. 
== 
Cut is when you remove the words from where you are typing to then place them somewhere else. 
copy just leaves the words there and lets you place them in different spots 
-------- 
Macro: Macro is a set of task combined together, so that you can run or reply the entire tasks 
together with a single command. Macros are the powerful productivity tool. With the help of 
macros, you can perform long or boring tasks, just by a single click, 
For example: All of us performs many repetitive actions day after day on our computers. Once you 
are aware that those are repetitive actions, you can easily create a macro for it and next time 
perform it with a click of a button. 
Examples: login and check your multiple mail accounts, format data, insert data and copyright 
notices onto your documents, generate reports etc. 
-------------- 
http://www.psexam.com/Notes-for-Computer-Science/word-2007-mail-merge-with-an-example. 
html 
Mail Merge is a process of combining source document with data source to create merged document 
such as letters, emails, quotations, invoices, contracts, surveys, reports and audits. 
Mail merge is a very useful tool that helps you create multiple copies of a document like letters, 
invitations, circulations etc. each with small difference in them. In spite of its immense utility, very 
few people are really using it. Most people do tedious task of copy and paste and perform required 
modification not because Mail Merge is inefficient but because they tend to take it as complex 
process. Poor them! I wonder why, even training institutes exclude mail merge from their course 
when teaching Office Package (MS Word, MS Excel, MS Access, and MS PowerPoint). How could 
anybody afford to skip such practically useful topic? Truly speaking, Mail Merge as much easier as it 
is useful. 
The next thing surprises me is a whole lot of mail merge software and applications flourished over the 
net. There is not lack of mail merge template, nor fax mail merge programs. Some are free 
downloadable and some are paid. They might be useful for advanced and complex type of merging 
Page 52
and mass mailing but consider if you really need them? Is Mail Merge tool provided in MS Word not 
sufficient for what you intend - forced you to look for other applications? 
When to use Mail Merge? 
There might be numerous situations when mail merge is suitable solution to accomplish your tasks 
quickly and efficiently. Some examples are: 
* You needed to print envelopes to mail letters. Recipients name, street address, city, state, country, zip 
code, contact etc might have stored on Excel spreadsheet, or Access database, or even in Word 
document itself. 
* You needed to send same message but personalized emails to many people. 
* You needed to fax a memo to all of your branches and officials. 
* Print Students' Report Cards or Marks Cards of an examination. 
* Send notice to different concerned people 
* And many many 
Components of Mail Merge 
The process involves three major components: 
Main Document 
This is the format and structure of document with text and graphics where we insert the placeholders 
for data to fall in. The merged document will be created exactly like main document with different 
content coming form data source document. Main documents can be Letters, E-Mail Message, 
Envelopes, Labels, Directory or any custom document structure. 
Data Source 
This is the storehouse of data. Most often this file is already created for different other purposes. Your 
company database or spreadsheet or even a list created can be used as data source if it contains 
the data items you require to fill up in your main document. When there is no file, required for mail 
merge, don't worry! The option to create a new data source always exists. The most useful data 
source could be your Outlook Contacts if you need to merge and send to email addresses. 
Merge Process 
Page 53
This is a process that picks data items from Data Source and fills the place holders in Main Document to 
create a new merged document or send in mail or even send in fax. You can send merge to the 
printer directly, send to fax or to outlook. 
An example and procedure 
After talking all this, it would be easier to understand through an example. I'm going to show you how 
you can create envelopes using mail merge in Word 2007. 
Step 1. Create Main Document 
Step 2. Create or identify data source 
Step 3. Merge 
Take a new document, then: 
1. Click the Mailings ribbon 
2. From 'Start Mail Merge' button choose 'Envelopes'. Choose the required 'Envelope size' and specify 
the preferred font for 'Delivery address' and 'Return address'. For my purpose I selected Size 10 
Envelop size and default fonts 
3. Click OK to accept and close the dialog box. 
4. Now, type your return address. This won't be changing for each recipient so you can simply type on 
envelop. 
5. Since we don't have recipients yet, let us choose the data source. Click on Select Recipients button. 
6. If you have the data source already created you can choose 'Use Existing List…'. For current 
purpose, I'm creating a new list. So choose 'Type a New List' menu. MS Word will open 'New 
Address List' dialog box. This will be suitable for most cases. If not, you can customize columns. 
Look at the button at the bottom. 
7. Type the list of your recipients in this box. When finished click OK and save the data source file 
giving it a name. 
8. After you specify recipients, now you can return to your main document and insert the place 
holders. 
9. Place the insertion line in Recipients text box and Click on 'Insert Merge Field' button and Choose 
Title. 
Page 54
10. Similarly, inset other fields as shown in figure. 
11. Done. You are ready to merge now. If you wish how the data will be filled in, click on Preview 
Results button on Mailings ribbon. 
12. To merge, click on Finish and Merge button and choose suitable menu. You should get something 
like below: 
---------------- 
1. What is Mail Merge? Explain steps to create a Form Letter. 
Ans: 
® It is a very useful feature of MS Word. 
® You can use mail merge to print Personalized Form Letters, 
Envelops, mailing Labels etc,. 
® Form Letters are those letters, that have the same (or nearly the 
same) contents. 
® Mail Merge is used to send same letters to multiple peoples. 
® Let us assume that we have to send an examination notice to three 
people. For that we will use 2 files. First file contains the complete 
text of the letter, except the name and addresses of the person. This 
file is called the “Main Document” or “The Master Document”. 
Page 55 
Master Document 
Dear, ……………………… 
……………………………….. 
Data File 
Mitul, Surat 
Ravi, Bharuch 
Suresh, Ahmedabad 
Personalized Form Letter 
Dear, Mitul, Surat 
Dear, Ravi, Bharuch 
Dear, Suresh, Ahmedabad
® Another file is called “The Data File” or “The Data Source”, it is used 
to store the names and addresses of the persons to whom the letters 
are to be sent. 
® Mail merge uses the Main Document and then picks up the first 
address from the Data file to print the first letter, then it picks up the 
next address from the data file to print the second letter and so on. 
STEPS: 
1. Click on Tools Menu. 
2. Select Letters and Mailing option. 
3. Click on Mail Merge Option. 
4. On the Right hand Side, Mail Merge Dialog Box is open, into 
which, click on Letters and click on “Next: Starting Documents” 
Link 
5. Choose “use the current document” radio button and click on 
“Next: select recipients” link below. 
6. Choose “type a new list” radio button and click on “Create… New 
recipient list” link below. 
7. Give Appropriate addresses as many as you want, if you want to 
some selected fields then click on the Customize Columns 
button and delete unwanted fields. You can also add and 
rename the fields as you like. 
8. After filling the data save that address list with appropriate 
name. 
9. Click on ok button. 
10. Now click on “Next: write your letter” link below. And start 
typing the letter. 
11. After typing the letter, select address block and put it into your 
letter on appropriate location. You can also click on More items 
link and put some selected items into your letter. 
12. Click on “Next: Preview your letters” link and see the preview of 
your letters. 
13. Click on “Next: complete the merge” link and merge your letter 
with your address list. (In short, merge your Main Document 
with Your data File). 
14. If you want to edit into some particular letter, then click on 
“Edit individual letters” link below. 
15. Otherwise click on print link to printout of your letters or save 
your document and close the word. 
---------- 
Print Manager : 
Is a window program that manage all the printing task within the window. 
Page 56
When you direct window application to print a document, the print manager automatically takes 
control of printing job. 
With print manager you can do the following task: 
(1) continuous working with an application while a document is being printed. 
(2) Print several documents at the same time. 
(3) Display the information about documents in the print queue. 
(4) You can pause print, delete print and resume print. 
File manager: 
File manager is an essential component (part) of window. That allows you to organize and 
maintain files and directories (folders). 
In the file manager the window is divided into 2 parts: Left Half show the directory tree and Right 
half show the files in the selected directory. 
File manager provide following facilities: 
(1) we can see the content of selected drive and selected directory. 
(2) By default file manager automatically sort the content of directory alphabetically by name. it is 
also possible to display the content of directory by size or by Type or by using view menu. 
(3) We can use search option of file menu to search the file and directories in the current drive. 
(4) The new window option of window menu is use to open or view the content of 2 directories 
simultaneously (at the same time). 
(5) By using property option of file menu, we can see the last modify date and time , file 
extension, filename and the actual location of the file. 
(6) We can move, copy, rename and delete the file or directory using the file menu by selecting 
respective option. 
-------------- 
What are the features of word processing? 
Answer: 
insert text: Allows you to insert text anywhere in the document. 
delete text: Allows you to erase characters, words, lines, or pages as easily as you can cross 
them out on paper. 
cut and paste : Allows you to remove (cut) a section of text from one place in a document and 
insert (paste) it somewhere else. 
copy : Allows you to duplicate a section of text. 
Page 57
page size and margins : Allows you to define various page sizes and margins, and the word 
processor will automatically readjust the text so that it fits. 
search and replace : Allows you to direct the word processor to search for a particular word or 
phrase. You can also direct the word processor to replace one group of characters with another 
everywhere that the first group appears. 
word wrap : The word processor automatically moves to the next line when you have filled one 
line with text, and it will readjust text if you change the margins. 
print: Allows you to send a document to a printer to get hardcopy. 
file management : Many word processors contain file management capabilities that allow you 
to create, delete, move, and search for files. 
font specifications: Allows you to change fonts within a document. For example, you can 
specify bold, italics, and underlining. Most word processors also let you change the font size 
and even the typeface. 
footnotes and cross-references: Automates the numbering and placement of footnotes and 
enables you to easily cross-reference other sections of the document. 
graphics graphics: Allows you to embed illustrations and graphs into a document. Some word 
processors let you create the illustrations within the word processor; others let you insert an 
illustration produced by a different program. 
headers , footers , and page numbering: Allows you to specify customized headers and footers 
that the word processor will put at the top and bottom of every page. The word processor 
automatically keeps track of page numbers so that the correct number appears on each page. 
layout : Allows you to specify different margins within a single document and to specify 
various methods for indenting paragraphs. 
macros : A macro is a character or word that represents a series of keystrokes. The keystrokes 
can represent text or commands. The ability to define macros allows you to save yourself a lot 
of time by replacing common combinations of keystrokes. 
merges: Allows you to merge text from one file into another file. This is particularly useful for 
generating many files that have the same format but different data. Generating mailing labels is 
the classic example of using merges. 
spell checker : A utility that allows you to check the spelling of words. It will highlight any 
words that it does not recognize. 
tables of contents and indexes: Allows you to automatically create a table of contents and index 
based on special codes that you insert in the document. 
Page 58
thesaurus: A built-in thesaurus that allows you to search for synonyms without leaving the word 
processor. 
windows : Allows you to edit two or more documents at the same time. Each document appears 
in a separate window. This is particularly valuable when working on a large project that 
consists of several different files. 
WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get): With WYSIWYG, a document appears on the 
display screen exactly as it will look when printed 
----------- 
What is difference between autotext and auto correct in 
Microsoft Word? 
Answer: 
AUTOTEXT 
® Word's AutoText feature allows users to store any amount of text and graphics for re-use 
in other documents. This is typically referred to as boilerplate text. 
® AutoText entries can also be stored in a specific Word template. For example, 
you may want a series of paragraphs to create a Will but would not need those 
paragraphs for any other reason. By storing the entries in a template upon which 
you base Wills, they will not be available when working on any other document 
type. 
® It is easy to move AutoText entries between templates & to copy them to other 
users whereas it is not as easy to do so with AutoCorrect entries. 
AUTOCORRECT 
® The AutoCorrect feature automatically replaces text as you type. This is really 
intended to correct common mistakes. For example, you type 'teh', Word changes 
it to 'the'. That's AutoCorrect. 
® You can set up your own AutoCorrect entries and in that way replace one string 
of text with another. 
® People often use AutoCorrect to insert boilerplate text instead of using AutoText. 
For example, they type P1 and Word automatically replaces it with the text the 
user has told Word is the 'correction' to apply when that string is typed. 
® However, an AutoCorrect replacement string is limited to something like 256 
characters thus limiting it's effective use in relation to boilerplate type text. It is 
also irritating if you actually want to use the string of characters, such as P1, in 
text. 
Page 59
® An obvious example of this is that by default Word replaces (c) with the 
copyright symbol. Useful but annoying if you really want (c) in your text. 
As far as I am aware, it is not possible to print a list of AutoCorrect entries, whereas it is easy to 
print a list of AutoText entries. 
------------- 
What is Word Processing and its features 
Ans:® 
Word Processing, in computer terminology, refers to typing, editing and formatting of 
any kind of document, which could be a letter, memorandum, balance sheet or 
something similar. 
® Word processing simply processes words, i.e. textual information. 
® It can be used to print letters, reports, booklets and so forth, in a suitable layout. 
® A word processor does this by simply formatting the information that is keyed in to the 
computer. 
® Word Processing is different from conventional typing in many ways. 
® Here the document is not printed while it is being keyed in. However, its image is being 
displayed on the video display unit. The user, who is typing the document can verify the 
correctness of document that is displayed on the computer screen. 
® If the user finds any mistake while typing or later, he / she easily correct mistakes. 
® Once the user is sure that there are no mistakes in the documents it may be printed. 
® The current word processors are very powerful. We can create any type of document 
using the powerful feature of the word processor. 
® We can use various commands to format the document in the way we want. 
® We can check on the computer screen for mistakes and correct them. 
® In word processor, we can recall the document from computers memory, correct 
mistakes and reprint it. 
® The corrected document can be again saved in the memory for future use. 
Some of the features available in most word processing packages are: 
1. insert text: Allows you to insert text anywhere in the document. 
2. delete text: Allows you to erase characters, words, lines, or pages as easily as you can 
cross them out on paper. 
3. cut and paste : Allows you to remove (cut) a section of text from one place in a 
document and insert (paste) it somewhere else. 
4. copy : Allows you to duplicate a section of text. 
5. page size and margins : Allows you to define various page sizes and margins, and the 
word processor will automatically readjust the text so that it fits. 
6. search and replace : Allows you to direct the word processor to search for a particular 
word or phrase. You can also direct the word processor to replace one group of 
characters with another everywhere that the first group appears. 
Page 60
7. word wrap : The word processor automatically moves to the next line when you have 
filled one line with text, and it will readjust text if you change the margins. 
8. print: Allows you to send a document to a printer to get hardcopy. 
9. file management : Many word processors contain file management capabilities that 
allow you to create, delete, move, and search for files. 
10. font specifications: Allows you to change fonts within a document. For example, you 
can specify bold, italics, and underlining. Most word processors also let you change the 
font size and even the typeface. 
11. footnotes and cross-references: Automates the numbering and placement of footnotes 
and enables you to easily cross-reference other sections of the document. 
12. Graphics: graphics Allows you to embed illustrations and graphs into a document. 
Some word processors let you create the illustrations within the word processor; others 
let you insert an illustration produced by a different program. 
13. headers , footers , and page numbering: Allows you to specify customized headers 
and footers that the word processor will put at the top and bottom of every page. The 
word processor automatically keeps track of page numbers so that the correct number 
appears on each page. 
14. layout : Allows you to specify different margins within a single document and to 
specify various methods for indenting paragraphs. 
15. macros : A macro is a character or word that represents a series of keystrokes. The 
keystrokes can represent text or commands. The ability to define macros allows you to 
save yourself a lot of time by replacing common combinations of keystrokes. 
16. merges: Allows you to merge text from one file into another file. This is particularly 
useful for generating many files that have the same format but different data. Generating 
mailing labels is the classic example of using merges. 
17. spell checker : A utility that allows you to check the spelling of words. It will highlight 
any words that it does not recognize. 
18. tables of contents and indexes: Allows you to automatically create a table of contents 
and index based on special codes that you insert in the document. 
19. thesaurus: A built-in thesaurus that allows you to search for synonyms without leaving 
the word processor. 
20. windows : Allows you to edit two or more documents at the same time. Each document 
appears in a separate window. This is particularly valuable when working on a large 
project that consists of several different files. 
21. WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get): With WYSIWYG, a document appears 
on the display screen exactly as it will look when printed 
Page 61
MS EXCEL 
Ms Excel is also a window based application software. In MS Excel user can do calculation work 
very easily. For example, balance sheet, Salary sheet, Mark sheet, Income-Expense statement 
etc,. 
Ms Excel is also known as spread sheet software. 
File extension for excel is .xls (for 2003 version) and .xlsx (for 2007 version), and the default name 
of MS Excel file is Book 1. 
Screen Introduction of MS Excel 
· ROW: A horizontal line in a worksheet is known as rows. In a worksheet there are total 65,536 
rows. 
· Column: A vertical line in a worksheet is known as columns. In a worksheet there are total 256 
column. It has a A, B, C, ……. AA, AB, AC, …… AZ names accordingly. 
· Cell: Intersection between rows and columns is known as Cell. 
· Active Cell: Currently selected cell in a worksheet is known as active cell. There is a thick border 
around one of the cells. 
· Worksheet: Combination of rows and columns is known as worksheet. There are 3 worksheet 
in a workbook by default. 
· Workbook: Collection of one or more than one worksheet is known as workbook. A default 
name of a workbook is book-1. we can also add a worksheet according to our requirement. ` 
Page 62
· Spreadsheet: A spreadsheet is a piece of software for handling and manipulating (controls) 
numbers. 
http://www.homeandlearn.co.uk/me/mes1p1.html 
· Auto Fill: AutoFill is a very handy feature of Excel. It allows you to quickly fill a series of data, 
such as days of the week, months, and consecutive numbers. 
· Range: A range is a group or block of cells in a worksheet that have been selected or 
highlighted. When cells have been selected they are surrounded by an outline or border. 
Some Shortcut Keys: 
Ctrl + Spacebar = for selecting columns 
Shift + Spacebar = for selecting rows 
Ctrl + A = for selecting whole worksheet. 
Insert Menu: 
® Chart: With the help of this option you can insert a chart into your Spreadsheet. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a data range. 
(2) Click on Insert menu 
(3) Click on chart option 
(4) Select a chart style 
(5) Select a sub type of a chart 
(6) Click on Next Button 
(7) Click on Next Button again 
(8) Give a name of X- axis and Y-axis and Title of a chart 
(9) Set a position of a Legend 
(10)If you want to show a value in a chart then click on Data lable 
(11)Click on ( tick a check box) Show value option. 
(12)Click on Next button 
(13)Select a radio button according to requirement, if you want to put a chart in that 
spreadsheet or a new worksheet 
(14)Click on FINISH button 
Tools Menu: 
® Protection  Protect sheet: With the help of this option you can Protect your 
worksheet. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Tools Menu 
(2) Select Protection option 
(3) Select a protect sheet option 
(4) Give a password if you want 
(5) Click on OK button 
(6) Give a password again 
(7) Click on OK button 
® Protection  Unprotect sheet: With the help of this option you can unprotect your 
worksheet. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Tools Menu 
(2) Select Protection option 
(3) Select a unprotect sheet option 
(4) Give a password 
Page 63
(5) Click on OK button 
® Goal Seek: If you know the result but not know the actual digit or a number with which that 
result come, then goal seek option can be used, for example, you know that, 3 + 7 = 10, but 1st 
class student , know that something + 7 = 10, but he/she does not know that something 
number then he/she can used goal seek to find that something number. 
Goal Seek only can apply on formula applied cell. 
STEPS: 
(1) Select a cell which has a formula 
(2) Click on goal seek option 
(3) In set cell box, give an address of a formula applied cell 
(4) In to value box, give a result which we know… ( 10 in the above example) 
(5) In By changing cell box, give a cell address of that cell which we do not know, ( 3 in the 
above example) 
(6) Click on OK button 
Data Menu: 
® Sort: With the help of this option you can sort a values of a worksheet. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Data Menu 
(2) Select a sort option 
(3) In sort by box, select according to requirement 
(4) Click on OK button 
® Form: With the Help of this option you can convert a column into a form. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on DATA menu 
(2) Select form option 
(3) Entry in opened form 
(4) With the help of NEW button u can enter a new record 
(5) Click on close. 
® Subtotal: You can insert a subtotal with the help of this option 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Data menu 
(2) Select subtotal option 
(3) In At each change in box, select an item 
(4) Select a column which you want to subtotal 
(5) Click on OK button 
STEPS FOR CLEAR THE OUTLINE: 
(1) Click on Data menu 
(2) Click on Groups and Outlines options 
(3) Click on clear outline option. 
STEPS FOR REMOVE SUBTOTAL 
(1) Click on Data Menu 
(2) Select Subtotal option 
(3) Click on Remove All button 
® Data  Filter  Auto Filter: With the help of this option you can apply an 
automatic filter into your worksheet. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Data menu 
(2) Select a filter option 
(3) Select Auto Filter sub-option from it 
Page 64
® Data  Filter  Advance Filter: With the help of this option you can apply an 
advance filter into your worksheet. 
STEPS: 
(1) Type a condition for advance filter ( e.g. rate > 3) in some cell. 
(2) Select a data range 
(3) Click on data menu 
(4) Click on filter option 
(5) Click on advance filter option 
(6) In Criteria box, Select a cell in which cell, you applied that ( rate >3) 
condition. 
(7) Select a “copy to another location” radio button 
(8) In copy to box, select a cell where you want to display a filtered record. 
(9) Click on OK button. 
======= NEW ======= 
There are different types of functions in Excel. 
Date and Time Function: 
1. Date : Returns a date, from a user-supplied year, month 
and day. 
Syntax : =Date(year, month, day) 
2. Time: Returns a time, from user – supplied hour, minute 
and second. 
Syntax: =Time(Hour, Minute, Second) 
3. Today( ) : It returns the current date. 
Syntax: =Today() 
4. Now() : It returns the current date and time. 
Syntax: =now() 
Text Function: 
1. upper(): It converts the text in uppercase. 
Syntax: =upper(argument) 
Example: =upper(“ashish”) 
2. lower(): It converts the text in lowercase. 
Syntax: =lower(argument) 
Example: =lower(“ASHISH”) 
3. left(): Returns a specified number of characters from the 
start of a supplied text string. 
Syntax: =left(text, number) 
Page 65
Example: =left(“Ashish Computer Center”,8) 
4. right(): returns a specified number of characters from the 
end of a supplied text string. 
Syntax: =right(text, number) 
Example: =right(“Ashish Computer Center”,8) 
5. mid(): returns a specified number of characters from the 
middle of a supplied text string. 
Syntax: =mid(text, start_num, num) 
Example: =mid(“ashish computer center”, 5,9) 
6. len(): it returns a length of a specified text string. 
Syntax: =len(text) 
Example: =len(“ashish”) 
7. rept(): it will print a text or a character more than one time. 
Syntax: =rept(text, number times) 
Example: =rept(“@ “,10) 
8. concatenate(): it joins together two or more text strings. 
Syntax: = concatenate(text1, text2, ….) 
Example: =concatenate(“Ashish “,”Patel”) 
9. code (): It returns the numeric value (ASCII value)for the 
first character of a supplied string. 
Syntax: =code(text) 
Example:=code(“A”) 
10. char(): it returns the character that corresponds to a 
supplied numeric value. 
Syntax: =char(number) 
Example: =char(100) 
Calculation Function (Mathematical Function): 
1. sum(): it returns the sum of a supplied list of numbers. 
Syntax: =sum(number1, number2,…) 
Example: =sum(A1:A5) 
Page 66
Adding Up 
You've seen how to add up in Excel. You either used individual cells to 
add up, like this: 
= A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 
Or you have used a range of cells with the Sum function. Like this: 
= Sum(A1:A4) 
Either way you get the same answer. But you can combine the two to add 
up. For example, if you wanted to add up cells A1 to A4 and cell A10, 
you'd do it like this: 
= Sum(A1:A4) + A10 
You can also use the Sum function alone. Like this: 
= Sum(A1:A4, A10) 
Here we have entered a range of cells in the brackets - A1:A4. But after 
that, we added a comma then the final cell we wanted to add up. If we 
also wanted to add cells A12 and A14 to our sum, we just add a comma 
then the cell reference. Like this: 
= Sum(A1:A4, A10, A12, A14) 
2. product(): returns the product of a supplied list of numbers. 
Syntax: =product(number1, number2,…) 
Example: =product(A1:A5) 
Multiplying 
You saw how to multiply two numbers together. Just use the asterisk 
symbol with the cell references. Like this: 
= A1 * A2 
But what if you wanted to multiply a long range of values together? You 
might want to multiply all the numbers in the cells A1 to A10. Surely 
you don't have do this = A1 * A2 * A3 * A4 * A5, etc? 
You'd be right - you don't have to enter all the cell references. You can 
do the same as in the Sum Function, just use A1:A5. But instead of using 
the word Sum you use the word Product. Like this: 
=Product(A1:A5) 
If you look back at Exercise 2, the number 3 was in the cells A1 to E1. 
We then added them up. If you wanted to multiply them all instead, use 
Product. To further illustrate what Product does, this is what we wanted 
to multiply: 
= 3 * 3 * 3 * 3 * 3 
So 3 times 3 = 9. Multiply the 9 by the third 3 to give 27. Multiply the 27 
by the fourth 3 to give 81. Multiply the 81 by the fifth 3 to give 243. And 
that's what Product does: Multiplies a range of cells together. Just like the 
Sum function, you can add other cells after a comma. Like this: 
= Product(A1:E1, A3) 
Page 67
In the above function, our answer of 243 will be multiplied by whatever is in cell A3 
3. subtraction: it returns the subtracted value of a supplied list 
of numbers. 
Example: = A1 – A2 
Subtraction 
To subtract one value from another, you just use the minus sign in 
between your cell references. Like this: 
= A1 - A2 
Below is an image from a spreadsheet showing a subtraction formula: 
Cell A3 is where the answer is displayed, and where we entered the 
formula. 
If you want to subtract more than two cells you can do it like this: 
= A1 - B1 - C1 
Subtraction is fairly straightforward in spreadsheets, and shouldn't cause you too 
many problems. 
4. mod : It returns the remainder from a division between two 
supplied numbers. 
Syntax: =mod(number, divisor) 
Example: =mod(10,4) 
Output: 2 
5. POWER: It Returns the result of a given number raised to a 
supplied power 
Syntax: =power(number,power) 
Example: =power(10,2) 
Output: 100 
Page 68
6. SQRT:It Returns the positive square root of a given number 
Syntax:=sqrt(number) 
Example: =sqrt(16) 
Output: 4 
7. SUBTOTAL: It Performs a specified calculation (eg. the sum, 
product, average, etc.) for a supplied set of values. 
Include Hidden 
value 
Ignore Hidden 
Values 
Function List 
1 101 avg 
2 102 count 
3 103 countA 
4 104 max 
5 105 min 
6 106 product 
7 107 stdev 
8 108 stdevp 
9 109 sum 
10 110 var 
11 111 varp 
Syntax: =subtotal(function_num, ref1, …) 
Example: =subtotal(9,A1:A5) 
8. Division: It is used to divide two or more list of supplied 
numbers. 
Syntax: =A1/A5 
Example: =A1/A5 
10. Quotient: 
http://spreadsheets.about.com/od/excelfunctions/qt/quotient_funct.htm 
Functions: 
Page 69
The QUOTIENT function can be used to divide numbers in Excel. 
Unlike regular division, however, the QUOTIENT function only gives you the 
whole number as an answer - not the remainder. 
The syntax for the QUOTIENT function is: 
=QUOTIENT ( numerator , denominator ) 
Example: =QUOTIENT(5,2) 
Output: 2 
Division 
If you want to divide one number by another the symbol to use is this one: 
/ 
That's the forward slash, and can be found just to the right of the full stop on 
your keyboard. You use it like this: 
= A1 / C1 
There are a number of times when you would want to divide, but wouldn't need 
the divider symbol at all. For example, you use division to calculate Averages, 
but you wouldn't need the divider symbol here because Excel has a separate 
Average function. Likewise, if you wanted to calculate monthly payments, you 
wouldn't need to use the divider symbol because Excel had quite a number of 
financial functions you can use. (We'll meet some of these later in the course.) 
The answer you should have got was 150. Notice the brackets in the formula. 
The brackets group part of your sum together. Without them, Excel will 
normally calculate from left to right. But it does some calculation before others. 
Excel sees multiplication as more important than adding up. To see what 
happens without the brackets, do this: 
* Click on cell A5 
* Click inside the formula bar at the top 
* Delete both the brackets from the formula 
* Press the return key on your keyboard to see the answer 
Now the answer is different! This time you should have gotten 125. Here are the 
picture versions of both formulas: 
With Brackets Without Brackets 
Page 70
You might think the second one is wrong. But it's not. It's just the way Excel works things 
out. Because it sees multiplication as more important than adding up, it will multiply 
cell A2 by cell A3 first. That gets the answer of 100. Excel will then add this answer to 
cell A1, which gives the answer 125. 
With the brackets in, you force Excel to work things out your way. You're 
saying "Do the sum in brackets first, then multiply". When you do the brackets 
first, you get a different answer. A1 + A2 = 75. Multiply 75 by cell A3 and you 
get the answer 150. 
The moral is: take care when you are grouping operators together. And force 
Excel to work things out your way by using brackets to group your sums. 
Example 2 
Substitute the asterisk symbol from example 1 with the forward slash. So the 
formula will be changed from this: 
= (A1 + A2) * A3 
to this: 
= (A1 + A2) / A3 
Press the Return key on your keyboard to reveal the answer. It should be 37.5. 
Now take the brackets out and try again. Again, you get a different answer. The 
total will now be 50! 
Again the same process is at work. Excel sees division as more important than 
adding up, so it does that first. So it will divide 50 by 2 to get 25. Then it will 
add the contents of cell A1 to get 50. With the brackets, we force Excel to do the 
adding up first, then divide by the cell A3. 
Example 3 
This time, enter the following formula for cell A5: 
= (A1 * A2) / A3 
Press the Return key on your keyboard to reveal the answer. It should be 625. 
Remove the brackets and try again. The answer should be 625 again. This is 
because Excel sees Multiplication and division as being of equal importance. 
When all things are equal, Excel calculates from left to right. 
Likewise, Excel sees addition and subtraction as being of equal importance. So it 
will calculate from left to right if you use addition and subtraction in the same 
formula. As an example, study this formula below: 
Page 71
As you can see, the formula in cell A5 is = A1 + A2 - A3. Now does that mean 
this: 
= (A1 + A2) - A3 
Or this: 
= A1 + (A2 - A3) 
Statistical Functions & Counting Functions 
1. average(): it returns the average of the supplied list of 
numbers. 
Syntax: =average(number1, number2,…) 
Example: =average(A1:A5) 
2. count(): Returns the number of numerical values in a 
supplied set of cells or values. 
Syntax: =count(value1, value2,…) 
Example: =count (A1:A5) 
3. countA():Returns the number of non-blanks in a supplied 
set of cells or values. 
Syntax: =countA(value1, value2,…) 
Example: =countA (A1:A5) 
4. countIF(): The Excel Countif function returns the number of cells 
(of a supplied range), that satisfy a given criteria. 
Syntax: = COUNTIF( range, criteria ) 
Where, 
range - The range of cells that should be tested against the supplied criteria and 
counted if the criteria is satisfied. 
criteria - A user-defined condition that is tested against each of the cells in range. 
A criteria can be either: 
-a numeric value (which may be an integer, decimal, date, time, or logical value) 
(eg. 10, 01/01/2008, TRUE) 
Page 72
or - a text string (eg. "Text", "Monday") 
or - an expression (eg. ">12", "<>0") 
Formulas: 
A B C D 
1 Sunday 
07- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
0 TRUE 
2 Monday 
08- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
2.1 TRUE 
3 
Wednesd 
ay 
10- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
2 TRUE 
4 Thursday 
11- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
3 
FALS 
E 
5 Wednesd 
ay 
17- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
2.5 FALS 
E 
Results: 
A B C D 
1 Sunday 
07- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
0 
TRU 
E 
2 Monday 
08- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
2.1 
TRU 
E 
3 
Wednesd 
ay 
10- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
2 
TRU 
E 
4 Thursday 
11- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
3 
FALS 
E 
5 Wednesd 
ay 
17- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
2.5 FALS 
E 
Page 73
8 
6 Tuesday 
23- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
3 
FALS 
E 
7 
Wednesd 
ay 
24- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
6 
FALS 
E 
8 Sunday 
05- 
O 
c 
t 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
4 
FALS 
E 
9 Saturday 
11- 
O 
c 
t 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
0 
FALS 
E 
10 
11 =COUNTIF( A1:A9, "Wednesday" ) 
12 =COUNTIF( A1:A9, "<>Wednesday" ) 
13 =COUNTIF( B1:B9, ">01/10/2008" ) 
14 =COUNTIF( C1:C9, 0 ) 
15 =COUNTIF( C1:C9, ">=3" ) 
16 =COUNTIF( D1:D9, TRUE ) 
8 
6 Tuesday 
23- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
3 
FALS 
E 
7 
Wednesd 
ay 
24- 
S 
e 
p 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
6 
FALS 
E 
8 Sunday 
05- 
O 
c 
t 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
4 
FALS 
E 
9 Saturday 
11- 
O 
c 
t 
- 
2 
0 
0 
8 
0 
FALS 
E 
10 
11 3 
12 6 
13 2 
14 2 
15 4 
16 
Page 74
5. max() : Returns the largest value from a list of supplied 
numbers. 
Syntax: =max(number1, number2,…) 
Example: =max(A1:A5) 
6. min(): returns the smallest value form a list of supplied 
numbers. 
Syntax: =min(number1, number2,…) 
Example: =min(A1:A5) 
Logical Functions: 
1. AND: The Excel AND function tests a number of user-defined conditions and returns a 
result of: 
- TRUE if ALL of the conditions evaluate to TRUE or 
- FALSE otherwise (i.e. if ANY of the conditions evaluate to FALSE). 
Syntax: AND( logical_test1, [logical_test2], ... ) 
Example: =AND( A1>0, A1<B1 ) 
2. OR: The Excel OR function tests a number of supplied conditions and returns either 
TRUE if ANY of the conditions evaluate to TRUE or - FALSE otherwise (i.e. if ALL of the 
conditions evaluate to FALSE) 
Syntax: OR( logical_test1, [logical_test2], ... ) 
Example: =OR( A1>0, A1<B1 ) 
3. NOT: The Excel NOT function receives a logical value and simply returns the opposite 
logical value. i.e. if supplied with the value TRUE, the Not function returns FALSE and if 
supplied with the value FALSE, the function will return the value TRUE. 
Syntax: = Not( logical ) 
Example: =NOT(TRUE) 
Output: FALSE 
 Conditional Function: 
1. IF: It tests a user defined condition and returns one result if the condition is TRUE, and 
another result if the condition is FALSE. 
Page 75
Syntax: =If(logical_test,value_if_true,value_if_false) 
Example: =If(A1<35,”fail”,”Pass”) 
 LOOK UP and Reference Functions: 
1. LOOKUP: The Excel LOOKUP function 'looks up' a supplied value within a data set and 
returns the corresponding value from a second data set. If the function fails to find an 
exact match to the supplied 'lookup' value, it uses the largest value that is less than or 
equal to the supplied 'lookup' value. 
Where, 
lookup_value - the value that you want to look up in the supplied 
lookup_vector 
lookup_vector - A 1-dimensional list of data, which we want to 
search for the lookup_value. 
result_vector - A 1-dimensional list of data, from which we want 
to return a value (must be the same length as the 
lookup_vector) 
Syntax: LOOKUP( lookup_value, lookup_vector, result_vector ) 
Example: 
The above Lookup function returns the interest rate of 5%, which is the correct 
interest rate to apply to a bank account with a balance of $45,000. 
Example 2: 
The above Lookup function returns the grade for the score 82%, which is B. 
2. HLOOKUP: The Excel Hlookup function 'looks up' a given value in the top row of a data 
array (or table), and returns the corresponding value from another row of the array. 
Syntax: HLOOKUP( lookup_value, table_array, row_index_num, [range_lookup] ) 
Where, 
lookup_value - The value that you want to look for, in the first row of the 
supplied data array 
Page 76
table_array - The data array or table, that you want to search the first row 
of, for the supplied lookup_value 
row_index_num - The row number, within the supplied array, that you 
want the corresponding value to be returned from 
[range_lookup] - An optional logical argument, which can be set to 
TRUE or FALSE, 
meaning : 
TRUE - if the function cannot find an exact match to the supplied 
lookup_value, it should use the closest match below the supplied 
value (Note: If range_lookup is set to TRUE, the top row of the 
table_array must be in ascending order) 
FALSE - if the function cannot find an exact match to the supplied 
lookup_value, it should return an error 
Example: 
Formulas: Results: 
3. VLOOKUP: The Excel VLOOKUP function 'looks up' a given value in the left-hand 
column of a data array (or table), and returns the corresponding value from another 
column of the array 
Syntax: VLOOKUP( lookup_value, table_array, col_index_num, [range_lookup] ) 
LEFT HAND COLUNM instead of First row of the supplied array. 
Example: 
The above Vlookup function returns the price for "Cornflakes", which is $3.50. 
Page 77
Financial Function: 
1. FV: The Excel FV function calculates the Future Value of an investment with periodic 
constant payments and a constant interest rate 
Syntax: FV( rate, nper, [pmt], [pv], [type] ) 
Where, 
rate - The interest rate, per period 
nper - The number of periods for the lifetime of the annuity 
[pmt] - An optional argument that specifies the payment per period 
(if the [pmt] argument is omitted, the [pv] argument must be 
supplied) 
[pv] - An optional argument that specifies the present value of the annuity 
- i.e. the amount that a series of future payments is worth now (if the 
[pv] argument is omitted, it takes on the default value 0. Also, if 
[pv] is omitted, the [pmt] argument must be supplied) 
[type] - An optional argument that defines whether the payment is made at 
the start or the end of the period.The type argument can have the 
value 0 or 1, meaning: 
0 - the payment is made at the end of the period 
1 - the payment is made at the beginning of the period 
If the type argument is omitted, it takes on the default value 
of 0 (denoting payments made at the end of the period). 
Example: 
Formula: 
A 
1 
Future value of an investment 
of $1,000 per month over 
5 
years, with a present value 
of 
$0, and an interest rate of 
5% 
per year (payment made 
at 
end of each mth): 
=FV( 5%/12, 60, -1000 ) 
result : 
A 
1 
Future value of an investment 
of $1,000 per month over 
5 
years, with a present value 
of 
$0, and an interest rate of 
5% 
per year (payment made 
at 
end of each mth): 
2 $68,006.08 
2. PV: The Excel PV function calculates the Present Value of an investment, based on a 
series of future payments. 
Syntax: PV( rate, nper, pmt, [fv], [type] ) 
Example: 
Page 78
More Details: http://www.excelfunctions.net 
Yield (ઊપજવું): The Excel YIELD function calculates the Yield of a security that pays periodic 
interest. 
Syntax: =yield(settlement, maturity, rate, pr, redemption, frequency, 
basis]) 
Where, 
settlement-The settlement date of the security (ie. the date that the coupon 
is purchased) 
maturity -The maturity date of the security (ie. the date that the coupon 
expires) 
rate - The security's annual coupon rate 
pr -The security's price per $100 face value 
redemption - The security's redemption value per $100 face value 
frequency -The number of coupon payments per year. This must be one of 
the following: 
1-Annually 
2-Semi-Annually 
4-Quarterly 
[basis] -An optional integer argument which specifies the financial day 
count basis that is used by the security. Possible values are: 
[basis] Day Count Basis 
0 (or omitted) US (NASD) 30/360 
1 actual/actual 
2 actual/360 
3 actual/365 
4 European 30/360 
The financial day count basis rules are explained in detail on the Wikipedia Day Count 
Convention page 
Note that the settlement and maturity arguments should be supplied to the function as 
either: 
References to cells containing dates 
or 
Dates returned from formulas 
Warning: 
-If you attempt to input the settlement and maturity dates as text, these can be 
interpreted differently, depending on the date system and date interpretation settings 
on your computer. 
Page 79
-Although you can input the dates as serial numbers, this is not recommended, as date 
serial numbering varies across different computer systems 
Example: 
The following example shows the Excel Yield function used to calculate the 
yield on a coupon purchased on 01-Jan-2010, with Maturity date 30-Jun-2015 
and a rate of 10%. The price per $100 face value is $101 and the redemption 
value is $100. Payments are made quarterly and the US (NASD) 30/360 day 
count basis is used: 
A B 
1 Settlement Date: 01-Jan-2010 
2 Maturity Date: 30-Jun-2015 
3 =YIELD( B1, B2, 10%, 101, 100, 4 ) 
Calculates the yield to be 9.76%. 
Note that, in the above example, the [basis] argument has been omitted, so the 
default US (NASD) 30/360 day method is used. Note also that, as recommended, 
the date arguments have been input as references to cells containing dates 
Page 80
============== OLD ============== 
Formula and Functions: 
http://www.excelfunctions.net/ExcelFunctions.html 
Formula: You will use formulas to calculate values stored in your 
worksheet. 
Function: Functions are predefined formulas that performs specific 
calculations, such as finding an average or future value. 
Functions require arguments – the data to be calculated. 
NOTE: Before any formula and Functions, you should put an “is 
equal to” sign (=) before it. 
There are different types of functions in Excel. 
Date and Time Function: 
1. Date : Returns a date, from a user-supplied year, month 
and day. 
Syntax : =Date(year, month, day) 
2. Time: Returns a time, from user – supplied hour, minute 
and second. 
Syntax: =Time(Hour, Minute, Second) 
3. Today( ) : It returns the current date. 
Syntax: =Today() 
4. Now() : It returns the current date and time. 
Syntax: =now() 
Text Function: 
1. upper(): It converts the text in uppercase. 
Syntax: =upper(argument) 
Example: =upper(“ashish”) 
2. lower(): It converts the text in lowercase. 
Page 81
3. left(): Returns a specified number of characters from the 
start of a supplied text string. 
Syntax: =left(text, number) 
Example: =left(“Ashish Computer Center”,8) 
4. right(): returns a specified number of characters from the 
end of a supplied text string. 
5. mid(): returns a specified number of characters from the 
middle of a supplied text string. 
Syntax: =mid(text, start_num, num) 
Example: =mid(“ashish computer center”, 5,9) 
6. len(): it returns a length of a specified text string. 
Syntax: =len(text) 
Example: =len(“ashish”) 
7. rept(): it will print a text or a character more than one time. 
Syntax: =rept(text, number times) 
Example: =rept(“@ “,10) 
8. concatenate(): it joins together two or more text strings. 
Syntax: = concatenate(text1, text2, ….) 
Example: =concatenate(“Ashish “,”Patel”) 
9. code (): It returns the numeric value (ASCII value)for the 
first character of a supplied string. 
Syntax: =code(text) 
Example:=code(“A”) 
10. char(): it returns the character that corresponds to a 
supplied numeric value. 
Syntax: =char(number) 
Example: =char(100) 
Calculation Function (Mathematical Function): 
1. sum(): it returns the sum of a supplied list of numbers. 
Example: =sum(A1:A5) 
2. product(): returns the product of a supplied list of numbers. 
Page 82
Example: =product(A1:A5) 
3. subtraction: it returns the subtracted value of a supplied list 
of numbers. 
Example: = A1 – A2 
4. mod : It returns the remainder from a division between two 
supplied numbers. 
5. average(): it returns the average of the supplied list of 
numbers. 
Example: =average(A1:A5) 
6. count(): Returns the number of numerical values in a 
supplied set of cells or values. 
Example: =count (A1:A5) 
7. max() : Returns the largest value from a list of supplied 
numbers. 
Example: =max(A1:A5) 
8. min(): returns the smallest value form a list of supplied 
numbers. 
9. Division: It is used to divide two or more list of supplied 
numbers. 
10. 
http://spreadsheets.about.com/od/excelfunctions/qt/quotient_funct.htm 
Functions: 
The QUOTIENT function can be used to divide numbers in Excel. 
Unlike regular division, however, the QUOTIENT function only gives you the whole number 
as an answer - not the remainder. 
The syntax for the QUOTIENT function is: 
=QUOTIENT ( numerator , denominator ) 
Page 83
11. 
 
Adding Up 
You've seen how to add up in Excel. You either used individual cells to add up, like this: 
= A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 
Or you have used a range of cells with the Sum function. Like this: 
= Sum(A1:A4) 
Either way you get the same answer. But you can combine the two to add up. For example, if 
you wanted to add up cells A1 to A4 and cell A10, you'd do it like this: 
= Sum(A1:A4) + A10 
You can also use the Sum function alone. Like this: 
= Sum(A1:A4, A10) 
Page 84
Here we have entered a range of cells in the brackets - A1:A4. But after that, we added a 
comma then the final cell we wanted to add up. If we also wanted to add cells A12 and A14 to 
our sum, we just add a comma then the cell reference. Like this: 
= Sum(A1:A4, A10, A12, A14) 
Try using this Sum function yourself by doing these exercises: 
Exercise 1 
On a new spreadsheet, enter the number 3 in the following cells: A1, B1, C1, D1. Enter the 
number 3 in the cell A2. Use only the Sum function to add up the values in the cells. Display 
the answer in cell A4. In other words, the spreadsheet should look like the one below: 
In the picture above, cell A4 displays the answer. Only a Sum function was used. 
Multiplying 
You saw how to multiply two numbers together. Just use the asterisk symbol with the cell 
references. Like this: 
= A1 * A2 
But what if you wanted to multiply a long range of values together? You might want to 
multiply all the numbers in the cells A1 to A10. Surely you don't have do this = A1 * A2 * A3 * 
A4 * A5, etc? 
You'd be right - you don't have to enter all the cell references. You can do the same as in the 
Sum Function, just use A1:A5. But instead of using the word Sum you use the word Product. 
Like this: 
=Product(A1:A5) 
If you look back at Exercise 2, the number 3 was in the cells A1 to E1. We then added them up. 
If you wanted to multiply them all instead, use Product. To further illustrate what Product does, 
this is what we wanted to multiply: 
= 3 * 3 * 3 * 3 * 3 
Page 85
So 3 times 3 = 9. Multiply the 9 by the third 3 to give 27. Multiply the 27 by the fourth 3 to 
give 81. Multiply the 81 by the fifth 3 to give 243. And that's what Product does: Multiplies a 
range of cells together. Just like the Sum function, you can add other cells after a comma. Like 
this: 
= Product(A1:E1, A3) 
In the above function, our answer of 243 will be multiplied by whatever is in cell A3. 
Try using Product yourself with these exercises: 
Exercise 3 
In the cells A1 to E1 enter the following values: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Use Product to multiply them all 
together. Display your answer in cell A3. So your spreadsheet will look like this: 
Subtraction 
To subtract one value from another, you just use the minus sign in between your cell references. 
Like this: 
= A1 - A2 
Below is an image from a spreadsheet showing a subtraction formula: 
Cell A3 is where the answer is displayed, and where we entered the formula. 
If you want to subtract more than two cells you can do it like this: 
= A1 - B1 - C1 
Subtraction is fairly straightforward in spreadsheets, and shouldn't cause you too many 
problems. 
Page 86
Division 
If you want to divide one number by another the symbol to use is this one: 
/ 
That's the forward slash, and can be found just to the right of the full stop on your keyboard. 
You use it like this: 
= A1 / C1 
There are a number of times when you would want to divide, but wouldn't need the divider 
symbol at all. For example, you use division to calculate Averages, but you wouldn't need the 
divider symbol here because Excel has a separate Average function. Likewise, if you wanted to 
calculate monthly payments, you wouldn't need to use the divider symbol because Excel had 
quite a number of financial functions you can use. (We'll meet some of these later in the 
course.) 
The answer you should have got was 150. Notice the brackets in the formula. The brackets 
group part of your sum together. Without them, Excel will normally calculate from left to right. 
But it does some calculation before others. Excel sees multiplication as more important than 
adding up. To see what happens without the brackets, do this: 
· Click on cell A5 
· Click inside the formula bar at the top 
· Delete both the brackets from the formula 
· Press the return key on your keyboard to see the answer 
Now the answer is different! This time you should have gotten 125. Here are the picture 
versions of both formulas: 
With Brackets Without Brackets 
You might think the second one is wrong. But it's not. It's just the way Excel works things out. 
Because it sees multiplication as more important than adding up, it will multiply cell A2 by cell 
A3 first. That gets the answer of 100. Excel will then add this answer to cell A1, which gives the 
answer 125. 
Page 87
With the brackets in, you force Excel to work things out your way. You're saying "Do the sum 
in brackets first, then multiply". When you do the brackets first, you get a different answer. A1 
+ A2 = 75. Multiply 75 by cell A3 and you get the answer 150. 
The moral is: take care when you are grouping operators together. And force Excel to work 
things out your way by using brackets to group your sums. 
Example 2 
Substitute the asterisk symbol from example 1 with the forward slash. So the formula will be 
changed from this: 
= (A1 + A2) * A3 
to this: 
= (A1 + A2) / A3 
Press the Return key on your keyboard to reveal the answer. It should be 37.5. Now take the 
brackets out and try again. Again, you get a different answer. The total will now be 50! 
Again the same process is at work. Excel sees division as more important than adding up, so it 
does that first. So it will divide 50 by 2 to get 25. Then it will add the contents of cell A1 to get 
50. With the brackets, we force Excel to do the adding up first, then divide by the cell A3. 
Example 3 
This time, enter the following formula for cell A5: 
= (A1 * A2) / A3 
Press the Return key on your keyboard to reveal the answer. It should be 625. 
Remove the brackets and try again. The answer should be 625 again. This is because Excel sees 
Multiplication and division as being of equal importance. When all things are equal, Excel 
calculates from left to right. 
Likewise, Excel sees addition and subtraction as being of equal importance. So it will calculate 
from left to right if you use addition and subtraction in the same formula. As an example, study 
this formula below: 
Page 88
As you can see, the formula in cell A5 is = A1 + A2 - A3. Now does that mean this: 
= (A1 + A2) - A3 
Or this: 
= A1 + (A2 - A3) 
Ques: Diffrence between sorting and filtering: 
Ans: 
Sorting 
 When you enter data into your worksheet it is often unorganized 
making it difficult to examine. 
 When analyzing the information in your spreadsheet, you may 
need to rearrange the data in different ways to answer different 
questions. 
 Excel's sorting feature can help your rearrange your data so you 
can use it more efficiently. 
Note: If your spreadsheet contains formulas, be careful when using the 
sort feature. Formulas rely on cell references to perform their 
calculations and moving the data with the sort feature may destroy 
these references. 
Page 89
Steps To sort a list of data: 
(1)Select a single cell in the column containing the data you want to 
sort. 
(2) Click on Data Menu 
(3) Select Sort option. 
(4) Select Ascending and Descending order. 
(5) Click on OK button. 
Note: If you select an entire column, Excel will sort only that column 
and will mismatch the data contained in the other columns. 
Filtering 
Filtering is a way that you can use Excel to quickly extract certain data 
from your spreadsheet. Unlike sorting, filtering doesn't just reorder the 
list. It actually hides the rows or columns containing data that do not 
meet the filter criteria you define. Excel has an AutoFilter feature that 
makes it very easy to extract data from your spreadsheet. 
To use the AutoFilter: 
· Click on any cell in your spreadsheet. 
· Select the Home tab. 
· Under the Editing group, press the Sort and Filtering button and 
select the Filter button. 
· Drop-down menus will appear next to each cell heading. 
· Clicking on any drop-down menu will provide you with options 
for sorting or filtering. 
Page 90
Examples: 
Sorting refers to taking a list of items and putting them in some type 
of order, like alphabetical. For example, take this list: 
dog 
cat 
flower 
If you sort it alphabetically, it would become: 
cat 
dog 
flower 
Filtering refers to showing just a portion of the list of items. For 
example, if you took this list: 
dog 
cat 
flower 
and filtered it to only show animals, the resulting filtered list 
would be: 
dog 
cat 
------------- 
http://wiki.answers.com/Q/Explain_the_different_types_of_charts_used_in_excel 
Explain the different types of charts used in excel? 
Answer: 
Page 91
· An area chart emphasizes the magnitude of change over time. By displaying the sum of the plotted 
values, an area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a whole. 
· A Column Chart shows data changes over a period of time or illustrates comparisons among items. 
Categories are organized horizontally, values vertically, to emphasize variation over time. Stacked 
column charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. The 3-D perspective column 
chart compares data points along two axes. 
· A Bar Chart illustrates comparisons among individual items. Categories are organized vertically, 
values horizontally, to focus on comparing values and to place less emphasis on time. Stacked bar 
charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. 
· A Line Chart shows trends in data at equal intervals. 
· A Pie Chart shows the proportional size of items that make up a data series to the sum of the items. It 
always shows only one data series and is useful when you want to emphasize a significant element. 
To make small slices easier to see, you can group them together as one item in a pie chart and then 
break down that item in a smaller pie or bar chart next to the main chart. 
· Like a pie chart, a Doughnut Chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole, but it can contain more 
than one data series. Each ring of the doughnut chart represents a data series. 
· The High-Low-Close Chart is often used to illustrate stock prices. This chart can also be used for 
scientific data, for example, to indicate temperature changes. You must organize your data in the 
correct order to create this and other stock charts. A stock chart that measures volume has two value 
axes: one for the columns that measure volume, and the other for the stock prices. You can include 
volume in a high-low-close or open-high-low-close chart. 
· An XY (Scatter) Chart either shows the relationships among the numeric values in several data series 
or plots two groups of numbers as one series of xy coordinates. This chart shows uneven intervals - 
or clusters - of data and is commonly used for scientific data. When you arrange your data, place x 
values in one row or column, and then enter corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns. 
· A Bubble Chart is a type of xy (scatter) chart. The size of the data marker indicates the value of a third 
variable. To arrange your data, place the x values in one row or column, and enter corresponding y 
values and bubble sizes in the adjacent rows or columns. 
· In a Radar Chart, each category has its own value axis radiating from the center point. Lines connect 
all the values in the same series. A radar chart compares the aggregate values of a number of data 
series. In this chart, the data series that covers the most area, Brand A, represents the brand with the 
highest vitamin content. 
· A Surface Chart is useful when you want to find optimum combinations between two sets of data. As 
in a topographic map, colors and patterns indicate areas that are in the same range of values. 
http://office.microsoft.com/en-in/excel-help/available-chart-types-HA010342187.aspx 
Page 92
Available chart types 
Microsoft Excel supports many types of charts to help you display data in ways that are meaningful 
to your audience. When you create a chart or change the type of an existing chart in Microsoft Excel 
or other Microsoft Office programs such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft 
Outlook, you can select one of the following chart types. 
Important This article describes the chart types that you can use. For information about how to 
create a chart, see Quick start: Chart your data or Create a chart from start to finish. 
In this article 
· Column charts 
· Line charts 
· Pie charts 
· Bar charts 
· Area charts 
· XY (scatter) charts 
· Stock charts 
· Surface charts 
· Doughnut charts 
· Bubble charts 
· Radar charts 
Column charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a column chart. Column 
charts are useful for showing data changes over a period of time or for illustrating comparisons 
among items. 
In column charts, categories are typically organized along the horizontal axis and values along the 
vertical axis. 
Column charts have the following chart subtypes: 
Page 93
· Clustered column and clustered column in 3-D Clustered column charts compare 
values across categories. A clustered column chart displays values in 2-D vertical rectangles. A clustered 
column in 3-D chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is 
not used. 
You can use a clustered column chart type when you have categories that represent: 
· Ranges of values (for example, item counts). 
· Specific scale arrangements (for example, a Likert scale with entries, such as strongly agree, 
agree, neutral, disagree, strongly disagree). 
· Names that are not in any specific order (for example, item names, geographic names, or 
the names of people). 
Note To present data in a 3-D format that uses three axes (a horizontal axis, a vertical axis, and a 
depth axis) that you can modify, use a 3-D column chart subtype instead. 
· Stacked column and stacked column in 3-D Stacked column charts show the 
relationship of individual items to the whole, comparing the contribution of each value to a total across 
categories. A stacked column chart displays values in 2-D vertical stacked rectangles. A 3-D stacked 
column chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not 
used. 
Tip You can use a stacked column chart when you have multiple data series and when you want 
to emphasize the total. 
· 100% stacked column and 100% stacked column in 3-D 100% stacked column charts 
and 100% stacked column in 3-D charts compare the percentage that each value contributes to a total 
across categories. A 100% stacked column chart displays values in 2-D vertical 100% stacked rectangles. 
A 3-D 100% stacked column chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis 
(depth axis) is not used. 
Page 94
You can use a 100% stacked column chart when you have two or more data series and you want to 
emphasize the contributions to the whole, especially if the total is the same for each category. 
· 3-D column 3-D column charts use three axes that you can modify (a horizontal axis, a 
vertical axis, and a depth axis), and they compare data points along the horizontal and the depth axes. 
You can use a 3-D column chart when you want to compare data across the categories and across 
the series equally, because this chart type shows categories along both the horizontal axis and the 
depth axis, whereas the vertical axis displays the values. 
· Cylinder, cone, and pyramid Cylinder, cone, and pyramid charts are available in the 
same clustered, stacked, 100% stacked, and 3-D chart types that are provided for rectangular column 
charts, and they show and compare data the same way. The only difference is that these chart types 
display cylinder, cone, and pyramid shapes instead of rectangles. 
TOP OF PAGE 
Line charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a line chart. Line charts 
can display continuous data over time, set against a common scale, and are therefore ideal for 
showing trends in data at equal intervals. In a line chart, category data is distributed evenly along 
the horizontal axis, and all value data is distributed evenly along the vertical axis. 
Page 95
You should use a line chart if your category labels are text, and are representing evenly spaced 
values such as months, quarters, or fiscal years. This is especially true if there are multiple series — 
for one series, you should consider using a scatter chart. You should also use a line chart if you have 
several evenly spaced numeric labels, especially years. If you have more than ten numeric labels, use 
a scatter chart instead. 
Line charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Line and line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data values, or 
without, line charts are useful to show trends over time or ordered categories, especially when there are 
many data points and the order in which they are presented is important. If there are many categories 
or the values are approximate, use a line chart without markers. 
· Stacked line and stacked line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate 
individual data values, or without, stacked line charts can be used to show the trend of the contribution 
of each value over time or ordered categories. 
Note Stacked charts add the data, which might not be the result you want. Also, because it is not 
easy to see that the lines are stacked, consider using a different line chart type or a stacked area 
chart instead. 
· 100% stacked line and 100% stacked line with markers Displayed with markers to 
indicate individual data values, or without, 100% stacked line charts are useful to show the trend of the 
Page 96
percentage each value contributes over time or ordered categories. If there are many categories or the 
values are approximate, use a 100% stacked line chart without markers. 
Tip For a better presentation of this type of data, consider using a 100% stacked area chart 
instead. 
· 3-D line 3-D line charts show each row or column of data as a 3-D ribbon. A 3-D line 
chart has horizontal, vertical, and depth axes that you can modify. 
TOP OF PAGE 
Pie charts 
Data that is arranged in one column or row only on a worksheet can be plotted in a pie chart. Pie 
charts show the size of items in one data series, proportional to the sum of the items. The data 
points in a pie chart are displayed as a percentage of the whole pie. 
Consider using a pie chart when: 
· You only have one data series that you want to plot. 
· None of the values that you want to plot are negative. 
· Almost none of the values that you want to plot are zero values. 
· You do not have more than seven categories. 
Page 97
· The categories represent parts of the whole pie. 
Pie charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Pie and pie in 3-D Pie charts display the contribution of each value to a total in a 2-D or 
3-D format. You can pull out slices of a pie chart manually to emphasize the slices. 
· Pie of pie and bar of pie Pie of pie or bar of pie charts display pie charts with user-defined 
values that are extracted from the main pie chart and combined into a secondary pie chart or 
into a stacked bar chart. These chart types are useful when you want to make small slices in the main 
pie chart easier to distinguish. 
· Exploded pie and exploded pie in 3-D Exploded pie charts display the contribution of 
each value to a total while emphasizing individual values. Exploded pie charts can be displayed in 3-D 
format. You can change the pie explosion setting for all slices and individual slices, but you cannot 
move the slices of an exploded pie manually. 
Tip If you want to pull out the slices manually, consider using a pie or pie in 3-D chart instead. 
TOP OF PAGE 
Bar charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a bar chart. Bar charts 
illustrate comparisons among individual items. 
Page 98
Consider using a bar chart when: 
· The axis labels are long. 
· The values that are shown are durations. 
Bar charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Clustered bar and clustered bar in 3-D Clustered bar charts compare values across 
categories. In a clustered bar chart, the categories are typically organized along the vertical axis, and the 
values along the horizontal axis. A clustered bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D 
format; it does not display the data on three axes. 
· Stacked bar and stacked bar in 3-D Stacked bar charts show the relationship of 
individual items to the whole. A stacked bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D 
format; it does not display the data on three axes. 
· 100% stacked bar and 100% stacked bar in 3-D This type of chart compares the 
percentage that each value contributes to a total across categories. A 100% stacked bar in 3-D chart 
displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not display the data on three axes. 
Page 99
· Horizontal cylinder, cone, and pyramid These charts are available in the same clustered, 
stacked, and 100% stacked chart types that are provided for rectangular bar charts. They show and 
compare data the same way. The only difference is that these chart types display cylinder, cone, and 
pyramid shapes instead of horizontal rectangles. 
TOP OF PAGE 
Area charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in an area chart. Area 
charts emphasize the magnitude of change over time, and can be used to draw attention to the 
total value across a trend. For example, data that represents profit over time can be plotted in an 
area chart to emphasize the total profit. 
By displaying the sum of the plotted values, an area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a 
whole. 
Area charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· 2-D area and 3-D area Whether they are shown in 2-D or in 3-D, area charts display the 
trend of values over time or other category data. 3-D area charts use three axes (horizontal, vertical, and 
depth) that you can modify. As a rule, you should consider using a line chart instead of a nonstacked 
area chart, because data from one series can be obscured by data from another series. 
Page 100
· Stacked area and stacked area in 3-D Stacked area charts display the trend of the 
contribution of each value over time or other category data. A stacked area chart in 3-D is displayed in 
the same way but uses a 3-D perspective. A 3-D perspective is not a true 3-D chart — a third value axis 
(depth axis) is not used. 
· 100% stacked area and 100% stacked area in 3-D 100% stacked area charts display the 
trend of the percentage that each value contributes over time or other category data. A 100% stacked 
area chart in 3-D is displayed in the same way but uses a 3-D perspective. A 3-D perspective is not a 
true 3-D chart — a third value axis (depth axis) is not used. 
TOP OF PAGE 
XY (scatter) charts 
Data that is arranged in columns and rows on a worksheet can be plotted in an xy (scatter) chart. 
Scatter charts show the relationships among the numeric values in several data series, or plot two 
groups of numbers as one series of xy coordinates. 
A scatter chart has two value axes, showing one set of numeric data along the horizontal axis (x-axis) 
and another along the vertical axis (y-axis). It combines these values into single data points 
and displays them in irregular intervals, or clusters. Scatter charts are typically used for displaying 
and comparing numeric values, such as scientific, statistical, and engineering data. 
Consider using a scatter chart when: 
· You want to change the scale of the horizontal axis. 
· You want to make that axis a logarithmic scale. 
· Values for horizontal axis are not evenly spaced. 
· There are many data points on the horizontal axis. 
Page 101
· You want to effectively display worksheet data that includes pairs or grouped sets of values 
and adjust the independent scales of a scatter chart to reveal more information about the grouped 
values. 
· You want to show similarities between large sets of data instead of differences between 
data points. 
· You want to compare many data points without regard to time — the more data that you 
include in a scatter chart, the better the comparisons that you can make. 
To arrange data on a worksheet for a scatter chart, you should place the x values in one row or 
column, and then enter the corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns. 
Scatter charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Scatter with only markers This type of chart compares pairs of values. Use a scatter chart 
with data markers but without lines when you use many data points and connecting lines would make 
the data more difficult to read. You can also use this chart type when you do not have to show 
connectivity of the data points. 
· Scatter with smooth lines and scatter with smooth lines and markers This type of 
chart displays a smooth curve that connects the data points. Smooth lines can be displayed with or 
without markers. Use a smooth line without markers if there are many data points. 
Page 102
· Scatter with straight lines and scatter with straight lines and markers This type of 
chart displays straight connecting lines between data points. Straight lines can be displayed with or 
without markers. 
TOP OF PAGE 
Stock charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows in a specific order on a worksheet can be plotted in a 
stock chart. As its name implies, a stock chart is most often used to illustrate the fluctuation of stock 
prices. However, this chart may also be used for scientific data. For example, you could use a stock 
chart to indicate the fluctuation of daily or annual temperatures. You must organize your data in the 
correct order to create stock charts. 
The way stock chart data is organized in the worksheet is very important. For example, to create a 
simple high-low-close stock chart, you should arrange your data with High, Low, and Close entered 
as column headings, in that order. 
Stock charts have the following chart sub-types: 
· High-low-close The high-low-close stock chart is often used to illustrate stock prices. It 
requires three series of values in the following order: high, low, and then close. 
Page 103
· Open-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires four series of values in the correct 
order (open, high, low, and then close). 
· Volume-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires four series of values in the 
correct order (volume, high, low, and then close). It measures volume by using two value axes: one for 
the columns that measure volume, and the other for the stock prices. 
· Volume-open-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires five series of values in the 
correct order (volume, open, high, low, and then close). 
TOP OF PAGE 
Page 104
Surface charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a surface chart. A surface 
chart is useful when you want to find optimum combinations between two sets of data. As in a 
topographic map, colors and patterns indicate areas that are in the same range of values. 
You can use a surface chart when both categories and data series are numeric values. 
Surface charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· 3-D surface 3-D surface charts show trends in values across two dimensions in a 
continuous curve. Color bands in a surface chart do not represent the data series; they represent the 
difference between the values. This chart shows a 3-D view of the data, which can be imagined as a 
rubber sheet stretched over a 3-D column chart. It is typically used to show relationships between large 
amounts of data that may otherwise be difficult to see. 
· Wireframe 3-D surface When displayed without color on the surface, a 3-D surface chart 
is called a wireframe 3-D surface chart. This chart shows only the lines. 
Page 105
Note A wireframe 3-D surface chart is not easy to read, but this chart type is useful for faster 
plotting of large data sets. 
· Contour Contour charts are surface charts viewed from above, similar to 2-D topographic 
maps. In a contour chart, color bands represent specific ranges of values. The lines in a contour chart 
connect interpolated points of equal value. 
· Wireframe contour Wireframe contour charts are also surface charts viewed from above. 
Without color bands on the surface, a wireframe chart shows only the lines. 
Note Wireframe contour charts are not easy to read. You may want to use a 3-D surface chart 
instead. 
TOP OF PAGE 
Doughnut charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows only on a worksheet can be plotted in a doughnut chart. 
Like a pie chart, a doughnut chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole, but it can contain 
more than one data series. 
Page 106
Note Doughnut charts are not easy to read. You may want to use a stacked column or stacked 
bar chart instead. 
Doughnut charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Doughnut Doughnut charts display data in rings, where each ring represents a data 
series. If percentages are displayed in data labels, each ring will total 100%. 
· Exploded Doughnut Much like exploded pie charts, exploded doughnut charts display 
the contribution of each value to a total while emphasizing individual values, but they can contain more 
than one data series. 
TOP OF PAGE 
Bubble charts 
Page 107
Data that is arranged in columns on a worksheet so that x values are listed in the first column and 
corresponding y values and bubble size values are listed in adjacent columns, can be plotted in a 
bubble chart. 
For example, you would organize your data as shown in the following example. 
Bubble charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Bubble or bubble with 3-D effect Both bubble chart types compare sets of three values 
instead of two. The third value determines the size of the bubble marker. You can choose to display 
bubbles in 2-D format or with a 3-D effect. 
TOP OF PAGE 
Radar charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a radar chart. Radar 
charts compare the aggregate values of several data series. 
Page 108
Radar charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Radar and radar with markers With or without markers for individual data points, radar 
charts display changes in values relative to a center point. 
· Filled radar In a filled radar chart, the area covered by a data series is filled with a color. 
TOP OF PAGE 
------------ 
http://wiki.answers.com/Q/Explain_the_different_types_of_charts_used_in_excel 
Explain the different types of charts used in excel? 
Answer: 
Page 109
· An area chart emphasizes the magnitude of change over time. By displaying the sum of the plotted 
values, an area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a whole. 
· A Column Chart shows data changes over a period of time or illustrates comparisons among items. 
Categories are organized horizontally, values vertically, to emphasize variation over time. Stacked 
column charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. The 3-D perspective column 
chart compares data points along two axes. 
· A Bar Chart illustrates comparisons among individual items. Categories are organized vertically, 
values horizontally, to focus on comparing values and to place less emphasis on time. Stacked bar 
charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. 
· A Line Chart shows trends in data at equal intervals. 
· A Pie Chart shows the proportional size of items that make up a data series to the sum of the items. It 
always shows only one data series and is useful when you want to emphasize a significant element. 
To make small slices easier to see, you can group them together as one item in a pie chart and then 
break down that item in a smaller pie or bar chart next to the main chart. 
· Like a pie chart, a Doughnut Chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole, but it can contain more 
than one data series. Each ring of the doughnut chart represents a data series. 
· The High-Low-Close Chart is often used to illustrate stock prices. This chart can also be used for 
scientific data, for example, to indicate temperature changes. You must organize your data in the 
correct order to create this and other stock charts. A stock chart that measures volume has two value 
axes: one for the columns that measure volume, and the other for the stock prices. You can include 
volume in a high-low-close or open-high-low-close chart. 
· An XY (Scatter) Chart either shows the relationships among the numeric values in several data series 
or plots two groups of numbers as one series of xy coordinates. This chart shows uneven intervals - 
or clusters - of data and is commonly used for scientific data. When you arrange your data, place x 
values in one row or column, and then enter corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns. 
· A Bubble Chart is a type of xy (scatter) chart. The size of the data marker indicates the value of a third 
variable. To arrange your data, place the x values in one row or column, and enter corresponding y 
values and bubble sizes in the adjacent rows or columns. 
· In a Radar Chart, each category has its own value axis radiating from the center point. Lines connect 
all the values in the same series. A radar chart compares the aggregate values of a number of data 
series. In this chart, the data series that covers the most area, Brand A, represents the brand with the 
highest vitamin content. 
· A Surface Chart is useful when you want to find optimum combinations between two sets of data. As 
in a topographic map, colors and patterns indicate areas that are in the same range of values. 
Answer: 
A Chart is a Graphical representation of Data. A steps to Insert Chart is as follows: 
Page 110
STEPS: 
(15)Select a data range. 
(16)Click on Insert menu 
(17)Click on chart option 
(18)Select a chart style 
(19)Select a sub type of a chart 
(20)Click on Next Button 
(21)Click on Next Button again 
(22)Give a name of X- axis and Y-axis and Title of a chart 
(23)Set a position of a Legend 
(24)If you want to show a value in a chart then click on Data label 
(25)Click on ( tick a check box) Show value option. 
(26)Click on Next button 
(27)Select a radio button according to requirement, if you want to put a chart in that spreadsheet 
or a new worksheet 
(28)Click on FINISH button 
http://office.microsoft.com/en-in/excel-help/available-chart-types-HA010342187.aspx 
Available chart types 
Microsoft Excel supports many types of charts to help you display data in ways that are 
meaningful to your audience. When you create a chart or change the type of an existing 
chart in Microsoft Excel or other Microsoft Office programs such as Microsoft Word, 
Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Outlook, you can select one of the following chart types. 
Important This article describes the chart types that you can use. For information about how to 
create a chart, see Quick start: Chart your data or Create a chart from start to finish. 
Page 111
In this article 
· Column charts 
· Line charts 
· Pie charts 
· Bar charts 
· Area charts 
· XY (scatter) charts 
· Stock charts 
· Surface charts 
· Doughnut charts 
· Bubble charts 
· Radar charts 
 Column charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a column chart. Column 
charts are useful for showing data changes over a period of time or for illustrating comparisons 
among items. 
In column charts, categories are typically organized along the horizontal axis and values along the 
vertical axis. 
Column charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Clustered column and clustered column in 3-D Clustered column charts compare values across 
categories. A clustered column chart displays values in 2-D vertical rectangles. A clustered column 
Page 112
in 3-D chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not 
used. 
You can use a clustered column chart type when you have categories that represent: 
· Ranges of values (for example, item counts). 
· Specific scale arrangements (for example, a Likert scale with entries, such as strongly agree, agree, 
neutral, disagree, strongly disagree). 
· Names that are not in any specific order (for example, item names, geographic names, or the names 
of people). 
Note To present data in a 3-D format that uses three axes (a horizontal axis, a vertical axis, and a 
depth axis) that you can modify, use a 3-D column chart subtype instead. 
· Stacked column and stacked column in 3-D Stacked column charts show the relationship of 
individual items to the whole, comparing the contribution of each value to a total across categories. 
A stacked column chart displays values in 2-D vertical stacked rectangles. A 3-D stacked column 
chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not used. 
Tip You can use a stacked column chart when you have multiple data series and when you want 
to emphasize the total. 
· 100% stacked column and 100% stacked column in 3-D 100% stacked column charts and 
100% stacked column in 3-D charts compare the percentage that each value contributes to a total 
across categories. A 100% stacked column chart displays values in 2-D vertical 100% stacked 
rectangles. A 3-D 100% stacked column chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A 
third value axis (depth axis) is not used. 
Page 113
You can use a 100% stacked column chart when you have two or more data series and you want to 
emphasize the contributions to the whole, especially if the total is the same for each category. 
· 3-D column 3-D column charts use three axes that you can modify (a horizontal axis, a vertical 
axis, and a depth axis), and they compare data points along the horizontal and the depth axes. 
You can use a 3-D column chart when you want to compare data across the categories and across 
the series equally, because this chart type shows categories along both the horizontal axis and the 
depth axis, whereas the vertical axis displays the values. 
· Cylinder, cone, and pyramid Cylinder, cone, and pyramid charts are available in the same 
clustered, stacked, 100% stacked, and 3-D chart types that are provided for rectangular column 
charts, and they show and compare data the same way. The only difference is that these chart types 
display cylinder, cone, and pyramid shapes instead of rectangles. 
 Line charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a line chart. Line charts 
can display continuous data over time, set against a common scale, and are therefore ideal for 
showing trends in data at equal intervals. In a line chart, category data is distributed evenly along 
the horizontal axis, and all value data is distributed evenly along the vertical axis. 
Page 114
You should use a line chart if your category labels are text, and are representing evenly spaced 
values such as months, quarters, or fiscal years. This is especially true if there are multiple series — 
for one series, you should consider using a scatter chart. You should also use a line chart if you have 
several evenly spaced numeric labels, especially years. If you have more than ten numeric labels, use 
a scatter chart instead. 
Line charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Line and line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data values, or without, 
line charts are useful to show trends over time or ordered categories, especially when there are 
many data points and the order in which they are presented is important. If there are many 
categories or the values are approximate, use a line chart without markers. 
· Stacked line and stacked line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data 
values, or without, stacked line charts can be used to show the trend of the contribution of each 
value over time or ordered categories. 
Note Stacked charts add the data, which might not be the result you want. Also, because it is not 
easy to see that the lines are stacked, consider using a different line chart type or a stacked area 
chart instead. 
· 100% stacked line and 100% stacked line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate 
individual data values, or without, 100% stacked line charts are useful to show the trend of the 
percentage each value contributes over time or ordered categories. If there are many categories or 
the values are approximate, use a 100% stacked line chart without markers. 
Tip For a better presentation of this type of data, consider using a 100% stacked area chart 
instead. 
Page 115
· 3-D line 3-D line charts show each row or column of data as a 3-D ribbon. A 3-D line chart has 
horizontal, vertical, and depth axes that you can modify. 
 Pie charts 
Data that is arranged in one column or row only on a worksheet can be plotted in a pie chart. Pie 
charts show the size of items in one data series, proportional to the sum of the items. The data 
points in a pie chart are displayed as a percentage of the whole pie. 
Consider using a pie chart when: 
· You only have one data series that you want to plot. 
· None of the values that you want to plot are negative. 
· Almost none of the values that you want to plot are zero values. 
· You do not have more than seven categories. 
· The categories represent parts of the whole pie. 
Pie charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Pie and pie in 3-D Pie charts display the contribution of each value to a total in a 2-D or 3-D 
format. You can pull out slices of a pie chart manually to emphasize the slices. 
Page 116
· Pie of pie and bar of pie Pie of pie or bar of pie charts display pie charts with user-defined 
values that are extracted from the main pie chart and combined into a secondary pie chart or into a 
stacked bar chart. These chart types are useful when you want to make small slices in the main pie 
chart easier to distinguish. 
· Exploded pie and exploded pie in 3-D Exploded pie charts display the contribution of each 
value to a total while emphasizing individual values. Exploded pie charts can be displayed in 3-D 
format. You can change the pie explosion setting for all slices and individual slices, but you cannot 
move the slices of an exploded pie manually. 
Tip If you want to pull out the slices manually, consider using a pie or pie in 3-D chart instead. 
 Bar charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a bar chart. Bar charts 
illustrate comparisons among individual items. 
Consider using a bar chart when: 
· The axis labels are long. 
· The values that are shown are durations. 
Page 117
Bar charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Clustered bar and clustered bar in 3-D Clustered bar charts compare values across categories. 
In a clustered bar chart, the categories are typically organized along the vertical axis, and the values 
along the horizontal axis. A clustered bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D 
format; it does not display the data on three axes. 
· Stacked bar and stacked bar in 3-D Stacked bar charts show the relationship of individual items 
to the whole. A stacked bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not 
display the data on three axes. 
· 100% stacked bar and 100% stacked bar in 3-D This type of chart compares the percentage 
that each value contributes to a total across categories. A 100% stacked bar in 3-D chart displays 
the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not display the data on three axes. 
· Horizontal cylinder, cone, and pyramid These charts are available in the same clustered, 
stacked, and 100% stacked chart types that are provided for rectangular bar charts. They show and 
compare data the same way. The only difference is that these chart types display cylinder, cone, and 
pyramid shapes instead of horizontal rectangles. 
Page 118
 Area charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in an area chart. Area 
charts emphasize the magnitude of change over time, and can be used to draw attention to the 
total value across a trend. For example, data that represents profit over time can be plotted in an 
area chart to emphasize the total profit. 
By displaying the sum of the plotted values, an area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a 
whole. 
Area charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· 2-D area and 3-D area Whether they are shown in 2-D or in 3-D, area charts display the trend of 
values over time or other category data. 3-D area charts use three axes (horizontal, vertical, and 
depth) that you can modify. As a rule, you should consider using a line chart instead of a 
nonstacked area chart, because data from one series can be obscured by data from another series. 
· Stacked area and stacked area in 3-D Stacked area charts display the trend of the contribution 
of each value over time or other category data. A stacked area chart in 3-D is displayed in the same 
way but uses a 3-D perspective. A 3-D perspective is not a true 3-D chart — a third value axis 
(depth axis) is not used. 
Page 119
· 100% stacked area and 100% stacked area in 3-D 100% stacked area charts display the trend 
of the percentage that each value contributes over time or other category data. A 100% stacked 
area chart in 3-D is displayed in the same way but uses a 3-D perspective. A 3-D perspective is not 
a true 3-D chart — a third value axis (depth axis) is not used. 
 XY (scatter) charts 
Data that is arranged in columns and rows on a worksheet can be plotted in an xy (scatter) chart. 
Scatter charts show the relationships among the numeric values in several data series, or plot two 
groups of numbers as one series of xy coordinates. 
A scatter chart has two value axes, showing one set of numeric data along the horizontal axis (x-axis) 
and another along the vertical axis (y-axis). It combines these values into single data points 
and displays them in irregular intervals, or clusters. Scatter charts are typically used for displaying 
and comparing numeric values, such as scientific, statistical, and engineering data. 
Consider using a scatter chart when: 
· You want to change the scale of the horizontal axis. 
· You want to make that axis a logarithmic scale. 
· Values for horizontal axis are not evenly spaced. 
· There are many data points on the horizontal axis. 
· You want to effectively display worksheet data that includes pairs or grouped sets of values and 
adjust the independent scales of a scatter chart to reveal more information about the grouped 
values. 
· You want to show similarities between large sets of data instead of differences between data points. 
· You want to compare many data points without regard to time — the more data that you include in 
a scatter chart, the better the comparisons that you can make. 
To arrange data on a worksheet for a scatter chart, you should place the x values in one row or 
column, and then enter the corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns. 
Page 120
Scatter charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Scatter with only markers This type of chart compares pairs of values. Use a scatter chart 
with data markers but without lines when you use many data points and connecting lines would 
make the data more difficult to read. You can also use this chart type when you do not have to 
show connectivity of the data points. 
· Scatter with smooth lines and scatter with smooth lines and markers This type of chart 
displays a smooth curve that connects the data points. Smooth lines can be displayed with or 
without markers. Use a smooth line without markers if there are many data points. 
· Scatter with straight lines and scatter with straight lines and markers This type of chart 
displays straight connecting lines between data points. Straight lines can be displayed with or 
without markers. 
Page 121
 Stock charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows in a specific order on a worksheet can be plotted in a 
stock chart. As its name implies, a stock chart is most often used to illustrate the fluctuation of stock 
prices. However, this chart may also be used for scientific data. For example, you could use a stock 
chart to indicate the fluctuation of daily or annual temperatures. You must organize your data in the 
correct order to create stock charts. 
The way stock chart data is organized in the worksheet is very important. For example, to create a 
simple high-low-close stock chart, you should arrange your data with High, Low, and Close entered 
as column headings, in that order. 
Stock charts have the following chart sub-types: 
· High-low-close The high-low-close stock chart is often used to illustrate stock prices. It requires 
three series of values in the following order: high, low, and then close. 
· Open-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires four series of values in the correct order 
(open, high, low, and then close). 
Page 122
· Volume-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires four series of values in the correct order 
(volume, high, low, and then close). It measures volume by using two value axes: one for the 
columns that measure volume, and the other for the stock prices. 
· Volume-open-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires five series of values in the correct 
order (volume, open, high, low, and then close). 
 Surface charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a surface chart. A surface 
chart is useful when you want to find optimum combinations between two sets of data. As in a 
topographic map, colors and patterns indicate areas that are in the same range of values. 
You can use a surface chart when both categories and data series are numeric values. 
Page 123
Surface charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· 3-D surface 3-D surface charts show trends in values across two dimensions in a continuous 
curve. Color bands in a surface chart do not represent the data series; they represent the difference 
between the values. This chart shows a 3-D view of the data, which can be imagined as a rubber 
sheet stretched over a 3-D column chart. It is typically used to show relationships between large 
amounts of data that may otherwise be difficult to see. 
· Wireframe 3-D surface When displayed without color on the surface, a 3-D surface chart is 
called a wireframe 3-D surface chart. This chart shows only the lines. 
Note A wireframe 3-D surface chart is not easy to read, but this chart type is useful for faster 
plotting of large data sets. 
Page 124
· Contour Contour charts are surface charts viewed from above, similar to 2-D topographic maps. 
In a contour chart, color bands represent specific ranges of values. The lines in a contour chart 
connect interpolated points of equal value. 
· Wireframe contour Wireframe contour charts are also surface charts viewed from above. 
Without color bands on the surface, a wireframe chart shows only the lines. 
Note Wireframe contour charts are not easy to read. You may want to use a 3-D surface chart 
instead. 
 Doughnut charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows only on a worksheet can be plotted in a doughnut chart. 
Like a pie chart, a doughnut chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole, but it can contain 
more than one data series. 
Page 125
Note Doughnut charts are not easy to read. You may want to use a stacked column or stacked 
bar chart instead. 
Doughnut charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Doughnut Doughnut charts display data in rings, where each ring represents a data series. If 
percentages are displayed in data labels, each ring will total 100%. 
· Exploded Doughnut Much like exploded pie charts, exploded doughnut charts display the 
contribution of each value to a total while emphasizing individual values, but they can contain more 
than one data series. 
Page 126
 Bubble charts 
Data that is arranged in columns on a worksheet so that x values are listed in the first column and 
corresponding y values and bubble size values are listed in adjacent columns, can be plotted in a 
bubble chart. 
For example, you would organize your data as shown in the following example. 
Bubble charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Bubble or bubble with 3-D effect Both bubble chart types compare sets of three values instead 
of two. The third value determines the size of the bubble marker. You can choose to display 
bubbles in 2-D format or with a 3-D effect. 
 Radar charts 
Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a radar chart. Radar 
charts compare the aggregate values of several data series. 
Page 127
Radar charts have the following chart subtypes: 
· Radar and radar with markers With or without markers for individual data points, radar charts 
display changes in values relative to a center point. 
· Filled radar In a filled radar chart, the area covered by a data series is filled with a color. 
----------------- 
How to use Goal Seek in Excel 
We're not going go too deeply into Goal Seek, because it can get quite complicated. We'll stick 
with a basic outline, and an example, of just what it is. 
Page 128
Goal Seek 
Goal Seek is used when you know what answer you want, but don't know the exact figure to 
input for that answer. For example, you're quite certain that 8 multiplied by something equals 
56. You just not sure what that missing number is. Is it 8 multiplied by 6? Or Is it 8 multiplied 
by 7? Goal Seek will tell you the answer. 
We'll test that example out right now. So start a new spreadsheet, and create one the same as in 
the image below: 
Before you can use Goal Seek, Excel needs certain things from you. First it needs some sort of 
formula to work with. In the image above we have the simple formula =B1 * B2. We've put this 
in cell B3. But the answer is wrong for us. We had a Goal of 56 (8 times something). We want 
to know which number you have to multiply 8 by in order to get the answer 56. We tried 8 
times 6, and that gave the answer of 48. So we have to try again. 
Instead of us puzzling the answer out, we can let Goal Seek handle it. So do the following: 
· From the Excel menu bar, click on Tools 
· From the drop down menu, click on Goal Seek 
· A dialogue box pops up like the one below: 
The dialogue box needs a little explaining. "Set cell" is the answer you're looking for, this is the 
Goal. Set cell needs a formula or function to work with. Our formula is in cell B3, so if your 
"Set cell" text box does not say B3, click inside it and type B3. 
"To Value" is the actual answer you're looking for. With "Set cell", you're just telling Excel 
where the formula is. With "To Value" you have to tell Excel what answer you're looking for. 
We wanted an answer of 56 for our formula. So click inside the "To Value" text box and type 
56. 
Page 129
"By Changing Cell" is the missing bit. This is the part of the formula that needs to change in 
order to get the answer you want. In our formula we have an 8 and a 6. Clearly, the 6 is the 
number that has to go. So the cell that needs to change is B2. So go ahead and enter B2 in the 
"By Changing Cell" text box. Your dialogue box should now look like this: 
Click OK when your dialogue box looks like the one above. Excel will then Set the cell B3 to 
the Value of 56, and change the figure in cell B2. You'll also get a dialogue box like the one 
below: 
Click OK on the dialogue box. Your new spreadsheet will look like this one: 
So Goal Seek has given us the answer we wanted: it is 7 that when times by 8 equals 56. 
Increase your profits with Goal Seek 
To give you a more practical example of what Goal Seek does, consider this problem. You have 
a business that generates 25 thousand pounds worth of profit. You currently sell 1000 items at 
25 pounds each. You want to increase your profit to 35 thousand pounds. Assume that you're 
still going to sell 1000 items. By how much does the price of each item have to increase by in 
order to generate the new profit total? 
Page 130
We'll work it out together using Goal Seek. And then you can have a try yourself with an 
exercise. First, here's a new spreadsheet for you to download: 
Download the Goal Seek Spreadsheet 
When you open the spreadsheet, you'll notice that the Current Sales Figures and the Future 
Sales Figures are exactly the same. The formula in Cells B4 and E4 are = B2 * B3 and = E2 * 
E3 
We can use Goal Seek to solve our problem. What we want to know is, What should be the new 
Price Per Item in order to generate Profits of 35 thousand? 
· So, from the Excel menu bar, click on Tools 
· From the drop-down menu, click Goal Seek 
· The Goal Seek dialogue box appears 
This time, our formula is in cell E4. So we want to Set the cell to the cell that has our formula. 
So type E4 into the "Set cell" text box. 
The "To Value" text box will hold our new Profits. The Goal we are aiming for is 35 thousand. 
So type in 35000 in the "To value" text box. 
The cell we want to change is the Price Per item figure. So in the "By changing cell" text box, 
type in E3. 
Click OK when you're done. Excel will give you this dialogue box: 
The dialogue box is telling you that Goal Seek has found a solution. Click OK. Your 
spreadsheet will already have changed. The new Future Sales Figures will be displayed. Your 
spreadsheet should look something like the one below: 
Page 131
Goal Seek has given us the answer of 35 pounds. So the cost of each item has to increase by 10 
pounds if we want a profit of 35 thousand. 
And now it's your turn. Try this exercise. 
Exercise 
You've had a board meeting. It has been decided that the Price Per Item will remain the same - 
25 pounds. But you still want to generate Profits of 35 thousand. Use Goal seek to work out 
how many Items will now have to be sold in order to reach your target. 
------------- 
http://www.psexam.com/Notes-for-Computer-Science/word-2007-mail-merge-with-an-example. 
html 
Types of Cell Addresses in Excel 
1. Relative Cell Address 
2. Absolute Cell Address 
3. Mixed Cell Address 
There are two major types of references used in Microsoft Excel which is an Absolute 
Reference and a Relative Reference. On a day-to-day basis, the relative and absolute reference 
doesn't really affect the operations of your spreadsheet. Where it does become a noticeable 
issue is when you start copying formulas from one cell to another. 
Page 132
Lets investigate the difference between the two … 
A Relative Reference is one that when copied from one position to another will adjust the 
formula cell address to suit the position it is in. For example if you have a formula in cell 
address C4 that was =B4*C1 and then copied the formula into say C5 what you will notice is 
that the cell addresses of the formula will change to =B5 * C2. The reason this has occurred is 
that the cell addresses are in fact relative addresses. That is the cell address is relative to its 
current position. 
To change a cell address from being relative to being absolute we simply add dollars signs to 
the cell address in this way - $C$5. What this address is now saying to us is that we must 
absolutely refer to column C and absolutely refer to Row 5. This means that if we apply the 
dollar symbols to our previous formula in cell C4 which is =$B$4 * $C$4 and then copy our 
formula to cell address C5 you will notice this time round that the cell addresses didn't change. 
The reason is that by adding the $ symbols to the cell address we are telling the formula that 
regardless of where you place the formula you must absolutely refer to Column B and Row four 
thus we have $B$4. 
There are many reasons why you may use Relative References over Absolute references and 
vice versa. One of the most common one for using absolute references is when you have a 
specific value you want to refer to in a formula. For example, lets say you are building a 
mortgage calculator and you need to refer to an Interest Rate. To ensure you are always 
referring to the right cell that has the interest rate value you may set an absolute value. 
In Microsoft Excel there is also a reference called a mixed reference. Essentially what this 
means is that only either the Column or the Row has the dollar symbol, for example $C3. What 
this is telling us is that in the formula you must absolutely refer to column C but the value in the 
row is relative to the position of the formula. 
There are a number of ways that you can enter Relative and Absolute values into a formula. 
One technique is that you can simply type the $ symbols next to the Row or the Column. 
However there is an alternative. Once you have typed in the Cell address like C4 you can move 
back into the cell address and then use the F4 key to toggle the cell reference from Relative to 
Absolute to a Mixed References. 
Absolute and relative references are extremely important in Microsoft Excel and they ensure 
that the formulas you are creating actually refer to the correct cells. Remember one simple rule, 
if the cell addresses have a $ symbol next to it, it means you must absolutely refer to either the 
column or the row. 
OR 
Relative vs. Absolute Cell References in Spreadsheets 
Page 133
In working with spreadsheets, you need to know about relative vs. absolute cell references. 
Here is the issue: when you COPY A FORMULA that contains cell references, what happens to 
the cell references? 
Usually the CELL REFERENCES will CHANGE! If you copy a formula 2 rows to the right, 
then the cell references in the formula will shift 2 cells to the right. If you copy a formula 3 
rows down and 1 row left, then the cell references in the formula will shift 3 rows down and 1 
row left. These are called "relative" cell references, since they change relative to where you 
copy the formula. 
If you do not want cell references to change when you copy a formula, then make those cell 
references absolute cell references. Place a "$" before the column letter if you want that to 
always stay the same. Place a "$" before a row number if you want that to always stay the same. 
For example, "$C$3" refers to cell C3, and "$C$3" will work exactly the same as "C3", expect 
when you copy the formula. Note: when entering formulas you can use the F4 key right after 
entering a cell reference to toggle among the different relative/absolute versions of that cell 
address. 
The trick in creating spreadsheets is deciding before you copy a formula what cell references in 
the formula you want to be relative and what you want to be absolute. If some cell references 
refer to input cells in the spreadsheet, you usually want those cells to be absolute. 
The article below gives further instruction in absolute vs. relative cell references. 
Relative & Absolute Cell References 
by Karyn Stille 
Excel uses two types of cell references to create formulas. Each has its own purpose. Read 
on to determine which type of cell reference to use for your formula. 
Relative Cell References 
This is the most widely used type of cell reference in formulas. Relative cell references are 
basic cell references that adjust and change when copied or when using AutoFill. 
Example: 
=SUM(B5:B8), as shown below, changes to =SUM(C5:C8) when copied across to the next 
cell. 
Page 134
Absolute Cell References 
Situations arise in which the cell reference must remain the same when copied or when 
using AutoFill. Dollar signs are used to hold a column and/or row reference constant. 
Example: 
In the example below, when calculating commissions for sales staff, you would not want cell 
B10 to change when copying the formula down. You want both the column and the row to 
remain the same to refer to that exact cell. By using $B$10 in the formula, neither changes 
when copied. 
Page 135
A more complicated example: 
Let's pretend that you need to calculate the prices of items in stock with two different price 
discounts. Take a look at the worksheet below. 
Examine the formula in cell E4. By making the first cell reference $C4, you keep the column 
from changing when copied across, but allow the row to change when copying down to 
accommodate the prices of the different items going down. By making the last cell 
reference A$12, you keep the row number from changing when copied down, but allow the 
column to change and reflect discount B when copied across. Confused? Check out the 
graphics below and the cell results. 
Copied Across 
Copied Down 
Page 136
Now, you might be thinking, why not just use 10% and 15% in the actual formulas? 
Wouldn't that be easier? Yes, if you are sure the discount percentages will never change - 
which is highly unlikely. It's more likely that eventually those percentages will need to be 
adjusted. By referencing the cells containing 10% and 15% and not the actual numbers, 
when the percentage changes all you need to do is change the percentage one time in cell 
A12 and/or B12 instead of rebuilding all of your formulas. Excel would automatically update 
the discount prices to reflect your discount percentage change. 
Summary of absolute cell reference uses: 
$A1 
Allows the row reference to 
change, but not the column 
reference. 
A$1 
Allows the column reference to 
change, but not the row 
reference. 
$A$1 
Allows neither the column nor 
the row reference to 
change. 
There is a shortcut for placing absolute cell references in your formulas! 
When you are typing your formula, after you type a cell reference - press the F4 key. Excel 
automatically makes the cell reference absolute! By continuing to press F4, Excel will cycle 
through all of the absolute reference possibilities. For example, in the first absolute cell 
reference formula in this tutorial, =B4*$B$10, I could have typed, =B4*B10, then pressed 
the F4 key to change B10 to $B$10. Continuing to press F4 would have resulted in B$10, 
then $B10, and finally B10. Pressing F4 changes only the cell reference directly to the left of 
your insertion point. 
I hope this tutorial has made these cell reference types "absolutely" clear! 
----------- 
Page 137
POWER POINT 
Microsoft Power Point is a product of Microsoft Company. It is window based application software. 
We can create an effective slide based presentation in MS Power Point. Presentation consists 
of a number of slides. Each slide can have text and graphics. A default name for a power point 
file is Presentation -1. A file extension for power point is .ppt. 
Presentation: Presentation is the practice of showing and explaining the content of a topic to an 
audience or leaner. A presentation program, such as MS power point, is often used to generate 
the presentation content. 
 INSERT MENU 
 New Slide (Ctrl + M) 
With the help of this option you can insert a slide in your presentation. 
STEPS: (1) Click on insert menu 
(2) Click on new slide option 
(3) Select any slide layout 
(4) Click on Apply button. 
 Text Box 
With the help of this option you can insert a text box in your presentation. 
STEPS: 
(1) click on insert menu 
(2) click on textbox option 
(3) Set your mouse position in the slide where you want to put a textbox. 
(4) Enter a text in your test box. 
(5) click outside of your textbox. 
Slide No: 
With the help of this option you can insert a slide no in your presentation. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on Insert menu 
(2) Click on Slide no. 
 Duplicate: 
With the help of this option you can create a duplicate slide of a selected slide. 
STEPS: 
(1) Click on insert menu 
(2) Select Duplicate option 
 FORMAT MENU 
 Background 
 Layout 
Apply Design Template 
With the help of this option you can insert a design in your slide background 
STEPS: 
Page 138
(1) click on Format Menu 
(2) Click on Apply Design template Option 
(3) Select Any one design 
(4) Click on Apply Button 
 EDIT MENU: 
 Delete Slide 
With the help of this option you can delete a selected slide from your presentation. 
STEPS: 
1)select a slide which you want to delete 
(2) click on Edit menu 
(3) Select delete option 
 VIEW MENU: 
 Normal 
With the help of this option you can view a slide in a normal layout 
 Slide Sorter 
With the help of this option you can view all slide of our presentation together in a thumbnail size. 
Slide show 
With the help of this option you can see your presentation in a full screen. 
 SLIDE SHOW MENU (Alt + S) 
 Slide Transition: 
With the help of this option you can set a time duration between slides of your presentation, so that 
your slides displayed automatically. 
STPS: 
(1) click on slide show menu 
(2) Select Slide Transition option 
(3) Select any effect you want to apply in your slide 
(4) Select Speed 
(5) unselect on mouse over box 
(6) select (check) Automatically after option 
(7) If you want to apply the effects to all slides of you presentation then click on apply to all button or 
click on apply button only. 
 Custom Animation 
With the help of this option you can apply effects on your texts, graphics, objects etc,. 
What is Custom Animation? 
 Custom Animation is a feature in Microsoft Office PowerPoint. 
 It contains a list of effects that you can apply to objects to have them animate during the 
slide show. 
 Custom animation is a set of effects which can be applied to objects in PowerPoint so that 
they will animate in the Slide Show. 
 PowerPoint 2000 and earlier versions introduced basic effects such as Appear, Dissolve, Fly 
In and so forth. 
Page 139
 In PowerPoint 2002/XP and later versions, the Custom Animation feature was improved, 
adding new animation effects grouped into four categories: Entrance, Emphasis, Motion and 
Exit Paths. 
STEPS: 
(1) click on slide show menu 
(2) Select Custom Animation Option 
(3) Select picture or a text on which you want to apply effect 
(4) Select any effect 
(5) Click on Introduce text option and choose any one option from it. 
(6) click on apply button 
 Set up show 
With the help of this option you can set your slide show in continue manner 
STEPS: 
(1) click on slide show menu 
(2) select setup show option 
(3) Select loop continue until Esc check box 
(4) click on OK button 
--------------- 
http://www.ischool.utexas.edu/technology/tutorials/office/ppt03/02ppt_starting.html 
http://office.microsoft.com/en-in/powerpoint-help/about-powerpoint-views-HP005194974.aspx 
About PowerPoint views 
Microsoft PowerPoint has three main views: 
(1) normal view 
(a) Outline tab 
(b) Slides tab 
(c) Slide pane 
(d) Notes pane 
(2) slide sorter view 
(3) slide show view. 
It has also some more additional views. 
(4) Reading view and 
(5) Notes Page view 
You can select a view, based on these main views, to be your default view in PowerPoint. 
(1)Normal view 
Normal view is the main editing view, which you use to write and design your presentation. 
The view has three working areas: on the left, tabs that alternate between an outline of your 
Page 140
slide text (Outline tab) and your slides displayed as thumbnails (Slides tab); on the right, the 
slide pane, which displays a large view of the current slide; and on the bottom, the notes pane . 
(notes pane: The pane in normal view in which you type notes that you want to accompany a 
slide. You print these notes as notes pages or have them display when you save a presentation 
as a Web page.). 
Outline tab 
Showing your slide text in outline form, this area is a great place to start 
writing your content — to capture your ideas, plan how you want to 
present them, and move slides and text around. 
Slides tab 
Switch to this tab to see the slides in your presentation as thumbnail-sized 
images while you edit. The thumbnails make it easy for you to 
navigate through your presentation and to see the effects of your design 
changes. You can also rearrange, add, or delete slides. 
Slide pane 
With the current slide shown in this large view, you can add text, insert pictures. 
(picture: A file (such as a metafile) that you can ungroup and manipulate as two or more 
objects, or a file that stays as a single object (such as bitmaps).) 
, tables, charts, drawing objects, text boxes, movies, sounds, hyperlinks, and animations. 
Notes pane 
Add notes that relate to each slide's content, and use them in printed form to refer to as you give 
your presentation, or create notes that you want your audience to see either in printed form or 
on a Web page. 
The Outline and Slides tabs change to display an icon when the pane becomes narrow, and if 
you only want to see the current slide in the window as you edit, you can close the tabs with a 
Close box in the right corner. 
Page 141
Drag the splitter bar to narrow the pane; the tab names turn into icons. 
You can adjust the size of the different panes in normal view by dragging the pane borders. 
(2) Slide sorter view 
Slide sorter view is an exclusive view of your slides in thumbnail form, helpful for rearranging the 
order of your slides. 
When you are finished creating and editing your presentation, slide sorter gives you an overall 
picture of it — making it easy to reorder, add, or delete slides and preview your transition and 
animation effects. 
In the Slide Sorter view, you see a miniature of each slide. The Slide Sorter view not only gives 
you a great view of your presentation as a whole, but it also lets you rearrange and hide your 
slides. You can view the slides in this view with formatting either shown or hidden. If you wish 
to increase or decrease the view of the slides, you can also adjust the view by zooming in and 
out as necessary. 
(3) Slide show view 
Slide show view takes up the full computer screen, like an actual slide show presentation. In 
this full-screen view, you see your presentation the way your audience will. You can see how 
your graphics, timings, movies, animated elements, and transition effects will look in the actual 
show. 
(animate: To add a special visual or sound effect to text or an object. For example, you can 
have your text bullet points fly in from the left, one word at a time, or hear the sound of 
applause when a picture is uncovered.) 
Additional Views: 
Page 142
Slides view: 
This is a great place to view the slides in your presentation as thumbnail-sized images while 
you edit. The thumbnails make it easy for you to navigate through your presentation and to see 
the effects of any design changes. You can also easily rearrange, add, or delete slides here. 
Outline view: 
This is a great place to start writing your content, to capture your ideas, plan how you want to 
present them, and move slides and text around. The Outline tab shows your slide text in outline 
form. 
(4) Reading View: 
Use reading view to deliver your presentation not to an audience (via a large screen, for 
example), but instead to someone viewing your presentation on their own computer. Or, use 
Reading view on your own computer when you want to view a presentation not in full-screen 
Slide Show view, but in a window with simple controls that make the presentation easy to 
review. You can always switch from Reading view to one of the other views if you want to 
change the presentation. 
(5) Notes Page: 
The "Notes Page" view is an expanded version of the "Notes" pane in "Normal" view. This view allows 
you to use the full PowerPoint window to work on your notes. You can also use "Notes Page" view to 
prepare and print your notes in full-page format. 
------ 
http://celt.cui.edu/CELT/PowerPoint/PP_Transitions.htm# 
b 
PowerPoint: Slide Transition and 
Custom Animation 
Transitions happen between slides. They can be disolve through black from one to 
the next, checkerboard pattern, etc. 
Custom Animation deals with putting your bullet points up on the screen one at a 
time, and how they enter. They can just appear, fly in from the side or bottom, etc. 
They don't necessarily add to the content of the presentation, but rather simply make 
the presentation a little more interesting to view, thus better keeping the attention of 
your audience. 
Slide Transitions | Custom Animation 
Page 143
Slide Transitions 
1 
From the menu in the right column of the screen, select Slide Transitions. 
2 
The following menu will appear: 
Page 144
Highlight one of the options, such as Box In, and you will see the slide preview what 
you selected. You do not have an Apply button to check; just highlighting the choice 
will apply it to the slide. If you want to use the same transition between all slides, click 
on the Apply to All Slides option. 
3 
If you go to the Slide Sorter view (View/Slide Sorter) or click on this icon 
near the lower left corner of the screen you will see your slides 
displayed in the following format: 
Page 145
The littel star in the lower left corner indicates that a transition has been applied to that 
slide. Click on that star and you will see the animation previewed. 
4 
To remove a transition, you must be in the individual slide, not the Slide Sorter view. 
From the Slide Sorder view, double click on the slide you wish to change. If the 
program is not showing the Transitions in the right column, select Transitions (follow 
directions in step 1 above). Now slide the choice bar to No Transition at the top of the 
list of choices and the transition will be gone. 
Custom Animation 
5 
Page 146
The following steps will allow formatting so that individual bullets show one at a time. In 
the right hand column of PowerPoint, click on the down arrow and go to the Custom 
Animation option: 
6 
You will now see the menu below: 
Page 147
7 
Put your cursor in the first bullet point. Click on Add Effect and you will see the options 
shown below. 
You can see that besides Entrance, you have several other options. This tutorial will 
focus on Entrance, but all work in a similar manner. The only one that is a little tricky is 
Page 148
Motion paths. If you are interested in this one, go to the Faculty Resources side of 
CELT. You will find a tutorial for Motion Paths there. 
8 
Here is an example of what you will see happening on the screen as the animation is 
applied: 
9 
You will notice that there are now numbers to the left of the bullet points. These 
numbers represent the order in which the animation will happen. Because we selected 
"on mouse click", the points will show only after you click the mouse when you show 
the presentation. See the illustration in step 10 below. 
10 
Page 149
You can select any of the animations and modify it. In the illustration, animation 3 is 
selected. You can use the Change button to change the style or the Remove button to 
eliminate this animation. As you can see, you also have options for when it starts, 
direction, and speed. If you use the Re-Order option, you can move this item up or 
down in the sequence using the green up/down arrows. 
11 
Bullet points are not the only feature that can have custom animation. You can add 
animation to the title at the top of the slide or to any graphic or picture you put into the 
slide. 
Page 150
INTERNET 
What is Internet? 
Ans: 
® The Internet, sometimes called simply "the Net," is a worldwide system of computer 
networks - 
® It is a network of networks in which users at any one computer can, (if they have 
permission,) get information from any other computer (and sometimes talk directly to 
users at other computers). 
 What is web browser? Give any two examples of web browser. 
Ans: 
® Defi 1: The web browsers are software application which allow the customers to open 
and read HTML, PHP and other scripting languages on their computers. 
® Defi 2: A web browser is a software application for retrieving, presenting, and 
traversing information resources on the World Wide Web. The major web browsers are 
Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Internet Explorer, Opera, and Safari. 
® Defi 3: A web browser is a software application which enables a user to display and 
interact with text. Images , videos , music , games and other information typically 
located on a web page at a website on the WWW or a LAN. 
 Give the full form of URL, SMTP, POP, TCP, HTTP and DNS. 
Ans: 
® URL: uniform resource locator( previously Universal Resource Locator): It is the 
unique address for a file that is accessible on the Internet. 
® SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol: It is an Internet standard for electronic mail (e-mail) 
transmission across Internet Protocol (IP) networks. 
® POP: Post Office Protocol: It is an application-layer Internet standard protocol used by 
local e-mail clients to retrieve e-mail from a remote server. 
® TCP: Transmission Control Protocol : It is one of the core protocols of the Internet 
Protocol Suite. 
® HTTP: Hypertext Transfer Protocol : is an application protocol for distributed, 
collaborative, hypermedia information systems. 
® DNS: Domain Name System : It is a hierarchical distributed naming system for 
computers, services, or any resource connected to the Internet or a private network. 
 What is E-mail? 
Ans: 
® The full form of e-mail is electronic mail. It is a protocol(rule) for receiving and 
sending, and storing electronic messages. 
 What is an IP Address? 
Page 151
Ans: 
® "IP" stands for Internet Protocol, so an IP address is an Internet Protocol address. An IP 
address is a unique number that every computer connected to the internet is assigned. 
 What is CUI and GUI? 
Ans: 
What is CUI? 
CUI stands for Character User Interface, it means that u have to type commands to interact 
with ur computer. It means you have to take help of a keyboard to type commands to 
interact with the computer. e.g. - In DOS for every thing we type the commands. 
You can only type text to give commands to the computer as in MS DOS or command 
prompt. There are no images or graphics on the screen and it is a primitive type of 
interface. In the beginning, computers had to be operated through this interface and 
users who have seen it say that they had to contend with a black screen with white text 
only. In those days, there was no need of a mouse as CUI did not support the use of 
pointer devices. CUI’s have gradually become outdated with the more advanced GUI 
taking their place. However, even the most modern computers have a modified version 
of CUI called CLI (Command Line Interface). 
What is GUI? 
GUI stands for Graphical User Interface, it means that u no need to type commands to 
interact with your computer instead u have to click with the help of mouse on the icons 
of readymade commands. e.g. - Windows 
GUI is what most modern computers make use of. This is an interface that makes use of 
graphics, images and other visual clues such as icons. This interface made it possible for 
a mouse to be used with a computer and interaction really became very easy as the user 
could interact with just a click of the mouse rather than having to type every time to 
give commands to the computer. 
 What is the Difference between CUI and GUI? 
CUI GUI 
1. Stands for Character User Interface 1. GUI stands for Graphical User Interface 
2. There is only text in case of CUI 2. There are Graphics and other visual 
clues in case of GUI 
3. DOS is an example of CUI 3. Windows is an Example of GUI 
4. CUI is not much easier to navigate. 4. GUI is much easier to navigate. 
5. Only keyboard is used in this type of 
interface, no pointer device is used in it. 
5. Both keyboard and mouse is used in this 
type of interface. 
 What is the protocol? 
Ans: 
® A standard set of regulations and requirements that allow two electronic items to 
connect to and exchange information with one another. 
® Protocols control data transmission among devices as well as within a network of linked 
devices through both error control and specifying which data compression method to 
use. 
Page 152
® In particular, protocols decide: the method of error checking, how to compact data (if 
required), how the transmitting device signals that it has concluded sending data, and 
how the receiving device signals that it has completed receiving data. 
® Among the most common Internet protocols are FTP (File Transfer Protocol), HTTP 
(Hypertext Transfer Protocol), TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol), 
and SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol). 
OR 2nd Definition 
® A uniform set of rules that enable two devices to connect and transmit data to one 
another. 
® Protocols determine how data are transmitted between computing devices and over 
networks. 
® They define issues such as error control and data compression methods. 
® The protocol determines the following: type of error checking to be used, data 
compression method (if any), how the sending device will indicate that it has finished a 
message and how the receiving device will indicate that it has received the message. 
® Internet protocols include TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol), HTTP 
(Hypertext Transfer Protocol), FTP (File Transfer Protocol), and SMTP (Simple Mail 
Transfer Protocol). 
 Which protocol is required for email? 
Ans: 
® SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is used to send and receive an email. but we 
preferred POP(Post office Protocol) or IMAP(International Mail Access Protocol). 
 Write a note on IP Address. 
Ans: 
® Every computer connected to the internet has an unique Internet Protocol or IP address. 
It is used to identify the computer on the internet. In the currently most widely used 
version of the Internet Protocol is - version 4. IP addresses are 4 bytes long(32-bit) and 
they are expressed in the form nn.nn.nn.nn. Each nn is a number between 0 and 255. (in 
the form of ‘octets’ in a “dotted decimal Number”). A typical IP Address is look like 
this: 216.27.61.137 
® The four numbers in an IP address are called octets because they can have values 
between 0 and 255, which is 28 possibilities per octet. 
® Every machine on the Internet has a unique IP address. A server has a static IP address 
that does not change very often. 
® When you connect to a web server to browse a web page, the DNS name of the web 
server, e.g. www.facebook.com, is automatically translated by the software in your 
machine to an IP address in the nn.nn.nn.nn form. This address is then used to connect 
to the actual web server. 
® For example, the IP address of the server hosting fogbugz.bitvise.com at the time of this 
writing is 70.85.217.69. Our primary website, on the other hand, is hosted on several 
servers, and their IP addresses are 207.155.248.18, 207.155.248.31, 207.155.248.122 
and 207.155.252.47. 
Page 153
® A home machine that is dialing up through a modem often has an IP address that is 
assigned by the ISP when the machine dials in. That IP address is unique for that session 
-- it may be different the next time the machine dials in. This way, an ISP only needs 
one IP address for each modem it supports, rather than for each customer. 
® As far as the Internet's machines are concerned, an IP address is all you need to talk to a 
server. For example, in your browser, you can type the URL http://209.116.69.66 and 
arrive at the machine that contains the Web server for HowStuffWorks. On some 
servers, the IP address alone is not sufficient, but on most large servers it is -- keep 
reading for details. 
® If you are working on a Windows machine, you can view an Internet information for 
your machine, including your current IP address and hostname, with the command 
WINIPCFG.EXE (IPCONFIG.EXE for Windows 2000/XP). On a UNIX machine, 
type nslookup at the command prompt, along with a machine name, like 
www.gmail.com -- e.g. "nslookup www.gmail.com" -- to display the IP address of the 
machine, and you can use the command hostname to learn the name of your machine. 
® In a Windows Command Prompt session, you can discover the IP addresses associated 
with DNS names using the nslookup command: e.g. 'nslookup www.bitvise.com'. 
 What is TCP/IP? 
Ans: 
® TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is the basic communication 
language or protocol of the Internet. It can also be used as a communications protocol in 
a private network (either an intranet or an extranet). 
® When you are set up with direct access to the Internet, your computer is provided with a 
copy of the TCP/IP program just as every other computer that you may send messages 
to or get information from also has a copy of TCP/IP. 
® TCP/IP is a two-layer program. The higher layer, Transmission Control Protocol, 
manages the assembling of a message or file into smaller packets that are transmitted 
over the Internet and received by a TCP layer that reassembles the packets into the 
original message. The lower layer, Internet Protocol, handles the address part of each 
packet so that it gets to the right destination. 
® Each gateway computer on the network checks this address to see where to forward the 
message. 
® Even though some packets from the same message are routed differently than others, 
they'll be reassembled at the destination. 
 What is DNS? 
Ans: 
® IP addresses are difficult to remember, so the internet provides a translation service 
which translates memorable names into associated IP addresses. This facility is called 
the Domain Name System or DNS. 
® You use DNS implicitly every time you type in an address such as 'www.bitvise.com' - 
your browser asks your operating system for translation into an IP address, and the 
operating system either returns a cached result, or inquires with a DNS server operated 
Page 154
by your ISP. This server in turn either returns a cached result or inquires with another 
DNS server. 
® Because most people have trouble remembering the strings of numbers that make up IP 
addresses, and because IP addresses sometimes need to change, all servers on the 
Internet also have human-readable names, called domain names. 
® For example, www.howstuffworks.com is a permanent, human-readable name. It is 
easier for most of us to remember www.howstuffworks.com than it is to remember 
209.116.69.66. 
® The name www.howstuffworks.com actually has three parts: 
1. The host name ("www") 
2. The domain name ("howstuffworks") 
3. The top-level domain name ("com") 
® There are so many types of domain extensions: 
.org (A top-level domain name for organizational Internet sites in the United 
States), 
.com (A top-level domain name used for commercial Internet sites in the United 
States), 
.gov (A top-level domain name used for a U.S. government site on the Internet), 
.net (A top-level domain name used for Internet administrative sites in the United States), 
.in (India), 
.uk (United Kingdom), 
.biz (Business Organizations) 
 Domain Name System 
® Domain Name System(DNS) is a protocol within the set of standards(principles) for 
how computers exchange data on the Internet (and on many private networks, known as 
the TCP/IP protocol suite). Its basic job is to turn a user-friendly domain name like 
"facebook.com" into an Internet Protocol (IP) address like 70.42.251.42 (that computers 
use to identify each other on the network). 
® Domain names within the ".com" domain are managed by the registrar called VeriSign. 
VeriSign also manages ".net" domain names. Other registrars (like RegistryPro, 
NeuLevel and Public Interest Registry) manage the other domains (like .pro, .biz and 
.org). VeriSign creates the top-level domain names and guarantees that all names within 
a top-level domain are unique. VeriSign also maintains contact information for each site 
and runs the "whois" database. The host name is created by the company hosting the 
domain. "www" is a very common host name, but many places now either omit it or 
replace it with a different host name that indicates a specific area of the site. For 
example, in encarta.msn.com, the domain name for Microsoft's Encarta encyclopedia, 
"encarta" is designated as the host name instead of "www." 
 Name Servers 
® A set of servers called DNS Server (Name Server / domain name servers), it maps the 
human-readable names to the IP addresses. 
Page 155
® These servers are simple databases that map names to IP addresses, and they are 
distributed all over the Internet. Most individual companies, ISPs (Internet Service 
Provider) and universities maintain small name servers to map host names to IP 
addresses. There are also central name servers that use data supplied by VeriSign(is US 
based company that provides an authentication, like ISO in India) to map domain names 
to IP addresses. 
® If you type the URL "http://www.howstuffworks.com/web-server.htm" into your 
browser, your browser extracts the name "www.howstuffworks.com," passes it to a 
domain name server, and the domain name server returns the correct IP address for 
www.howstuffworks.com. A number of name servers may be involved to get the right 
IP address. 
® Without DNS servers, the Internet would shut down very quickly. But how does your 
computer know what DNS server to use? Typically, when you connect to your home 
network, Internet service provider (ISP) or WiFi network, the modem or router that 
assigns your computer's network address also sends some important network 
configuration(setting, pattern, design) information to your computer or mobile device. 
That configuration includes one or more DNS servers that the device should use when 
translating DNS names to IP address. 
® For example, in the case of www.howstuffworks.com, the name server for the "com" 
top-level domain will know the IP address for the name server that knows host names, 
and a separate query to that name server, operated by the HowStuffWorks ISP, may 
deliver the actual IP address for the HowStuffWorks server machine. 
® On a UNIX machine, you can access the same service using the nslookup command. 
Simply type a name like "www.howstuffworks.com" into the command line, and the 
command will query the name servers and deliver the corresponding (related) IP address 
to you. 
® So here it is: The Internet is made up of millions of machines, each with a unique IP 
address. Many of these machines are server machines, meaning that they provide 
services to other machines on the Internet. You have heard of many of these servers: e-mail 
servers, Web servers, FTP servers, Gopher servers and Telnet servers, to name a 
few. All of these are provided by server machines. 
 Define Terms Speaker Notes and Handouts: 
Ans: 
(i) Speaker Notes: 
Ans: 
Speaker notes are simply that... notes for a speaker! They are short notes of key points to be 
used as a reminder while giving a speech.For example... if using PowerPoint, make a note of 
the main points of each slide to remind yourself of what you are going to say when you are 
presenting it. 
They are used ONLY for short notes / comments, NOT a script of the whole presentation / 
speech. 
(ii) Handouts: 
Ans: 
Page 156
It's simply a piece of paper with limited important points that form the basis of the 
information you used for your presentation. Give them out at the end, and tell your 
audience this before you start so they needn't make extensive notes. It also means they'll 
pay attention, but by giving it out afterwards, they won't be tempted to look at them as 
your presentation is ongoing. 
 What is POP? 
Ans: 
® Stands for "Post Office Protocol." . it is a simple, standardized method of delivering e-mail 
messages. A POP mail server receives e-mails and filters them into the appropriate 
user folders. When a user connects to the mail server to retrieve his mail, the messages 
are downloaded from mail server to the user's hard disk. 
® When you configure your e-mail client, such as Outlook (Windows) or Mail (Mac OS 
X), you will need to enter the type of mail server your e-mail account uses. This will 
typically be either a POP or IMAP server. IMAP mail servers are a bit more complex 
than POP servers and allow e-mail messages to be read and stored on the server. Many 
"webmail" interfaces use IMAP mail servers so that users can manage all their mail 
online. 
® Still, most mail servers use the POP mail protocol because it is simple and well-supported. 
You may have to check with your ISP or whoever manages your mail 
account to find out what settings to use for configuring your mail program. If your e-mail 
account is on a POP mail server, you will need to enter the correct POP server 
address in your e-mail program settings. Typically, this is something like 
"mail.servername.com" or "pop.servername.com." Of course, to successfully retrieve 
your mail, you will have to enter a valid username and password too. 
 Write a note on application of Internet. 
Ans: 
® The Internet is a worldwide network of computers connecting thousands and thousands 
of computers across the globe. It is formed by the joining of many smaller networks 
around the world to form the largest network in the world. The computers of the Internet 
are connected through telephone lines, satellite links, modem and through many other 
means. 
® The Internet consists of following applications : 
# World Wide Web 
# E-Mail 
#Chatting 
# Video Conferencing 
# Searching for information 
#Online Shopping and Trade 
#Education and Research 
Page 157

PC Software - Computer Application - Office Automation Tools

  • 1.
    A book ByMr. Ashish Patel (Software Engineer and Professor and CEO at SAPTRSI) Page 1
  • 2.
    INDEX 1. Introduction 1.1. Basic DOS Commands 1.2. Concept of Windows, Icon, Menu 1.3. Desktop 1.4. Creating Folders and Shortcuts 1.5. Finding Files & Folders 1.6. Creating, Copying, Moving and Deleting files 1.7. Windows Explorer 2. Word Processing Package 2.1. Typing, Editing, Proofing & reviewing 2.2. Formatting text & Paragraph 2.3. Automatics Formatting and Styles 2.4. Working with Tables 2.5. Graphics and Frames 2.6. Mail Merge 2.7. Automating Your Work & printing documents 3. Spreadsheet package 3.1. Concept of worksheet 3.2. Working & Editing in Workbooks 3.3. Creating Formats & Links 3.4. Protecting and Hiding data 3.5. Built in Functions 3.6. Formatting a Worksheet & Creating graphics objects 3.7. Creating Charts (Graphics), Formatting and analyzing data 3.8. Organizing Data in a List (Data Management) 3.9. Sharing & Importing Data 3.10. Printing 3.11. Macros 4. Presentation Package 4.1. Creating and Editing Slides 4.2. Creating and Editing objects in the slide 4.3. Animation and Running Slide Show 4.4. Creating and Running Slide Show 4.5. Templates 4.6. Interface with other packages 5. Internet 5.1. Concepts 5.2. Working 5.3. Mailing & surfing tools Page 2
  • 3.
    MS - DOS(Microsoft Disk Operating System) ® MS-DOS is an operating system designed for the IBM PC by Microsoft in 1981. ® The first personal computer version of DOS, called PC-DOS, was developed for IBM by Bill Gates and his new Microsoft Corporation. He retained the rights to market a Microsoft version, called MS-DOS. ® MS DOS is Microsoft Disk Operating System. It is a text based OS. ® It was a command-line interface, meaning the user had to type in commands to use it, unlike Windows which is a Graphical User Interface. ® MS DOS commands were either stored as individual programs, known as external commands, or in a file called Command.com, which stored more commonly used commands. These were called internal commands. ® Included in these would have been commands like COPY, DEL, DIR, CD and RD. COPY enabled the copying of files. DEL deleted files. DIR gave a listing of files in a directory (now called a folder). CD changed from one directory to another. RD removed a directory.  AUTOEXE.BAT: ® AUTOEXE.BAT is a system file found originally on DOS-type operating system. ® It is a plain text batch file that is located in the root directory of the boot device. ® The name of the file is an abbreviation of “automatic execution” , which describes its function in automatically executing commands on system startup. ® AUTOEXE.BAT is most often used to set environment variables such as keyboard, soundcard, printer and temporary file locations.  COMMAND.COM: ® It is the filename of the default operating system shell for DOS Operating systems and the default command line interpreter on Windows 95, Windows 98 and Windows ME. ® It has an additional role as the first program run after boot, hence being responsible for setting up the system by running the AUTOEXE.BAT configuration file, and being the ancestor of all processes. ® COMMAND.COM’s successor on OS/2 and Windows NT-based operating system is cms.exe (Command Prompt). ® COMMAND.COM has two distinct modes of work. First is the “interactive mode”, in which the user types commands which are then executed immediately. The second is the “batch mode”, which executes a predefined sequence of commands stored as a text file with the extension .BAT. Page 3
  • 4.
    DOS Commands: InternalCommands External Commands BREAK CALL CHCP CHDIR(CD) CLS COPY CTTY DATE DEL(ERASE) DIR ECHO EXIT FOR GOTO IF MKDIR(MD) PATH PAUSE PROMPT REM RENAME(REN) RMDIR(RD) SET SHIFT TIME TYPE VER VERIFY VOL APPEND.EXE ASSIGN.COM ATTRIB.EXE BACKUP.EXE CHKDSK.EXE COMMAND.COM COMP.EXE DEBUG.EXE DISKCOMP.COM DISKCOPY.COM DOSKEY.COM DOSSHELL.COM EDIT.COM EDLIN.EXE EMM386.EXE EXE2BIN.EXE EXPAND.EXE FASTOPEN.EXE FC.EXE FDISK.EXE FORMAT.COM GRAFTABLE.COM GRAPHICS.COM HELP.EXE JOIN.EXE KEYB.COM LABEL.EXE MEM.EXE MIRROR.COM MODE.COM MORE.COM NLSFUNC.EXE PRINT.EXE QBASIC.EXE RECOVER.EXE REPLACE.EXE RESTORE.EXE SETVER.EXE SHARE.EXE SORT.EXE SUBST.EXE SYS.COM TREE.COM UNDELETE.EXE UNFORMAT.COM XCOPY.EXE DOS Commands 1. Dir ® The dir command allows you to see the available files in the current and/or parent directories. Syntax: Dir [drive:][path][filename][/p][/w][/A:Attributes][/O:order][/S][/L] Where, [drive:][path][filename]: Specifies drive, directory, and/or files to list. /P: Pauses after each screenful of information /W: uses wide list format /A: Attributes: H | -H : Hidden (or not hidden ) files S | -S : System (or non system) files D | -D : Directories (or files only). R | -R : Read-only (or read/write) files A | -A : Archivable (or already archives) files /O:order: N | -N : By name (alphabetical or reverse alphabetical) Page 4
  • 5.
    E | -E:By extension (alphabetical or reverse alphabetical) D | -D: By date and time (chronologically or reverse) S | -S: By size (increasing or decreasing) C | -C: Sorts by Double Space compression ratio lowest to highest or highest to lowest (version 6.0 only) G | -G : Group directories( before, or after) other files. /S: Displays files in specified directory and all subdirectories. /L: uses lowercase. Example: ® Dir Lists all files and directories in the directory that you are currently in. ® Dir /s Lists the files in the directory that you are in and all sub directories after that directory, if you are at root “C:>” and type this command this will list to you every file and directory on the C: drive of the computer. ® Dir /p If the directory has a lot of files and you cannot read all the files as they scroll by you can use this command and it will display all files one page at a time. ® Dir > myfile.txt Takes the output of dir and re-routes it to the file myfile.txt instead of outputting it to the screen. 2. Md / mkdir Allows you to create your own directories in MS-DOS. Syntax: MKDIR [drive:]path OR MD [drive:]path Examples: ® md test He above example creates the “test” directory (folder) in the directory you are currently in ® md c:test Create the “test” directory in c: drive. 3. Rd / rmdir Removes empty directories in MS-DOS. Syntax: RMDIR [drive:]path OR RD [drive:] path Examples: Page 5
  • 6.
    ® rmdir c:test removes the test directory, if empty. 4. Cd CD (Change Directory) is a command used to switch directories in MS-DOS. Syntax: CHDIR [drive:][path] OR CD[drive][path] CHDIR[..] CD[..] Examples: ® cd Goes to the highest level, the root of the drive. ® cd.. goes back one directory. For example, if you are within C:WindowsCommand > directory, this would take you to C:Windows > Windows 95,98 and later versions have a feature in the CD command that allows you to go back more than one directory when using the dots. For example, typing: cd… with three dots after the cd would take you back two directories. ® cd Typing cd alone will print the working directory. For example, if you are in c:windows> and you type the cd it will print c:windows. For those users who are familiar with Unix/Linux this could be thought of as doing the pwd (print working directory) command.  FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 5. Copy Allows user to copy one or more files to an alternate location. Syntax: Copy source [destination] Examples: ® Copy *.* a: Copy all files in the current directory to a: drive 6. Del / erase Page 6
  • 7.
    Del(erase) is acommand used to remove files from your computer’s hard disk and or other writable media. Syntax: DEL [drive:][path]filename[/P] OR ERASE [drive:][path]filename [/P] Where, [drive:][path]filename: specifies the files(s) to delete. Specify multiple files by using wildcards. /P: prompts for confirmation before deleting each file. Example: ® Erase c:windows*.FAK Delete any files that end with the FAK extension. ® Del c:windowstemp?est.tmp = (? is a single wild character for one letter). This command would delete any file ending with est.tmp such as pest.tmp or zest.tmp…. 7. Copy con To create a new file Syntax: copy con [filename] Example: ® Copy con test.txt A user can create a file using the copy con command as shown above, which creates the test.txt file. Once the above command has been typed in, a user could type in whatever he or she wishes. When you have completed creating the file, you can save and exit the file by pressing ctrl + z, which would create ^Z, and then press enter. An easier way to view and edit files in MS-DOS would be to use edit command. 8. Ren / rename Uses to rename files and directories from the original name to a new name. Syntax: Renames a file/directory or files/directories RENAME [drive:][path][directoryname1][filename1][directoryname2][filename2] OR REN[drive:][path][directoryname1][filename1][directoryname2][filename2] Examples: ® rename c:chope hope Page 7
  • 8.
    rename the directorychope to hope. ® Rename *.txt *.bak Renames all text files to files with .bak extension. ® Rename *1_ Rename all files to begin with 1_. The asterisk (*) in this example is an example of a wild character; because nothing was placed before or after he first asterisk, this means all files in the current directory will be renamed with a 1_ in front of the file. For example if there was a file named hope.txt it would be renamed to 1_pe.txt.  GENERAL COMMAND 9. Type Allows the user to see the contents of a file. Syntax: Type [drive:][path]filename Examples: ® Type c:autoexec.bat This would allow you to look at the autoexec.bat 10. Date The date command can be used to look at the current date of the computer as well as change the date to an alternate date. Syntax: DATE [date] Type DATE without parameters to display the current date setting and a prompt for a new one, press enter to keep the same date. Examples: ® Date Display the current date and prompt for a new one. If no date is entered the current date will be kept. 11. Time Allows user to view and edit the computer’s time Syntax: TIME[time] Type time with no parameters to display current time setting and a prompt for a new one. Press enter to keep the same time Examples: Page 8
  • 9.
    ® Time 12:00 Set the time to 12:00 12. Cls Cls is a command that allows a user to clear the complete contents of the screen and leave only a prompt. Syntax: CLS Examples: ® Cls Running the cls command at the command prompt would clear your screen of all previous text and only return the prompt. 13. Ver Displays the versions of MS-DOS (operating system) Syntax: VER Examples: ® Ver Display what version of MS-DOS or windows command prompt you’re using. Below is an example of what this may look like. Microsoft Windows XP [version 5.1.2600] 14. Edit Edit allows you to view, create and/or modify their computer files. Syntax: Edit FileName Examples: ® Edit c:user.txt This would look at the user.txt. However, if the file is not found , you will have a blank blue screen , when editing this or any file, ensure that you know what you are placing in the files improperly editing the file can cause issues with your computer. Using edit you can also create files; for example, if you wanted to create a file called myfile.txt, you would type: edit myfile.txt this would bring up a blank blue screen , as long as the file is saved upon exit, this will create the file myfile.txt. 15. Print This command allowed users to print a text file to a line printer, in the background. Page 9
  • 10.
    Syntax: Print filename ® Examples: print c:file.txt 16. Format It is used to erase all of the information off of a computer diskette or fixed drive When using the format command, remember all information on the drive you wish to format will be completely erased, Syntax: Format drive Examples: ® Format c: /q Quickly erases the contents of a C: drive. 17. Unformat Used to unformat a drive that has been formatted, Syntax: UNFORMAT drive: Examples: ® Unformat c: Command specified to unformat drive c: if it was unformatted. 18. More Allows information to be displayed one page at a time Syntax: Command-name | MORE [drive:][path][filename] Where, [drive:][path][filename] : Specifies file(s) to display one screen at a time. Command-name : specifies a command whose output will be displayed. Examples: ® Dir | more Allows you to view the directory listing one page at a time, if applicable, this would be the same as doing dir /p. ® More myfile.txt Would display the contents of a page one page at a time. Pressing space would go to the next page and pressing enter would go down one line at a time. Page 10
  • 11.
    19. Fdisk Itis used to divide a hard drive or hard disk into the number of partition, if divide your hard disk into partitions you can efficiently organize directories. Syntax: FDISK 20. Find Allows you to search for text within a file. It is case sensitive command. Syntax: Find “string” filename Example: ® Find “hope” *.txt This command searches for any txt file (.txt) that contains the text text hope in the current directory. 21. Defrag When you work on the PC, you delete files from your hard disk and create new files. At that time DOS first tries to reuse the space occupied by the deleted files so that new file gets fragmented, It means different parts of the same files get stored on different areas of hard disk. Overall period of time when you create and delete many files, they will be fragmented as defragment your disk using defrag command. Syntax: Defrag drive Example: ® Defrag C: 22. Attrib Attrib allows a user to change the properties of a specified file. Syntax: ATTRIB [+R][-R][+A][-A][+S][-S][+H[-H][[drive:][path]filename][/S] Where, + : Sets an attribute - : Clears an attribute. R : Read-only file attribute A : Archive file attribute S : System file attribute H : Hidden file attribute /S : processes files in all directories in the specified path Examples: ® Attrib Page 11
  • 12.
    It will displayall files in the current directory and each of their attributes. If any file is hidden it will also display those files. ® Attrib +r user.txt Add the read only attribute to the user.txt file so cannot be modified until the read only attribute is taken off. 23. Label It is used to view or change the label of the computer hard disk. Syntax: Creates , changes or deletes the volume label of a disk. LABEL [drive:][label] Example: ® Label a: mydisk This would label the disk currently in the drives to “mydisk”, but will not label if your disk is write protected 24. Vol Displays the volume information about the designated drive. Syntax: VOL [drive:] Examples: ® Vol c: 25. Tree Allows a user to view a listing of files and folders in an easy to read listing. Syntax: TREE Drive:path /f /a Where, Drive:path : drive and directory containing disk for display of directory structure. /f: displays file names in each directory. /a: ext characters used for linking lines., instead of graphics characters /a is used with code pages that do not support graphic characters and to send output to printers that do not properly interpret graphic characters, Examples: ® TREE 26. Deltree Short for delete tree. It is a command used to delete files and directories permanently from the computer. Page 12
  • 13.
    Syntax: DEL TREE[/Y] [drive:][path] Examples: ® Deltree c:fake010 It deletes fake010 directory and everything in it. 27. Prompt Allows to change the MS-DOS prompt to display more or less information. Syntax: PROMPT [text] The prompt can be made up of normal characters and below special codes. $Q = (equal sign) $$ $ (dollar sign) $T current time $D current date $P current drive and path $V windows version number $N current drive $G > (greater –than sign) $L & (less-than sign) Examples: ® Prompt $t $d $p$g It displays the time and the date above your prompt when in DOS. 28. Chkdsk It is a utility that checks the computer’s hard disk drives’ status for any cross-linked or any additional errors with the hard disk drive. Syntax: CHKDSK [drive:][[path]filename] [/F][/V] Where, [drive:][[path] : specifies drives and directory to checks Filename: specifies the file(s) to check for fragmentation /F: Fixes errors on the disk /V: displays the full path and name of every file on the disk Examples: ® Chkdsk 29. Scandisk It is a software utility capable of checking the hard disk drive and/or floppy diskette drive for any disk errors. Page 13
  • 14.
    Syntax: Scandisk drive: Examples: ® Scandisk c:autofix 30. Diskcopy It allows a user to copy the complete contents of a diskette to another diskette. Syntax: DISKCOPY [drive1:[drive2:]] [/1][/V][/M] Where, /1: copies only the first side of the disk /V: verifies that the information is copied correctly /M: force multi-pass copy using memory only. Examples: ® Diskcopy a: This would make a copy of a disk that is currently in your drive. 31. XCOPY It is a powerful version of the copy command with additional features. It has the capability of moving files, directories and even whole drives from one location to another. Syntax: XCOPY source [destination] /P /S Where, Source specifies the file(s) to copy Destination specifies the location and/or name of new files. /P: prompts you before creating each destination file. /S: copies directories and subdirectories except empty ones. Examples: ® Xcopy c:temp /e 32. Diskcomp Compare the contents of a floppy disk in the source drive to the contents of a floppy disk in the target drive. Syntax: Diskcopy [drive1: [drive2:]] Examples: ® Diskcopy A: B: Page 14
  • 15.
    This command cannotbe used with a hard disk drive and must be only used with floppies that are the identical size. The diskcomp exit codes are: 0 – disks are the same 1 – disk are different 2 – process aborted with ctrl + c by user 3 – Critical error 4 – initialization error 33. Comp A simple compare that compares two or more files. Syntax: Comp filename 1 filename 2 Example: ® Comp file1.txt file2.txt 34. Move Allows you to move files or directories from one folder to another, or from oe drive to another. Syntax: move path 1 path 2 path 1 specifies the full path of source files with drive and folder path 2 specify full path of a destination folder where you want to move Examples: ® Move c:windowstemp*.* c:temp Move the files of c:windowstemp to the temp directory in root. Read more: http://wiki.answers.com/Q/What_is_MS-DOS#ixzz23yfPJ7U6 Page 15
  • 16.
    Concept of Window,icons and Menu ICON: An icon in windows is a small picture or object that represents a file, program, webpage or command. Most of the time, the icon picture relates to the function of the item that it represents. For example, if the icon is attached to an e-mail program, it might be a picture of a letter. Icons are located on the desktop, in the start menu , and various other places. If you are using Windows 95, 98 or 2000, you can see several icons right now on your desktop. MENU: A menu is a list of commands presented to an operator by a computer. They may be thought of as shortcuts to frequently used commands that avoid the operator having to have a detailed knowledge or recall of syntax. · A computer using a Graphical user interface (GUI) presents menus with a combination of text and symbols to represent choices. · By clicking on one of the symbols, the operator is selecting the instruction that the symbol represents. · A common use of menus is to provide convenient access to various operations such as saving or opening a file, Quitting a program, or manipulating data. · Most provide some of pull-down or pop-up menu. · Pull –down menus are the type commonly used in menu bars(usually near the top of a window or screen), which are most often used for performing actions. · Pop-up (or “fly-out”) menus are more likely to be used for setting a value and might appear anywhere in a window. Page 16 Menu Pull Down Menu
  • 17.
    WINDOW: In windowsoperating system, a window may represent several things, such as a document, an application (e.g. word processor or spreadsheet program), a folder (an MS-DOS sub directory in windows in called the folder), a dialog box (where the user enters some information) etc, you can keep several windows open at a time. A Window is a visual area containing some kind of user interface. It usually has a rectangular shape. It displays the output of and allows input of one or more processes. Windows are primarily associated with graphical displays, where they can be manipulated with a mouse cursor. Windows are two dimensional objects arranged on a plane called the desktop. They can be resized, moved, hidden, restored or closed. Windows can be composed of other windows. One program can have multiple windows. For example in a text-editing program a user might benefit from working with several text files available at once. Those “child” windows “containing” text files can either be left separate from the main window or be encapsulated under the main “parent” window. TOOLBAR: In a graphical user interface on a computer monitor a tool bar is a panel of which onscreen buttons, icons, menus or other input or output elements are placed. Earlier forms of toolbars were defined by the programmer and had set functions, and thus there was no difference between a toolbar with buttons or just a row of buttons. Most modern programs and operating systems however, allow the end user to modify and customize toolbars to fit their personal needs An example of a web browser toolbar, the google toolbar, in firefox. Page 17
  • 18.
    TASKBAR: In computing,a taskbar is a term for an application desktop bar which is used to launch and monitor applications. Microsoft incorporated a taskbar in Windows 95 and it has been a defining aspect of Microsoft Windows’s graphical user interface (GUI) ever since. The windows taskbar can be modified by users in several ways. The position of the taskbar can be changed to appear on any edge of the primary display. Users can resize the height (or width when displayed vertically) of the taskbar up to half of the display area. TITLE BAR: In computing, The title bar consists of that part of the window where the title of the window appears. Most graphical operating systems and window manager position the title bar at the top of the application window as a horizontal bar. Default title-bar text often incorporates the name of the application and/or of its manufacturer. The name of the host running the application also appears frequently. The Title bar often contains icons for system commands relating to the window, such as a maximize, minimize and close buttons; and may include other content such as an application icon, a clock, etc. DESKTOP: A desktop commonly refers to a style of graphical user interface (GUI) that is based on the desktop which can be seen on most modern personal computers today. Page 18
  • 19.
    · These graphicaluser interfaces are designed to assist the user in easily accessing and configuring (or modifying) the most important (or frequently accessed) specific OS packed features. · A desktop environment typically consists of icons, windows, toolbars, folders, wallpapers. · Software which provides a desktop environment might also provide drag and drop functionality and other features which make more complete. · Today, most popular personal computers come pre-installed with an OS that provides a desktop environment. Traditionally these computers have used Microsoft Windows and to a lesser extent Mac OS whose desktop environments are relatively unalterable. · The most common desktop environment on personal computers is the one provided by Microsoft Windows; another common environment is the one provided by Apple Mac OS. NETWORK NEIGHBORHOOD: If your PC is connected to a network, the network neighborhood folder displays all computers in your network. To open the network neighborhood folder, double-click the network neighborhood icon on your desktop or in window explorer. Then windows display the network neighborhood window. This network neighborhood displays a list of all computers that are connected to the network. On double clicking icon, window will display the resources of the computer which you have access right to. Therefore, you may not be able to access all folders on all hard disks on a particular computer. Moreover, depending on the different types of rights (such as read, write, delete etc,) you may be able to open , edit or delete files on the folder of other computer on the network. If you are connected on a network and you have rights to save files on other computer, you can specify the other computer’s folder as the path. Page 19
  • 20.
    WHAT IS FILE? File is a collection of text or data stored on a storage device, such as a floppy disk or hard disk. You can store different types of documents in conventional file, the file that stores letters, memos, documents, etc is known as document or text file. The file that stores database information, such as an address list or sales information for a period is called database file. A file that contains instructions written in a programming language is called a program file. Control Panel, recycle Bin and Page Orientation  Control Panel The control panel is used to control the computer system. For example, you can control the behaviour of your mouse, keyboard, display, modem, printers, etc. Let us have a look at the control Panel. ® Open the start menu by clicking the start button on the taskbar. ® Choose the settings command from the start menu. (you can choose a command either by clicking / moving the mouse on the command or by using the keyboard) ® Windows displays a submenu of commands for settings. This submenu contains ‘Control Panel’ besides other commands. ® Choose the control panel command. ® Windows displays the control panel window that contains several icons as shown in the following figure: Page 20
  • 21.
    ® To seeadditional information about any icon, you click on that icon and windows displays a brief description about the clicked item. To change the settings for any item, open that item by double-clicking the mouse on that icon. Let us open Date/Time that is used to change the system date or time. ® Double click the Date/Time icon in the control panel and windows opens the Date/Time properties windows as shown in the following figure: Page 21
  • 22.
    ® After adjustingthe date and / or time, click the OK button to ask Windows to use the new settings and close the Date/Time Properties window. However, if you do not want to use the new date/time settings, click the Cancel button or close button in the title bar. RECYCLE BIN Microsoft introduced the recycle bin in the windows 95 Operating System. The Recycle Bin keeps files that have been deleted, whether accidentally or intentionally. Users can review the contents of the Recycle Bin before deleting the items permanently. The Recycle Bin holds data that not only lists deleted files, but also the date, time and the path of those files. The Recycle Bin is opened like ordinary Windows Explorer folder and the files are viewed similarly. Deleted files may be removed from the Recycle Bin by restoring them with a command, or by deleting them permanently. In Recycle Bin window, you can restore (i.e. undelete) all items back to their original locations by clicking restore all. If you want to restore selected items, select the require items and then choose the restore command from the file menu or from the right click menu. If you want to get details about any item in the Recycle Bin, select the item and the recycle bin displays it in window. The number of items the recycle bin can hold is limited by the hard disk space allocated to it by windows. Therefore, you should periodically empty the recycle bin by deleting those items from the recycle bin that you no more want to restore. For doing this, select the items and use the delete command from the file or the right click menu. to remove all items from the recycle bin, use the empty recycle bin command from file menu. The recycle bin’s icon indicates whether there are items in the Recycle Bin. If there are no files or folders in the Recycle Bin, then the icon resembles an empty wastepaper basket. Othwerwise if there are files and/or folders the icon resembles a full wastepaper basket. If your recycle bin window is empty, it indicates that currently there are no deleted items. The recycle bin can be accessed via the desktop or Windows Explorer. Files are moved to recycle bin in a number of ways. ® By right clicking on a file and selecting delete from the menu. ® Selecting a file and pressing delete key. ® By dragging and dropping a file into the recycle bin icon. The recycle bin only stores files deleted from hard drives, not from removable media, such as memory cards, floppy disks, pendrives. It also doesn’t stores files deleted from network drives. PAGE SETUP Question: What is page orientation? Ans: When you create a new document , word picks up a paper size, which is usually the Letter Size (8.5” wide x 11” long), or A4 Size. Let us check up the paper size that is in use for the current document. Page 22
  • 23.
    ® Click thepaper size tab boxes in the page setup dialog box. This tab is located on the right side on the Margins tab (See in the figure) · Word displays information about paper size in the page setup dialog box as shown in the figure. · Click the drop down arrow on the right side of the paper size box and word displays a list of standard paper sizes. · If you are using a paper size that is there in the list, you can select it from the list. · Word allows you to change the orientation of the page. · The default orientation is portrait. · If you change the orientation to Landscape, word swaps the width and height of the page. · That is in the landscape orientation, the letter size page becomes 11” wide and 8.5” high. · It increases the width of the page but reduces the height. What is a Computer? Computer is an electronic device, which can automatically accept and store input data, process them and produce output results according to the instructions given by the programmer or user. Explain the characteristics and Limitations of a computer. Characteristics: ® Speed: Page 23
  • 24.
    It is avery fast device. It performs the task in few milliseconds, for which a normal human being may take years to complete. Speed of computer is measured in terms of milliseconds (10-3), microseconds (10-6), nanoseconds(10-9), or picoseconds (10-12). ® Accuracy: Accuracy of computer is very high. In most cases errors are due to human factors rather than technological factors. For example, errors caused due to improper thinking of programmer, or incorrect input data, often called as GIGO(Garbage In Garbage Out) ® Diligence (carefulness): Computer is free from monotony, tiredness and lack of concentration. It never gets bored. If 10 million calculations have to be performed, a computer will perform the 10 millionth calculation with same accuracy as 1st one. ® Versatility (flexibility) / (usefulness): Computers are capable to perform almost any task, if the task can be reduced to a series of logical steps. The same computer can be used for multiple tasks. For example, you can prepare your bio-data in word, simultaneously you may be printing a report or surfing the Internet etc. ® Power or remembering: (Storage capacity): Computers can store and retrieve any amount of information because of its secondary storage. The information is retained accurately as long as desired by the user. Limitations: ® No I.Q.: It has no intelligence. It has to be told what to do and in which sequence. Computers can not take decision on its own. ® No feelings: Computers have no natural feelings since they are machines. Their feelings are based on the instructions given to them in the form of programs written by us. What is an Operating System? An Operating System is an integrated set of programs (collection of programs) that controls the resources (such as, CPU, memory, I/O devices, etc) of a computer system. It acts as an intermediary between the hardware and its users. OR An Operating System is a set of programs that controls and coordinates the use of computer hardware among various application programs. It provides an environment within which user can execute programs. A computer can be divided into four components : the hardware, the operating system, the applications programs, the users. It is the operating system that manages all the above components. The various functions of the operating system are : ® Controlling Input/Output devices (Keyboard, Mouse, Monitor, Printer, Plotter etc..) ® Memory and File storage management ® CPU Scheduling and controlling processes Page 24
  • 25.
    ® Loading, initiating,executing and supervising user applications programs ® Handling errors and restarting ® Providing command interface between user and computer system Examples of Operating system are : UNIX (Solaris, IRIX, HPUnix, Linux, DEC Unix) Microsoft Disk Operating System (MS-DOS), WIN95/98, WIN NT, OS/2 etc. (http://www.imtech.res.in/raghava/slides/prephd/doslec.htm) Types of Operating Systems Within the broad family of operating systems, there are generally four types, categorized based on the types of computers they control and the sort of applications they support. The categories are: · Real-time operating system (RTOS) - Real-time operating systems are used to control machinery, scientific instruments and industrial systems. An RTOS typically has very little user-interface capability, and no end-user utilities, since the system will be a "sealed box" when delivered for use. A very important part of an RTOS is managing the resources of the computer so that a particular operation executes in precisely the same amount of time, every time it occurs. In a complex machine, having a part move more quickly just because system resources are available may be just as catastrophic as having it not move at all because the system is busy. · Single-user, single task - As the name implies, this operating system is designed to manage the computer so that one user can effectively do one thing at a time. The Palm OS for Palm handheld computers is a good example of a modern single-user, single-task operating system. · Single-user, multi-tasking - This is the type of operating system most people use on their desktop and laptop computers today. Microsoft's Windows and Apple's MacOS platforms are both examples of operating systems that will let a single user have several programs in operation at the same time. For example, it's entirely possible for a Windows user to be writing a note in a word processor while downloading a file from the Internet while printing the text of an e-mail message. · Multi-user - A multi-user operating system allows many different users to take advantage of the computer's resources simultaneously. The operating system must make sure that the requirements of the various users are balanced, and that each of the programs they are using has sufficient and separate resources so that a problem with one user doesn't affect the entire community of users. Unix, VMS and mainframe operating systems, such as MVS, are examples of multi-user operating systems. Main Functions of an Operating System? The main functions of an Operating System is as follows: (1)Process Management: Page 25
  • 26.
    The process managementmodule of an operating system takes care of the creation and deletion of processes, scheduling of various system resources to the different processes requesting them and providing mechanisms for synchronization and communication among processes. (2) Memory management: The memory management module of an OS takes care of the allocation and deallocation of memory space to the various programs in need of this resources. (3) File management: The file management module of an OS takes care of file-related activities such as organization, storing, retrieval, naming, sharing and protection of files. (4) Security: The security module of an OS protects the resources and information of a computer system against destruction and unauthorized access. (5) Command interpretation: The command interpretation module of an OS takes care of interpreting user commands, and directing the system resources to handle the requests. With this mode of interaction with the system, the user is usually not too concerned with the hardware details of the system. Main Features of an Operating System? Different operating systems have differing features, though they all have the primary function of controlling the software and programs running on a computer or other device. http://www.teach-ict. com/as_as_computing/ocr/H447/F453/3_3_1/features_of_os/miniweb/pg11.htm You now have read about the various kinds of operating systems that are part of computers ranging from a humble mobile phone to a mighty supercomputer taking up an entire building. But they share some common features, some of which are more important than others depending on the type of operating system Scheduling The task of handling how active processes are making efficient use of the CPU processing cycles is called scheduling. There are many ways of doing this, which is covered in another mini-website. Memory Management The operating system has to make sure that applications are able to run in the amount of memory available and that they do not interfere with one another. There is a separate mini-website on this topic. Page 26
  • 27.
    Allocation of resources The operating system will provide a working area for each user. This includes Disk space quota for their files ( especially on shared network drives) A personal GUI set up for each user (multi-user operating systems) Perhaps how many processing cycles they are allowed to use (especially on mainframe) How much printer output they are allowed (networked and mainframe) How high a priority they can assign to a job (mainframe) Keeping track of usage The cost of using large computers is shared amongst the users. So the operating system will have an accounting / tracking system in place that : Counts the processing cycles used per user Print out jobs completed Batch jobs completed Time spent logged in Other resources used And so on. A regular bill is then sent to the user account providing an itemized (detailed) charge. Data and User security Each user has to be authenticated with an username and password (network and multi-user operating system). Their data and files will be kept private from other users, unless they choose to make some shareable with others. The operating system will only allow administrators ('super users') to change parts of the operating system and install applications. Providing system services such as print spooling Printing out is a time consuming process, so it makes sense to allow users to hand-off a print job to the operating system so they can get on with other things. This is called 'print spooling' and is common on multi-user and networked operating systems. Managing input / output Data and applications are stored on secondary storage devices such as hard disks, optical drives, magnetic tape when not in use. The operating system has a file management system that allows the user to organize their files, to move, delete and copy files as they wish. Specialized input devices such as graphics tablets and scanners are also handled by the operating system. Page 27
  • 28.
    Handling Network communication Data packets traveling to and from the connected computers on the network are handled by the operating system. When an user drags a file from their hard disk to a shared networked drive, they do not care how it happens - the operating system takes care of all the details EXPLAIN BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A COMPUTER: INPUT UNIT: PROCESS A.L.U. C.U. Registers Main Memory Data and instructions must be entered into the computer system before any computation can be performed on the supplied data. The input unit performs this task. It links the external environment with computer system. Functions performed by an input unit are as follows: ® Accepts or reads the list of instructions and data from the outside world. ® Converts these instructions and data in the computer acceptable form (binary codes). This transformation is done by units called input interfaces. ® Supplies the converted instructions and data to the computer system for further processing. ® Input unit consists of one or more input devices like keyboard, mouse, scanner etc. OUTPUT UNIT: Page 28 INPUT OUTPUT C.P.U. Secondary Memory
  • 29.
    The job ofoutput unit is reverse of input unit. It links the computer system with external environment. Tasks performed by output units are as follows: ® Accepts results produced by the computer, which are in the coded form and hence cannot be easily understood by us. ® It converts coded results to human acceptable (readable) form. ® It supplies the converted results to outside world. ® Output unit consists of one or more output devices like printer, monitor, speaker etc. C.P.U.: (Central Processing Unit): The C.P.U. is the heart of the computer. It comprises of : C.U. (control unit): Control unit is mainly responsible for controlling all the unit of operations in the computers. It obtains instructions from the program stored in main memory; interpret the instructions; and issues signals that cause other units of the system to execute them. A.L.U. (Arithmetic Logical Unit): ALU is the place where the actual execution of the instruction takes place. All the calculations and comparisons are performed in ALU. Almost all ALUs are designed to perform the four basic operations – add, subtract, multiply, divide and logic operations or comparison such as less than (<) or greater than (>). REGISTERS: Registers are small high speed memory used to store temporary results and certain control information. Each register has a certain size and function. Registers can be read and written at high speed since they are internal to C.P.U. STORAGE UNIT: This unit holds all the data to be processed and instructions required for processing, intermediate results of processing, and final results of processing before these results are released to an output unit. Two major types of storages are: (1) Primary Storage / Main Memory / Temporary Storage: It holds the part of instructions and data of currently running program, intermediate results of processing and final result of processing unit until it is transferred to some appropriate space. The CPU can access the content of RAM directly. It has limited storage capacity. It is expensive. It is volatile i.e. it losses content if power supply is cut off. It is faster than secondary storage, e.g. RAM, ROM, Cache etc. (2) Secondary Storage / Auxiliary Storage / Permanent Storage: It is used to store large amount of instructions and data. C.P.U. is not capable of directly accessing data and programs residing on the secondary storage. So, if data need to be processed or instruction needs to be executed, it must be transferred to primary storage. It is cheaper than primary storage. It is non volatile i.e. it retains content even though power supply is cut off. It is slower than primary storage. e.g. Hard Disk, CD, DVD, Floppy Disk etc. Software: The set of computer programs, procedures and associated documents (flowcharts, user manuals etc,), which describes the programs and how they are to be used, whose objective is to enhance the capabilities of H/W. Page 29
  • 30.
    Software System SoftwareApplication Software System Management Programs System Support Programs System Development Programs General Purpose Application Software Special Purpose Application Software A Software can be divided into two major categories System Software System Software is a set of one or more programs, designed to control the operation and extend the processing capability of a computer system. System software makes the operation of computer more effective and efficient. Actually, system software is any computer software which manages and controls computer hardware so that application software can perform a task. In general system software performs following functions: ® System software performs tasks like transferring data from memory to disk, or rendering (Representing) text onto a display device. ® Specific kinds of system software include loading programs, operating systems, device drivers, programming tools, compilers, assemblers, linkers, and utility software. ® It supports development and execution of other application software. ® It monitors the effective use of various hardware resources, such as CPU, Memory, peripherals etc,. ® It communicates with and controls the operation of peripherals devices, such as printer, disk, tape, etc. ® E.g:. Operating systems, such as Microsoft Windows, Mac OS X or Linux, are well-known examples of system software. System software mainly includes 3 different types of programs: (1) System Management Programs: They manage Hardware and Software of computer system. e.g. Operating Systems (2) System Support Programs: They provide support services to users. e.g. Utility Programs. Page 30
  • 31.
    (3)System development Programs: It helps developers in designing and building system. e.g. Language translator (compiler, interpreter etc.) Application Software Application Software is a set of one or more programs, design to solve specific problem, or to do a specific task. This application software can be classified into two categories: (1) General Purpose Application Software: General purpose application software provides certain generalized facilities. They are generally pre-written. e.g. Word Processing (MS-Word), Spreadsheet Application (MS Excel), Database Application packages etc. (2) Special Purpose Application Software: Application programs specific to certain area / users for their specific requirement are called Special purpose application software. They are custom build. e.g. Inventory management, Payroll System etc. Difference between System Software and Application Software System Software Application Software 1 It is a set of one or more programs, designed to control and co-ordinate the operations of a computer system. 1 It is a set of one or more programs, designed to solve specific problem or to do a specific task. 2 It is machine oriented 2 It is user oriented. 3 It can execute without help of other software 3 It generally takes the help of system software to execute. 4 e.g. operating system, utility software etc. 4 e.g. Student Management system, Payroll System etc.  Levels of programming languages: OR  What are High level and Low level language? Ans: Programs are classified under three main categories. They are 1. Machine level 2. Assembly level 3. High Level 1. Machine level language (MLL): It is 1st Generation language. It is a language of 1’s and 0’s. This 1’s and 0’s are referred as binary code or machine code. Computer can understand this binary code directly or easily. Advantages: Page 31
  • 32.
    ® Faster execution ® Computer understands easily Disadvantages: ® It is machine dependant and not portable ® Size is larger ® Difficult to code ® Debugging (Error solving) is very difficult 2. Assembly level language (ALL): It is an intermediate language. It is written using mnemonics and 1’s and 0’s. This is the 2 nd generation language. It is also known as low level language. Since computer cannot understand it directly it needs to be translated into machine level language. It requires a program called assembler for converting assembly code to machine code. Advantages: ® It is convenient than machine language. ® User friendly as user can code it easily compared to MLL. ® Size of the program is reduced as compared machine level language. Disadvantages: ® It is machine dependant and so not portable ® Takes more execution time than machine level language. ® Computer cannot understand directly it requires translator. 3. High Level Languages (HLL): Programs are written in English. The Programs cannot be executed directly. It needs to be converted to machine level language for execution. It requires a translator called Compiler or Interpreter for converting HLL to MLL. Programs are written in BASIC, COBOL, FORTRAN, PASCAL, C etc. These programs are also called Procedure Oriented Languages. These languages are also called 3rd Generation languages. Programmer needs to specify complete instructions in order to perform a task. Advantages: ® Portable i.e. Machine Independent ® User can understand easily ® User can write programs easily Disadvantages: ® Execution time is more ® Computer cannot understand directly. 4. Fourth Generation Language: These are Non Procedure Oriented Languages. It requires outline not detailed instructions to perform a task as compared to HLL. It is commonly referred to as 4GL. They are used to work with files and databases. They are also called as query languages. Page 32
  • 33.
    Que: Difference betweenprimary memory and Secondary memory. Ans: Primary Memory Secondary Memory 1 It stores programs and data which are currently needed by the CPU. 1 The information which is not currently being processed resides in secondary memory. 2 Semiconductor memory is used as primary memory 2 Magnetic or Optical memory is used as Secondary memory 3 It is faster compared to secondary memory 3 It is slower compared to Primary memory 4 It has higher cost per bit of storage 4 It has lower cost per bit of storage. 5 It has low storage capacity 5 It has much large storage capacity than primary memory. 6 The CPU communicates directly with main memory, 6 The CPU does not communicates directly with secondary memory. 7 It is usually contained on the mother board. 7 The secondary memory is the external memory. 8 E.G. RAM, ROM, etc,. 8 E.G. Hard Disk, CDs, etc,. Page 33
  • 34.
    MS-Office is aproduct of Microsoft Company. Ms office is a collection of Application Software. Mainly three Software are there: (1) Microsoft Word (2) Microsoft Excel (3) Microsoft Power Point MS-WORD Microsoft Word is a Word Processor Software. (શબદ પર પિકયા કરનાર સોફટવેર). It is a Window bases Application software. Into which user can do different types of work, for example, document typing, letter typing, bio-data and application making etc. Steps for Start: START  All Programs  Microsoft Office  Microsoft Word Screen Introduction of Word: http://www.functionx.com/word/Lesson01.htm Page 34
  • 35.
    On the mostleft side of the title bar, there is an icon that represents the application. That application icon also represents menu used to perform many operations related to Microsoft Word as an application. To use the system menu on the application icon, click the small icon A menu appears. From the system menu, click Restore To maximize the application again, click the icon again, and click Maximize from the menu. On the right side of the icon, there are two groups of words. When Microsoft Word starts, it creates an empty document called Document1. It is called default name of Microsoft Word. You can then type your text. If at one time you find that you need another document, you can initiate a second one. In that case, you would have Document2. Eventually you can add more documents. We will come back to that feature. DocumentX represents the name of the file you are working on. If you save your document under an appropriate name, the new name would display in that area and Document1 or DocumentX would disappear. On the right side of Document is the name of the application. Microsoft Word would like you to know that it is the running application. On the right side of the application’s name, there is a long empty bar; this is the main area of the title. As empty as it looks, this area can be used to perform many actions because it has a menu of its own. To experiment with the title bar, double-click it. The window is restored The File extension for the Microsoft Word file is .doc (in MS word 2003) and .docx (in MS word 2007).  F ile Menu: (alt + F) ® N ew (ctrl + N): With the help of this option you can create a new file in your word document. STEPS: (1) Click on File Menu (2) Click on New option (3) Select blank document (4) Click on OK button. ® O pen (ctrl + O): With the help of this option you can open a previously created file in your word document. STEPS: (1) Click on File Menu (2) Click on Open option (3) In Look in: box, select a folder where your file is located. (4) In File name: box, give a file name to open. (5) Click on Open button. Page 35
  • 36.
    ® Save (ctrl+ S): With the help of this option you can save a file. STEPS: (1) Click on file menu. (2) Click on Save option. (3) In Save in: box, select a folder, where you want to save your word file. (4) In File name: box, give a proper file name to save your file. (5) Click on Save button. ® Save As: With the help of this option you can save a file with different / another name. it means you can create a copy of a file. STEPS: (1) Click on file menu. (2) Select Save As option (3) In Save in:, box, select a folder, where you want to save your word file. (4) In File name: box, give a proper file name to save your file. (5) Click on save button. ® Close: with the help of this option you can close a word file. STEPS: (1) Click on File menu. (2) Select close option. ® P rint (ctrl + P): With the help of this option you can take a print of your file. STEPS: (1) Click on file menu. (2) Select print option. ® Print Preview: With the help of this option you can view a file before taking a print. STEPS: (1) Click on file menu. (2) Select print preview option. ® Page Setup: With the help of this option you can set your page. It means you can set a page margin as well as gutter (a Space for biding). You also set orientation (Portrait, Landscape). STEPS: (1) Click on file menu. (2) Click on page setup option. (3) Set Left margin, Right margin, Top margin , Bottom margin and Gutter for the page. (4) If you want to set orientation, then click on PAGE SIZE button / tab. (5) Select one of the two orientations. (6) Click on OK button. ® Exit: With the help of this option you can close a word or exit from the word. STEPS: (1) Click on file menu. (2) Select Exit option. Steps for save a file with Password: (1) Click on File Menu. Page 36
  • 37.
    (2) Click onSave As option. (3) Click on Tools. (4) Click on General Option / Security Option. (5) In Password to open: box, give a password (6) Click on OK (7) In Reenter Password to open: box, reenter the previously given password. (8) Click on OK button (9) In File name:, box, give a proper file name (10) Click on save button.  E dit Menu (alt + E): ® Undo (ctrl + Z): With the help of this option you can cancel your last command effect. It means it allow us to reverse the last action we have performed. Undo is one Step backward from the Current Step. STEPS: (1) Click on Edit menu. (2) Select Undo Option. ® Redo (ctrl + Y): With the help of this option you can cancel your undo effect. It means it allow us to redo an action that we undid by mistake. Redo is one Step forward from the Current Step. STEPS: (1) Click on Edit menu. (2) Select Redo option. ® Copy (ctrl + C) & Paste (Ctrl + V): With the help of this option you can copy a text and picture. STEPS: (1) Select a Text or Picture you want to copy (2) Click on Edit menu. (3) Select a copy option. (4) Set your cursor position (5) Click on edit menu again (6) Select paste option. ® Cut (ctrl + X) & Paste (Ctrl + V): With the help of this option you can move a text and picture from one location to another location. (One place to another place) STEPS: (1) Select a Text or Picture you want to cut / move (2) Click on Edit menu. (3) Select a cut option. (4) Set your cursor position. (5) Click on edit menu again. (6) Select paste option. ® Clear (del): With the help of this option you can delete a selected text and picture. STEPS: Page 37
  • 38.
    (1) Select aText or Picture you want to delete (2) Click on Edit menu. (3) Select clear option. ® Select All (Ctrl + A): With the help of this option you can select a whole document. STEPS: (1) Click on Edit menu. (2) Click on Select all option. ® Find (Ctrl + F): With the help of this option you can find a text in your word file / document. STEPS: (1) Click on Edit menu. (2) Click on find option. (3) In Find what: box, type a word or a text, which you want to find. (4) Click on “Find Next” button. ® Replace (Ctrl + H): With the help of this option you can replace a text(word) by another text (word). STEPS: (1) Click on Edit menu. (2) Click on replace option. (3) In Find what: box, type a word or a text which you want to replace. (4) In replace with: box, Type a word or a text by which you want to replace a previous word or a text. (5) Click on Replace button. ® Go to (Ctrl + G): With the help of this option you can jump to the particular line number or particular page in your word document. STEPS: (1) Click on Edit menu. (2) Click on Go to option. (3) In Go to What: box, give a line number or page number on to which you want to jump. (4) In Enter number: box, give a number to jump. (If you want to jump 4 line forward from the current line then write +4, or if you want to jump 4 line back ward from the current line then write -4 in the box.). (5) Click on Go to button.  V iew Menu (alt + V): ® In Ms Word, there are mainly 4 types of viws: (1) Normal (2) Print Layout (3) Web Layout (4) Outline (1) Normal: With the help of this option you can view your document or a file in normal view. In this type of view margin, header, footer and page border does not displayed. STEP: (1) Click on View menu. (2) Select normal option. (2) Print Layout: With the help of this option you can view your document or a file in Print Layout view. In this type of view margin, header, footer and page border has been displayed. Page 38
  • 39.
    STEPS: (1) Clickon View menu. (2) Select print layout option. (3) Web Layout: With the help of this option you can view your document or a file in HTML or web layout view. STEPS: (1) Click on View menu. (2) Select Web layout option. (4) Outline: With the help of this option you can view your document or a file in outline view. STEPS: (1) Click on View menu. (2) Select outline option. ® Tool Bar: with the help of this option of view menu you can ON or OFF a toolbar. STEPS: (1) Click on View Menu (2) Select toolbar option (3) Select toolbar which you want to ON or OFF. ® Ruler: With the help of this option you can ON or OFF a ruler. STEPS: (1) Click on view menu (2) Select Ruler option for ON or OFF. ® Header and Footer: With the help of this option you can insert a header and a footer into your document. STEPS: (1) Click on View menu (2) Select Header and Footer option (3) In Header box, Give a header (4) In footer box, give a footer (5) Click on close ® Full Screen: With the help of this option you can view a document file in a full screen mode. In full screen mode Menu bar, Tool bar and a task bar does not displayed. STEPS: (1) Click on view menu (2) Select full screen option (3) For close a full screen click on close full screen button. ® Zoom: With the help of this option you can view your document in bigger size than the normal size. STEPS: (1) Click on view menu (2) Select zoom option (3) In Zoom to box, give a percentage to view (4) Click on OK button.  I nsert Menu (alt + I): Page 39
  • 40.
    ® Page Break(ctrl + Enter): With the help of this option you can insert a page break into your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert Menu (2) Select Break Option (3) Select Page Break from it (4) Click on OK Button. ® Page No: With the help of this option you can insert a page no into your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert Menu (2) Select Page No option (3) Select your cursor position (4) Select Alignment (5) Click on OK button. ® Date & Time: With the help of this option you can insert date and time into your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Inset menu (2) Select Date & Time Option (3) Select any one format of Date & Time. (4) Click on OK Button. ® Picture  Clip Art: With the help of this option you can insert a Clip Art in your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert Menu (2) Select picture option (3) Click on clipart option from it (4) Select any one category of a picture (5) Click on Insert Clip button (6) Close Clipart dialog box. ® Picture  Word Art: With the help of this option you can insert a Word Art in your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert Menu (2) Select Picture option (3) Select WordArt option (4) Select any one WordArt Style (5) Click on OK button (6) Write any text. (7) Click on OK button. ® Picture  Auto Shape : With the help of this option you can insert a Auto Shape in your Document. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert Menu (2) Select Picture Option (3) Select Auto Shape option Page 40
  • 41.
    (4) Select anyone category of Auto Shape (5) Select any shape from it (6) Drag and drop a mouse. ® Text Box: With the help of this option you can insert a Text Box in your Document. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert Menu (2) Select Text Box Option (3) Drag and Drop the mouse to set that Text Box in your document. (4) After Writing the text into the textbox, click outside of the Text Box. ® Symbol : With the help of this option you can insert a special Symbols into your document which are not available onto your keyboard. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert Menu (2) Select Symbol option (3) Select any one symbol from it (4) Click on Insert Button (5) Click on close button. ® Auto Text: With the help of this option you can insert an auto text into your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert menu (2) Select Auto text option (3) Select Auto text option in another text box also. (4) Enter a text which you want to add into your document. (5) Click on Insert button. STEPS FOR INSERTING A TEXT IN AN AUTO TEXT GROUP: (1) Click on Insert Menu (2) Select Auto text option (3) Select Auto text option in another text box also. (4) Enter Auto Text Entry Here  Add a text which you want to add in auto text group (5) Click on ADD button (6) Click on OK button  Format Menu (alt + O): ® Font : With the help of this option you can format a font, for example, you can change font type, font colour, font style, underline style and colour and also can apply effect to the text. STEPS: (1) Select a text which you want to format (2) Click on Format Menu (3) Click on Font option (4) Select Font, Font size , font style etc. (5) If you want to put underline then select underline style and colour and also choose effect for the text (6) Click on OK button STEPS FOR SUPERSCRIPT (A2 + B2) AND SUBSCRIPT (H2O): Page 41
  • 42.
    (1) Write A2+ B2 first (2) Select 2 from it. (3) Click on Font option (4) Select Super script or Subscript effect as you want (5) Click on OK button ® Bullets and Numbering: With the help of this option you can insert bullets and numbering into your document STEPS: (1) Click on Format menu (2) Select bullets and numbering option from it (3) Select bullets Or Number option from it. (4) Select any one style of a bullets (5) Click on OK button. ® Border and Shading: With the help of this option you can insert border and shading on selected text as well as also apply shading and border to the document page also. STEPS: (1) Select a text on which you want to apply shading or border’ (2) Click on format menu (3) Click on border and shading option (4) Select any one style of a border (5) Select any one border colour (6) Click on OK button. ® Paragraph: With the help of this option you can set an format a paragraph into your document. For example you can set alignment, and space between two lines as well as character etc. STEPS: (1) Select a paragraph which you want to format (2) Click on format menu (3) Click on paragraph option from it (4) In Alignment box, Set your paragraph alignment. Indent your paragraph left or right according to your requirement. Also set spacing between two lines. (5) Close Paragraph dialog box. ® Columns: With the help of this option you can divide a document into more than one part or a column. STEPS: (1) Click on Format Menu (2) Select column option (3) Select any column style from it. (4) Click on OK button. ® Drop Cap: With the help of this option you can apply a Drop Cap effect on a character. STEPS: (1) Select a Character on which you want to apply a Drop Cap Effect. (2) Click on Format Menu (3) Select Drop Cap option Page 42
  • 43.
    (4) Select anyone effect from it (5) Click on OK Button. Drop Cap: A drop cap is a single letter made large than the others in a paragraph. It is the first letter in a section and, as a drop cap, is in a separate text box. It is used to draw the eye to the beginning of the section. Drop caps are often seen at the beginning of novels. ® Change Case: With the help of this option you can change a case of a text. STEPS: (1) Select a text (2) Click on Format Menu (3) Select Change Case option from it (4) Select any one case from it (5) Click on OK button NOTE: Refer Big Question of Change Case and steps ® Back Ground: With the help of this option you can apply or insert a background into your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Format Menu. (2) Select Background Option from it. (3) Click on Fill Effect (4) Click on Present (5) Click on Present Colour (6) Select any one colour from the present colour (7) Select any one shading style (8) Click on OK button.  Table Menu (alt + A): Table: Combination of Rows and Columns is known as table. Rows: In Table, Horizontal Lines are called as Rows. Columns: In table, Vertical lines are called as Columns. Cell: Intersection of Rows and Columns are known as cell. ® Table  Insert  Table: With the help of this option you can insert a table into your document. STEPS: (1) Click on table Menu (2) Click on Insert option (3) Select table sub-option from it (4) In Number of Column box, give a number of columns as you want. (5) In number of rows box, give a number of rows as you want. (6) Click on OK button. ® Table  Insert  Cell: with the help of this option you can insert a cell into table. Page 43
  • 44.
    STEPS: (1) Seta position of a cursor in a table (2) Click on table Menu (3) Select Insert option (4) Click on Cell sub-option from it (5) Click on OK button. ® Table  Insert  Column: With the help of this option you can insert a column into your table. STEPS: (1) Set a position of a cursor in a table (2) Click on Table menu (3) Click on Insert option (4) Choose columns to the left or right according to requirement (5) Click on OK button ® Table  Insert  Row: With the help of this option you can insert a rows into your table. STEPS: (1) Set a cursor position in the table (2) Click on table menu (3) Select insert option (4) Choose rows above or below according to requirement (5) Click on OK button ® Table  Delete  cell: With the help of this option you can delete a particular selected cell from your table. STEPS: (1) Selecta cell which you want to delete. (2) Click on Table menu (3) Select delete option (4) Select cell sub-option from it (5) Select an option (up, down, entire row) as according to requirement (6) Click on OK button ® Table  Delete  column: With the help of this option you can delete a particular selected column from your table. STEPS: (1) Select a column which you want to delete (2) Click on Table Menu (3) Click on Column option ® Table  Delete  Row: With the help of this option you can delete a particular selected row from your table. STEPS: (1) Select a row which you want to delete (2) Click on Table Menu (3) Select a delete option (4) Select a row sub-option from it. ® Table  Delete  table: With the help of this option you can delete an entire table. Page 44
  • 45.
    STEPS: (1) Setyour cursor position anywhere in the table (2) Click on Table Menu (3) Select Delete option (4) Click on Table sub-option from it. ® Table  Merge cell: With the help of this option you can merge two or more than two cells. STEPS: (1) Select a cells or a rows or a columns which you want to merge (2) Click on Table menu (3) Select Merge option from it ® Table  Split cell: With the help of this option you can split or divide a cell into two or more than two parts. STEPS: (1) Select a cell which you want to split (2) Click on Table Menu (3) Select Split cell option (4) In Number of column box, give a number into which you want to split a cell (5) In Number of rows box, give a number into which you want to split a cell (6) Click on OK button. ® Table  Split table: With the help of this option you can split an entire Table. STEPS: (1) Set a cursor position from which you want to split your table (2) Click on Table Menu (3) Click on Split table Option ® Table  Auto Format: With the help of this option you can Apply a predefined formatting style on to your table. STEPS: (1) Set your cursor position into table (2) Click on Table Menu (3) Select Auto format option (4) Select any one format from it (5) Click on OK button ® Table  Auto fit Auto fit to the contents: With the help of this option you can set a table according to content size STEPS: (1) Set your cursor position into table (2) Click on table menu (3) Select Auto fit Option (4) Select Auto Fit to the content option from it ® Table  Sort: With the help of this option you can sort a table Ascending or descending order. STEPS: (1) Set your cursor position into the table Page 45
  • 46.
    (2) Click onTable Menu (3) Select Sort option (4) Select options according to your requirement (5) Click on OK button ® Table  Formula: With the help of this option you can apply a predefined formula into table. STEPS: (1) Select a cell into which you want to apply a formula (2) Click on Table menu (3) Select a Formula option (4) In Formula box, give a formula as you want for example sum(right), sum(left), sum(above) etc (5) Click on OK button ® Table  Select  cell: With the help of this option you can select a cell. ® Table  Select  row: With the help of this option you can select a row. ® Table  Select  column: With the help of this option you can select a column. ® Table  Select  table: With the help of this option you can select a table.  T ools Menu (alt + T): ® Spelling and Grammar check (F7) : With the help of this option you can check a spelling and grammar of typed paragraph of your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Tools menu (2) Click on Spelling and grammar option (3) According to your need click on a suggestion CHANGE, IGNORE, ADD button. (4) Click on OK button (5) For adding a spelling click on ADD button. ® Word Count: with the help of this option you can count (know) total characters (with space and without space), total line numbers, total paragraphs, total page numbers and total word into your document. STEPS: (1) Click on Tools Menu (2) Select Word Count option ® Auto Correct: With the help of this option you can replace a text or a wrong word from the other text or a word. ® Mail Merge: Refer Big Question of Mail Merge and steps BIG Questions: http://www.tutorialspoint.com/word_2010/index.htm http://www.easykey.net/word/word-97-2003-changing-capital-letters-to-sentence-case Page 46
  • 47.
    This chapter willteach you how to change cases of your text in Microsoft word 2010. You can also capitalize a character you are typing by pressing and holding SHIFT while you type. You can also press CAPS LOCK to have every letter that you type be capitalized, and then press CAPS LOCK again to turn off capitalization. Change Text to Sentence Case: A sentence case is the case where first character of every sentence is capitalized. This is very simple to change selected text into sentence case by following two simple steps: Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text selection method to select the text. Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select Sentence Case option to capitalize the first character of every selected sentence. Change Text to Lowercase: A lowercase: is the case where every word of a sentence is in lowercase. This is very simple to change selected text into lowercase by following two simple steps: Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text selection method to select the text. Page 47
  • 48.
    Step (2): Clickthe Change Case button and then select Lowercase option to display all selected words in lowercase. Change Text to Uppercase: An uppercase is the case where every word of a sentence is in uppercase. This is very simple to change selected text into uppercase by following two simple steps: Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text selection method to select the text. Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select UPPERCASE option to display all selected words in all caps. All characters of every selected word will be capitalized. Page 48
  • 49.
    Change Text toCapitalize: A capitalize case is the case where every first character of every selected word is in capital. This is very simple to change selected text into capitalize by following two simple steps: Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text selection method to select the text. Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select Capitalize Each Word option to put a leading cap on each selected word. Page 49
  • 50.
    Toggle the Text: Toggle operation will change the case of every character in reverse way. A capital character will become lower case and lower case characteter will become upper case. This is very simple to toggle case of the text by following two simple steps: Step (1): Select the text that you want to change to a bold font. You can use any of the text selection method to select the text. Step (2): Click the Change Case button and then select tOGGLE cASE option to change all lowercase words into uppercase and uppercase words into lowercase. Page 50
  • 51.
    D b pasteand paste special. Answer: In word programs, there is normal pasting which is normally done with images, text, etc, then there is special pasting which allows you to copy a section of text from word for example and past it into another word program as a picture eg. It just allows you to copy one type of information and paste it as another. The paste special command has a number of useful tools built into it. Besides allowing you to paste values, it also allows you to transpose lists (columns to rows or rows to columns), multiply, add, skip blanks and paste links. The paste special command has a number of useful tools built into it. Besides allowing you to paste values, it also allows you to transpose lists (columns to rows or rows to columns), multiply, add, skip blanks and paste links. ------------- = Db copy paste and cut paste. Answer: When you copy and paste, you leave the original copy where it is and make a second copy where you desire. When you cut and paste, you take the original copy and move it elsewhere. Page 51
  • 52.
    Copy and pastecopies what you have selected, so you can paste it elsewhere, but the original remains. Cut and paste does the same thing, but it deletes the original. == Cut will remove the original text, while copy leaves the original in place. Paste is the same; it makes a copy of the text in the location you choose. Cut and Paste is the same as move. == Cut is when you remove the words from where you are typing to then place them somewhere else. copy just leaves the words there and lets you place them in different spots -------- Macro: Macro is a set of task combined together, so that you can run or reply the entire tasks together with a single command. Macros are the powerful productivity tool. With the help of macros, you can perform long or boring tasks, just by a single click, For example: All of us performs many repetitive actions day after day on our computers. Once you are aware that those are repetitive actions, you can easily create a macro for it and next time perform it with a click of a button. Examples: login and check your multiple mail accounts, format data, insert data and copyright notices onto your documents, generate reports etc. -------------- http://www.psexam.com/Notes-for-Computer-Science/word-2007-mail-merge-with-an-example. html Mail Merge is a process of combining source document with data source to create merged document such as letters, emails, quotations, invoices, contracts, surveys, reports and audits. Mail merge is a very useful tool that helps you create multiple copies of a document like letters, invitations, circulations etc. each with small difference in them. In spite of its immense utility, very few people are really using it. Most people do tedious task of copy and paste and perform required modification not because Mail Merge is inefficient but because they tend to take it as complex process. Poor them! I wonder why, even training institutes exclude mail merge from their course when teaching Office Package (MS Word, MS Excel, MS Access, and MS PowerPoint). How could anybody afford to skip such practically useful topic? Truly speaking, Mail Merge as much easier as it is useful. The next thing surprises me is a whole lot of mail merge software and applications flourished over the net. There is not lack of mail merge template, nor fax mail merge programs. Some are free downloadable and some are paid. They might be useful for advanced and complex type of merging Page 52
  • 53.
    and mass mailingbut consider if you really need them? Is Mail Merge tool provided in MS Word not sufficient for what you intend - forced you to look for other applications? When to use Mail Merge? There might be numerous situations when mail merge is suitable solution to accomplish your tasks quickly and efficiently. Some examples are: * You needed to print envelopes to mail letters. Recipients name, street address, city, state, country, zip code, contact etc might have stored on Excel spreadsheet, or Access database, or even in Word document itself. * You needed to send same message but personalized emails to many people. * You needed to fax a memo to all of your branches and officials. * Print Students' Report Cards or Marks Cards of an examination. * Send notice to different concerned people * And many many Components of Mail Merge The process involves three major components: Main Document This is the format and structure of document with text and graphics where we insert the placeholders for data to fall in. The merged document will be created exactly like main document with different content coming form data source document. Main documents can be Letters, E-Mail Message, Envelopes, Labels, Directory or any custom document structure. Data Source This is the storehouse of data. Most often this file is already created for different other purposes. Your company database or spreadsheet or even a list created can be used as data source if it contains the data items you require to fill up in your main document. When there is no file, required for mail merge, don't worry! The option to create a new data source always exists. The most useful data source could be your Outlook Contacts if you need to merge and send to email addresses. Merge Process Page 53
  • 54.
    This is aprocess that picks data items from Data Source and fills the place holders in Main Document to create a new merged document or send in mail or even send in fax. You can send merge to the printer directly, send to fax or to outlook. An example and procedure After talking all this, it would be easier to understand through an example. I'm going to show you how you can create envelopes using mail merge in Word 2007. Step 1. Create Main Document Step 2. Create or identify data source Step 3. Merge Take a new document, then: 1. Click the Mailings ribbon 2. From 'Start Mail Merge' button choose 'Envelopes'. Choose the required 'Envelope size' and specify the preferred font for 'Delivery address' and 'Return address'. For my purpose I selected Size 10 Envelop size and default fonts 3. Click OK to accept and close the dialog box. 4. Now, type your return address. This won't be changing for each recipient so you can simply type on envelop. 5. Since we don't have recipients yet, let us choose the data source. Click on Select Recipients button. 6. If you have the data source already created you can choose 'Use Existing List…'. For current purpose, I'm creating a new list. So choose 'Type a New List' menu. MS Word will open 'New Address List' dialog box. This will be suitable for most cases. If not, you can customize columns. Look at the button at the bottom. 7. Type the list of your recipients in this box. When finished click OK and save the data source file giving it a name. 8. After you specify recipients, now you can return to your main document and insert the place holders. 9. Place the insertion line in Recipients text box and Click on 'Insert Merge Field' button and Choose Title. Page 54
  • 55.
    10. Similarly, insetother fields as shown in figure. 11. Done. You are ready to merge now. If you wish how the data will be filled in, click on Preview Results button on Mailings ribbon. 12. To merge, click on Finish and Merge button and choose suitable menu. You should get something like below: ---------------- 1. What is Mail Merge? Explain steps to create a Form Letter. Ans: ® It is a very useful feature of MS Word. ® You can use mail merge to print Personalized Form Letters, Envelops, mailing Labels etc,. ® Form Letters are those letters, that have the same (or nearly the same) contents. ® Mail Merge is used to send same letters to multiple peoples. ® Let us assume that we have to send an examination notice to three people. For that we will use 2 files. First file contains the complete text of the letter, except the name and addresses of the person. This file is called the “Main Document” or “The Master Document”. Page 55 Master Document Dear, ……………………… ……………………………….. Data File Mitul, Surat Ravi, Bharuch Suresh, Ahmedabad Personalized Form Letter Dear, Mitul, Surat Dear, Ravi, Bharuch Dear, Suresh, Ahmedabad
  • 56.
    ® Another fileis called “The Data File” or “The Data Source”, it is used to store the names and addresses of the persons to whom the letters are to be sent. ® Mail merge uses the Main Document and then picks up the first address from the Data file to print the first letter, then it picks up the next address from the data file to print the second letter and so on. STEPS: 1. Click on Tools Menu. 2. Select Letters and Mailing option. 3. Click on Mail Merge Option. 4. On the Right hand Side, Mail Merge Dialog Box is open, into which, click on Letters and click on “Next: Starting Documents” Link 5. Choose “use the current document” radio button and click on “Next: select recipients” link below. 6. Choose “type a new list” radio button and click on “Create… New recipient list” link below. 7. Give Appropriate addresses as many as you want, if you want to some selected fields then click on the Customize Columns button and delete unwanted fields. You can also add and rename the fields as you like. 8. After filling the data save that address list with appropriate name. 9. Click on ok button. 10. Now click on “Next: write your letter” link below. And start typing the letter. 11. After typing the letter, select address block and put it into your letter on appropriate location. You can also click on More items link and put some selected items into your letter. 12. Click on “Next: Preview your letters” link and see the preview of your letters. 13. Click on “Next: complete the merge” link and merge your letter with your address list. (In short, merge your Main Document with Your data File). 14. If you want to edit into some particular letter, then click on “Edit individual letters” link below. 15. Otherwise click on print link to printout of your letters or save your document and close the word. ---------- Print Manager : Is a window program that manage all the printing task within the window. Page 56
  • 57.
    When you directwindow application to print a document, the print manager automatically takes control of printing job. With print manager you can do the following task: (1) continuous working with an application while a document is being printed. (2) Print several documents at the same time. (3) Display the information about documents in the print queue. (4) You can pause print, delete print and resume print. File manager: File manager is an essential component (part) of window. That allows you to organize and maintain files and directories (folders). In the file manager the window is divided into 2 parts: Left Half show the directory tree and Right half show the files in the selected directory. File manager provide following facilities: (1) we can see the content of selected drive and selected directory. (2) By default file manager automatically sort the content of directory alphabetically by name. it is also possible to display the content of directory by size or by Type or by using view menu. (3) We can use search option of file menu to search the file and directories in the current drive. (4) The new window option of window menu is use to open or view the content of 2 directories simultaneously (at the same time). (5) By using property option of file menu, we can see the last modify date and time , file extension, filename and the actual location of the file. (6) We can move, copy, rename and delete the file or directory using the file menu by selecting respective option. -------------- What are the features of word processing? Answer: insert text: Allows you to insert text anywhere in the document. delete text: Allows you to erase characters, words, lines, or pages as easily as you can cross them out on paper. cut and paste : Allows you to remove (cut) a section of text from one place in a document and insert (paste) it somewhere else. copy : Allows you to duplicate a section of text. Page 57
  • 58.
    page size andmargins : Allows you to define various page sizes and margins, and the word processor will automatically readjust the text so that it fits. search and replace : Allows you to direct the word processor to search for a particular word or phrase. You can also direct the word processor to replace one group of characters with another everywhere that the first group appears. word wrap : The word processor automatically moves to the next line when you have filled one line with text, and it will readjust text if you change the margins. print: Allows you to send a document to a printer to get hardcopy. file management : Many word processors contain file management capabilities that allow you to create, delete, move, and search for files. font specifications: Allows you to change fonts within a document. For example, you can specify bold, italics, and underlining. Most word processors also let you change the font size and even the typeface. footnotes and cross-references: Automates the numbering and placement of footnotes and enables you to easily cross-reference other sections of the document. graphics graphics: Allows you to embed illustrations and graphs into a document. Some word processors let you create the illustrations within the word processor; others let you insert an illustration produced by a different program. headers , footers , and page numbering: Allows you to specify customized headers and footers that the word processor will put at the top and bottom of every page. The word processor automatically keeps track of page numbers so that the correct number appears on each page. layout : Allows you to specify different margins within a single document and to specify various methods for indenting paragraphs. macros : A macro is a character or word that represents a series of keystrokes. The keystrokes can represent text or commands. The ability to define macros allows you to save yourself a lot of time by replacing common combinations of keystrokes. merges: Allows you to merge text from one file into another file. This is particularly useful for generating many files that have the same format but different data. Generating mailing labels is the classic example of using merges. spell checker : A utility that allows you to check the spelling of words. It will highlight any words that it does not recognize. tables of contents and indexes: Allows you to automatically create a table of contents and index based on special codes that you insert in the document. Page 58
  • 59.
    thesaurus: A built-inthesaurus that allows you to search for synonyms without leaving the word processor. windows : Allows you to edit two or more documents at the same time. Each document appears in a separate window. This is particularly valuable when working on a large project that consists of several different files. WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get): With WYSIWYG, a document appears on the display screen exactly as it will look when printed ----------- What is difference between autotext and auto correct in Microsoft Word? Answer: AUTOTEXT ® Word's AutoText feature allows users to store any amount of text and graphics for re-use in other documents. This is typically referred to as boilerplate text. ® AutoText entries can also be stored in a specific Word template. For example, you may want a series of paragraphs to create a Will but would not need those paragraphs for any other reason. By storing the entries in a template upon which you base Wills, they will not be available when working on any other document type. ® It is easy to move AutoText entries between templates & to copy them to other users whereas it is not as easy to do so with AutoCorrect entries. AUTOCORRECT ® The AutoCorrect feature automatically replaces text as you type. This is really intended to correct common mistakes. For example, you type 'teh', Word changes it to 'the'. That's AutoCorrect. ® You can set up your own AutoCorrect entries and in that way replace one string of text with another. ® People often use AutoCorrect to insert boilerplate text instead of using AutoText. For example, they type P1 and Word automatically replaces it with the text the user has told Word is the 'correction' to apply when that string is typed. ® However, an AutoCorrect replacement string is limited to something like 256 characters thus limiting it's effective use in relation to boilerplate type text. It is also irritating if you actually want to use the string of characters, such as P1, in text. Page 59
  • 60.
    ® An obviousexample of this is that by default Word replaces (c) with the copyright symbol. Useful but annoying if you really want (c) in your text. As far as I am aware, it is not possible to print a list of AutoCorrect entries, whereas it is easy to print a list of AutoText entries. ------------- What is Word Processing and its features Ans:® Word Processing, in computer terminology, refers to typing, editing and formatting of any kind of document, which could be a letter, memorandum, balance sheet or something similar. ® Word processing simply processes words, i.e. textual information. ® It can be used to print letters, reports, booklets and so forth, in a suitable layout. ® A word processor does this by simply formatting the information that is keyed in to the computer. ® Word Processing is different from conventional typing in many ways. ® Here the document is not printed while it is being keyed in. However, its image is being displayed on the video display unit. The user, who is typing the document can verify the correctness of document that is displayed on the computer screen. ® If the user finds any mistake while typing or later, he / she easily correct mistakes. ® Once the user is sure that there are no mistakes in the documents it may be printed. ® The current word processors are very powerful. We can create any type of document using the powerful feature of the word processor. ® We can use various commands to format the document in the way we want. ® We can check on the computer screen for mistakes and correct them. ® In word processor, we can recall the document from computers memory, correct mistakes and reprint it. ® The corrected document can be again saved in the memory for future use. Some of the features available in most word processing packages are: 1. insert text: Allows you to insert text anywhere in the document. 2. delete text: Allows you to erase characters, words, lines, or pages as easily as you can cross them out on paper. 3. cut and paste : Allows you to remove (cut) a section of text from one place in a document and insert (paste) it somewhere else. 4. copy : Allows you to duplicate a section of text. 5. page size and margins : Allows you to define various page sizes and margins, and the word processor will automatically readjust the text so that it fits. 6. search and replace : Allows you to direct the word processor to search for a particular word or phrase. You can also direct the word processor to replace one group of characters with another everywhere that the first group appears. Page 60
  • 61.
    7. word wrap: The word processor automatically moves to the next line when you have filled one line with text, and it will readjust text if you change the margins. 8. print: Allows you to send a document to a printer to get hardcopy. 9. file management : Many word processors contain file management capabilities that allow you to create, delete, move, and search for files. 10. font specifications: Allows you to change fonts within a document. For example, you can specify bold, italics, and underlining. Most word processors also let you change the font size and even the typeface. 11. footnotes and cross-references: Automates the numbering and placement of footnotes and enables you to easily cross-reference other sections of the document. 12. Graphics: graphics Allows you to embed illustrations and graphs into a document. Some word processors let you create the illustrations within the word processor; others let you insert an illustration produced by a different program. 13. headers , footers , and page numbering: Allows you to specify customized headers and footers that the word processor will put at the top and bottom of every page. The word processor automatically keeps track of page numbers so that the correct number appears on each page. 14. layout : Allows you to specify different margins within a single document and to specify various methods for indenting paragraphs. 15. macros : A macro is a character or word that represents a series of keystrokes. The keystrokes can represent text or commands. The ability to define macros allows you to save yourself a lot of time by replacing common combinations of keystrokes. 16. merges: Allows you to merge text from one file into another file. This is particularly useful for generating many files that have the same format but different data. Generating mailing labels is the classic example of using merges. 17. spell checker : A utility that allows you to check the spelling of words. It will highlight any words that it does not recognize. 18. tables of contents and indexes: Allows you to automatically create a table of contents and index based on special codes that you insert in the document. 19. thesaurus: A built-in thesaurus that allows you to search for synonyms without leaving the word processor. 20. windows : Allows you to edit two or more documents at the same time. Each document appears in a separate window. This is particularly valuable when working on a large project that consists of several different files. 21. WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get): With WYSIWYG, a document appears on the display screen exactly as it will look when printed Page 61
  • 62.
    MS EXCEL MsExcel is also a window based application software. In MS Excel user can do calculation work very easily. For example, balance sheet, Salary sheet, Mark sheet, Income-Expense statement etc,. Ms Excel is also known as spread sheet software. File extension for excel is .xls (for 2003 version) and .xlsx (for 2007 version), and the default name of MS Excel file is Book 1. Screen Introduction of MS Excel · ROW: A horizontal line in a worksheet is known as rows. In a worksheet there are total 65,536 rows. · Column: A vertical line in a worksheet is known as columns. In a worksheet there are total 256 column. It has a A, B, C, ……. AA, AB, AC, …… AZ names accordingly. · Cell: Intersection between rows and columns is known as Cell. · Active Cell: Currently selected cell in a worksheet is known as active cell. There is a thick border around one of the cells. · Worksheet: Combination of rows and columns is known as worksheet. There are 3 worksheet in a workbook by default. · Workbook: Collection of one or more than one worksheet is known as workbook. A default name of a workbook is book-1. we can also add a worksheet according to our requirement. ` Page 62
  • 63.
    · Spreadsheet: Aspreadsheet is a piece of software for handling and manipulating (controls) numbers. http://www.homeandlearn.co.uk/me/mes1p1.html · Auto Fill: AutoFill is a very handy feature of Excel. It allows you to quickly fill a series of data, such as days of the week, months, and consecutive numbers. · Range: A range is a group or block of cells in a worksheet that have been selected or highlighted. When cells have been selected they are surrounded by an outline or border. Some Shortcut Keys: Ctrl + Spacebar = for selecting columns Shift + Spacebar = for selecting rows Ctrl + A = for selecting whole worksheet. Insert Menu: ® Chart: With the help of this option you can insert a chart into your Spreadsheet. STEPS: (1) Select a data range. (2) Click on Insert menu (3) Click on chart option (4) Select a chart style (5) Select a sub type of a chart (6) Click on Next Button (7) Click on Next Button again (8) Give a name of X- axis and Y-axis and Title of a chart (9) Set a position of a Legend (10)If you want to show a value in a chart then click on Data lable (11)Click on ( tick a check box) Show value option. (12)Click on Next button (13)Select a radio button according to requirement, if you want to put a chart in that spreadsheet or a new worksheet (14)Click on FINISH button Tools Menu: ® Protection  Protect sheet: With the help of this option you can Protect your worksheet. STEPS: (1) Click on Tools Menu (2) Select Protection option (3) Select a protect sheet option (4) Give a password if you want (5) Click on OK button (6) Give a password again (7) Click on OK button ® Protection  Unprotect sheet: With the help of this option you can unprotect your worksheet. STEPS: (1) Click on Tools Menu (2) Select Protection option (3) Select a unprotect sheet option (4) Give a password Page 63
  • 64.
    (5) Click onOK button ® Goal Seek: If you know the result but not know the actual digit or a number with which that result come, then goal seek option can be used, for example, you know that, 3 + 7 = 10, but 1st class student , know that something + 7 = 10, but he/she does not know that something number then he/she can used goal seek to find that something number. Goal Seek only can apply on formula applied cell. STEPS: (1) Select a cell which has a formula (2) Click on goal seek option (3) In set cell box, give an address of a formula applied cell (4) In to value box, give a result which we know… ( 10 in the above example) (5) In By changing cell box, give a cell address of that cell which we do not know, ( 3 in the above example) (6) Click on OK button Data Menu: ® Sort: With the help of this option you can sort a values of a worksheet. STEPS: (1) Click on Data Menu (2) Select a sort option (3) In sort by box, select according to requirement (4) Click on OK button ® Form: With the Help of this option you can convert a column into a form. STEPS: (1) Click on DATA menu (2) Select form option (3) Entry in opened form (4) With the help of NEW button u can enter a new record (5) Click on close. ® Subtotal: You can insert a subtotal with the help of this option STEPS: (1) Click on Data menu (2) Select subtotal option (3) In At each change in box, select an item (4) Select a column which you want to subtotal (5) Click on OK button STEPS FOR CLEAR THE OUTLINE: (1) Click on Data menu (2) Click on Groups and Outlines options (3) Click on clear outline option. STEPS FOR REMOVE SUBTOTAL (1) Click on Data Menu (2) Select Subtotal option (3) Click on Remove All button ® Data  Filter  Auto Filter: With the help of this option you can apply an automatic filter into your worksheet. STEPS: (1) Click on Data menu (2) Select a filter option (3) Select Auto Filter sub-option from it Page 64
  • 65.
    ® Data Filter  Advance Filter: With the help of this option you can apply an advance filter into your worksheet. STEPS: (1) Type a condition for advance filter ( e.g. rate > 3) in some cell. (2) Select a data range (3) Click on data menu (4) Click on filter option (5) Click on advance filter option (6) In Criteria box, Select a cell in which cell, you applied that ( rate >3) condition. (7) Select a “copy to another location” radio button (8) In copy to box, select a cell where you want to display a filtered record. (9) Click on OK button. ======= NEW ======= There are different types of functions in Excel. Date and Time Function: 1. Date : Returns a date, from a user-supplied year, month and day. Syntax : =Date(year, month, day) 2. Time: Returns a time, from user – supplied hour, minute and second. Syntax: =Time(Hour, Minute, Second) 3. Today( ) : It returns the current date. Syntax: =Today() 4. Now() : It returns the current date and time. Syntax: =now() Text Function: 1. upper(): It converts the text in uppercase. Syntax: =upper(argument) Example: =upper(“ashish”) 2. lower(): It converts the text in lowercase. Syntax: =lower(argument) Example: =lower(“ASHISH”) 3. left(): Returns a specified number of characters from the start of a supplied text string. Syntax: =left(text, number) Page 65
  • 66.
    Example: =left(“Ashish ComputerCenter”,8) 4. right(): returns a specified number of characters from the end of a supplied text string. Syntax: =right(text, number) Example: =right(“Ashish Computer Center”,8) 5. mid(): returns a specified number of characters from the middle of a supplied text string. Syntax: =mid(text, start_num, num) Example: =mid(“ashish computer center”, 5,9) 6. len(): it returns a length of a specified text string. Syntax: =len(text) Example: =len(“ashish”) 7. rept(): it will print a text or a character more than one time. Syntax: =rept(text, number times) Example: =rept(“@ “,10) 8. concatenate(): it joins together two or more text strings. Syntax: = concatenate(text1, text2, ….) Example: =concatenate(“Ashish “,”Patel”) 9. code (): It returns the numeric value (ASCII value)for the first character of a supplied string. Syntax: =code(text) Example:=code(“A”) 10. char(): it returns the character that corresponds to a supplied numeric value. Syntax: =char(number) Example: =char(100) Calculation Function (Mathematical Function): 1. sum(): it returns the sum of a supplied list of numbers. Syntax: =sum(number1, number2,…) Example: =sum(A1:A5) Page 66
  • 67.
    Adding Up You'veseen how to add up in Excel. You either used individual cells to add up, like this: = A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 Or you have used a range of cells with the Sum function. Like this: = Sum(A1:A4) Either way you get the same answer. But you can combine the two to add up. For example, if you wanted to add up cells A1 to A4 and cell A10, you'd do it like this: = Sum(A1:A4) + A10 You can also use the Sum function alone. Like this: = Sum(A1:A4, A10) Here we have entered a range of cells in the brackets - A1:A4. But after that, we added a comma then the final cell we wanted to add up. If we also wanted to add cells A12 and A14 to our sum, we just add a comma then the cell reference. Like this: = Sum(A1:A4, A10, A12, A14) 2. product(): returns the product of a supplied list of numbers. Syntax: =product(number1, number2,…) Example: =product(A1:A5) Multiplying You saw how to multiply two numbers together. Just use the asterisk symbol with the cell references. Like this: = A1 * A2 But what if you wanted to multiply a long range of values together? You might want to multiply all the numbers in the cells A1 to A10. Surely you don't have do this = A1 * A2 * A3 * A4 * A5, etc? You'd be right - you don't have to enter all the cell references. You can do the same as in the Sum Function, just use A1:A5. But instead of using the word Sum you use the word Product. Like this: =Product(A1:A5) If you look back at Exercise 2, the number 3 was in the cells A1 to E1. We then added them up. If you wanted to multiply them all instead, use Product. To further illustrate what Product does, this is what we wanted to multiply: = 3 * 3 * 3 * 3 * 3 So 3 times 3 = 9. Multiply the 9 by the third 3 to give 27. Multiply the 27 by the fourth 3 to give 81. Multiply the 81 by the fifth 3 to give 243. And that's what Product does: Multiplies a range of cells together. Just like the Sum function, you can add other cells after a comma. Like this: = Product(A1:E1, A3) Page 67
  • 68.
    In the abovefunction, our answer of 243 will be multiplied by whatever is in cell A3 3. subtraction: it returns the subtracted value of a supplied list of numbers. Example: = A1 – A2 Subtraction To subtract one value from another, you just use the minus sign in between your cell references. Like this: = A1 - A2 Below is an image from a spreadsheet showing a subtraction formula: Cell A3 is where the answer is displayed, and where we entered the formula. If you want to subtract more than two cells you can do it like this: = A1 - B1 - C1 Subtraction is fairly straightforward in spreadsheets, and shouldn't cause you too many problems. 4. mod : It returns the remainder from a division between two supplied numbers. Syntax: =mod(number, divisor) Example: =mod(10,4) Output: 2 5. POWER: It Returns the result of a given number raised to a supplied power Syntax: =power(number,power) Example: =power(10,2) Output: 100 Page 68
  • 69.
    6. SQRT:It Returnsthe positive square root of a given number Syntax:=sqrt(number) Example: =sqrt(16) Output: 4 7. SUBTOTAL: It Performs a specified calculation (eg. the sum, product, average, etc.) for a supplied set of values. Include Hidden value Ignore Hidden Values Function List 1 101 avg 2 102 count 3 103 countA 4 104 max 5 105 min 6 106 product 7 107 stdev 8 108 stdevp 9 109 sum 10 110 var 11 111 varp Syntax: =subtotal(function_num, ref1, …) Example: =subtotal(9,A1:A5) 8. Division: It is used to divide two or more list of supplied numbers. Syntax: =A1/A5 Example: =A1/A5 10. Quotient: http://spreadsheets.about.com/od/excelfunctions/qt/quotient_funct.htm Functions: Page 69
  • 70.
    The QUOTIENT functioncan be used to divide numbers in Excel. Unlike regular division, however, the QUOTIENT function only gives you the whole number as an answer - not the remainder. The syntax for the QUOTIENT function is: =QUOTIENT ( numerator , denominator ) Example: =QUOTIENT(5,2) Output: 2 Division If you want to divide one number by another the symbol to use is this one: / That's the forward slash, and can be found just to the right of the full stop on your keyboard. You use it like this: = A1 / C1 There are a number of times when you would want to divide, but wouldn't need the divider symbol at all. For example, you use division to calculate Averages, but you wouldn't need the divider symbol here because Excel has a separate Average function. Likewise, if you wanted to calculate monthly payments, you wouldn't need to use the divider symbol because Excel had quite a number of financial functions you can use. (We'll meet some of these later in the course.) The answer you should have got was 150. Notice the brackets in the formula. The brackets group part of your sum together. Without them, Excel will normally calculate from left to right. But it does some calculation before others. Excel sees multiplication as more important than adding up. To see what happens without the brackets, do this: * Click on cell A5 * Click inside the formula bar at the top * Delete both the brackets from the formula * Press the return key on your keyboard to see the answer Now the answer is different! This time you should have gotten 125. Here are the picture versions of both formulas: With Brackets Without Brackets Page 70
  • 71.
    You might thinkthe second one is wrong. But it's not. It's just the way Excel works things out. Because it sees multiplication as more important than adding up, it will multiply cell A2 by cell A3 first. That gets the answer of 100. Excel will then add this answer to cell A1, which gives the answer 125. With the brackets in, you force Excel to work things out your way. You're saying "Do the sum in brackets first, then multiply". When you do the brackets first, you get a different answer. A1 + A2 = 75. Multiply 75 by cell A3 and you get the answer 150. The moral is: take care when you are grouping operators together. And force Excel to work things out your way by using brackets to group your sums. Example 2 Substitute the asterisk symbol from example 1 with the forward slash. So the formula will be changed from this: = (A1 + A2) * A3 to this: = (A1 + A2) / A3 Press the Return key on your keyboard to reveal the answer. It should be 37.5. Now take the brackets out and try again. Again, you get a different answer. The total will now be 50! Again the same process is at work. Excel sees division as more important than adding up, so it does that first. So it will divide 50 by 2 to get 25. Then it will add the contents of cell A1 to get 50. With the brackets, we force Excel to do the adding up first, then divide by the cell A3. Example 3 This time, enter the following formula for cell A5: = (A1 * A2) / A3 Press the Return key on your keyboard to reveal the answer. It should be 625. Remove the brackets and try again. The answer should be 625 again. This is because Excel sees Multiplication and division as being of equal importance. When all things are equal, Excel calculates from left to right. Likewise, Excel sees addition and subtraction as being of equal importance. So it will calculate from left to right if you use addition and subtraction in the same formula. As an example, study this formula below: Page 71
  • 72.
    As you cansee, the formula in cell A5 is = A1 + A2 - A3. Now does that mean this: = (A1 + A2) - A3 Or this: = A1 + (A2 - A3) Statistical Functions & Counting Functions 1. average(): it returns the average of the supplied list of numbers. Syntax: =average(number1, number2,…) Example: =average(A1:A5) 2. count(): Returns the number of numerical values in a supplied set of cells or values. Syntax: =count(value1, value2,…) Example: =count (A1:A5) 3. countA():Returns the number of non-blanks in a supplied set of cells or values. Syntax: =countA(value1, value2,…) Example: =countA (A1:A5) 4. countIF(): The Excel Countif function returns the number of cells (of a supplied range), that satisfy a given criteria. Syntax: = COUNTIF( range, criteria ) Where, range - The range of cells that should be tested against the supplied criteria and counted if the criteria is satisfied. criteria - A user-defined condition that is tested against each of the cells in range. A criteria can be either: -a numeric value (which may be an integer, decimal, date, time, or logical value) (eg. 10, 01/01/2008, TRUE) Page 72
  • 73.
    or - atext string (eg. "Text", "Monday") or - an expression (eg. ">12", "<>0") Formulas: A B C D 1 Sunday 07- S e p - 2 0 0 8 0 TRUE 2 Monday 08- S e p - 2 0 0 8 2.1 TRUE 3 Wednesd ay 10- S e p - 2 0 0 8 2 TRUE 4 Thursday 11- S e p - 2 0 0 8 3 FALS E 5 Wednesd ay 17- S e p - 2 0 0 2.5 FALS E Results: A B C D 1 Sunday 07- S e p - 2 0 0 8 0 TRU E 2 Monday 08- S e p - 2 0 0 8 2.1 TRU E 3 Wednesd ay 10- S e p - 2 0 0 8 2 TRU E 4 Thursday 11- S e p - 2 0 0 8 3 FALS E 5 Wednesd ay 17- S e p - 2 0 0 2.5 FALS E Page 73
  • 74.
    8 6 Tuesday 23- S e p - 2 0 0 8 3 FALS E 7 Wednesd ay 24- S e p - 2 0 0 8 6 FALS E 8 Sunday 05- O c t - 2 0 0 8 4 FALS E 9 Saturday 11- O c t - 2 0 0 8 0 FALS E 10 11 =COUNTIF( A1:A9, "Wednesday" ) 12 =COUNTIF( A1:A9, "<>Wednesday" ) 13 =COUNTIF( B1:B9, ">01/10/2008" ) 14 =COUNTIF( C1:C9, 0 ) 15 =COUNTIF( C1:C9, ">=3" ) 16 =COUNTIF( D1:D9, TRUE ) 8 6 Tuesday 23- S e p - 2 0 0 8 3 FALS E 7 Wednesd ay 24- S e p - 2 0 0 8 6 FALS E 8 Sunday 05- O c t - 2 0 0 8 4 FALS E 9 Saturday 11- O c t - 2 0 0 8 0 FALS E 10 11 3 12 6 13 2 14 2 15 4 16 Page 74
  • 75.
    5. max() :Returns the largest value from a list of supplied numbers. Syntax: =max(number1, number2,…) Example: =max(A1:A5) 6. min(): returns the smallest value form a list of supplied numbers. Syntax: =min(number1, number2,…) Example: =min(A1:A5) Logical Functions: 1. AND: The Excel AND function tests a number of user-defined conditions and returns a result of: - TRUE if ALL of the conditions evaluate to TRUE or - FALSE otherwise (i.e. if ANY of the conditions evaluate to FALSE). Syntax: AND( logical_test1, [logical_test2], ... ) Example: =AND( A1>0, A1<B1 ) 2. OR: The Excel OR function tests a number of supplied conditions and returns either TRUE if ANY of the conditions evaluate to TRUE or - FALSE otherwise (i.e. if ALL of the conditions evaluate to FALSE) Syntax: OR( logical_test1, [logical_test2], ... ) Example: =OR( A1>0, A1<B1 ) 3. NOT: The Excel NOT function receives a logical value and simply returns the opposite logical value. i.e. if supplied with the value TRUE, the Not function returns FALSE and if supplied with the value FALSE, the function will return the value TRUE. Syntax: = Not( logical ) Example: =NOT(TRUE) Output: FALSE  Conditional Function: 1. IF: It tests a user defined condition and returns one result if the condition is TRUE, and another result if the condition is FALSE. Page 75
  • 76.
    Syntax: =If(logical_test,value_if_true,value_if_false) Example:=If(A1<35,”fail”,”Pass”)  LOOK UP and Reference Functions: 1. LOOKUP: The Excel LOOKUP function 'looks up' a supplied value within a data set and returns the corresponding value from a second data set. If the function fails to find an exact match to the supplied 'lookup' value, it uses the largest value that is less than or equal to the supplied 'lookup' value. Where, lookup_value - the value that you want to look up in the supplied lookup_vector lookup_vector - A 1-dimensional list of data, which we want to search for the lookup_value. result_vector - A 1-dimensional list of data, from which we want to return a value (must be the same length as the lookup_vector) Syntax: LOOKUP( lookup_value, lookup_vector, result_vector ) Example: The above Lookup function returns the interest rate of 5%, which is the correct interest rate to apply to a bank account with a balance of $45,000. Example 2: The above Lookup function returns the grade for the score 82%, which is B. 2. HLOOKUP: The Excel Hlookup function 'looks up' a given value in the top row of a data array (or table), and returns the corresponding value from another row of the array. Syntax: HLOOKUP( lookup_value, table_array, row_index_num, [range_lookup] ) Where, lookup_value - The value that you want to look for, in the first row of the supplied data array Page 76
  • 77.
    table_array - Thedata array or table, that you want to search the first row of, for the supplied lookup_value row_index_num - The row number, within the supplied array, that you want the corresponding value to be returned from [range_lookup] - An optional logical argument, which can be set to TRUE or FALSE, meaning : TRUE - if the function cannot find an exact match to the supplied lookup_value, it should use the closest match below the supplied value (Note: If range_lookup is set to TRUE, the top row of the table_array must be in ascending order) FALSE - if the function cannot find an exact match to the supplied lookup_value, it should return an error Example: Formulas: Results: 3. VLOOKUP: The Excel VLOOKUP function 'looks up' a given value in the left-hand column of a data array (or table), and returns the corresponding value from another column of the array Syntax: VLOOKUP( lookup_value, table_array, col_index_num, [range_lookup] ) LEFT HAND COLUNM instead of First row of the supplied array. Example: The above Vlookup function returns the price for "Cornflakes", which is $3.50. Page 77
  • 78.
    Financial Function: 1.FV: The Excel FV function calculates the Future Value of an investment with periodic constant payments and a constant interest rate Syntax: FV( rate, nper, [pmt], [pv], [type] ) Where, rate - The interest rate, per period nper - The number of periods for the lifetime of the annuity [pmt] - An optional argument that specifies the payment per period (if the [pmt] argument is omitted, the [pv] argument must be supplied) [pv] - An optional argument that specifies the present value of the annuity - i.e. the amount that a series of future payments is worth now (if the [pv] argument is omitted, it takes on the default value 0. Also, if [pv] is omitted, the [pmt] argument must be supplied) [type] - An optional argument that defines whether the payment is made at the start or the end of the period.The type argument can have the value 0 or 1, meaning: 0 - the payment is made at the end of the period 1 - the payment is made at the beginning of the period If the type argument is omitted, it takes on the default value of 0 (denoting payments made at the end of the period). Example: Formula: A 1 Future value of an investment of $1,000 per month over 5 years, with a present value of $0, and an interest rate of 5% per year (payment made at end of each mth): =FV( 5%/12, 60, -1000 ) result : A 1 Future value of an investment of $1,000 per month over 5 years, with a present value of $0, and an interest rate of 5% per year (payment made at end of each mth): 2 $68,006.08 2. PV: The Excel PV function calculates the Present Value of an investment, based on a series of future payments. Syntax: PV( rate, nper, pmt, [fv], [type] ) Example: Page 78
  • 79.
    More Details: http://www.excelfunctions.net Yield (ઊપજવું): The Excel YIELD function calculates the Yield of a security that pays periodic interest. Syntax: =yield(settlement, maturity, rate, pr, redemption, frequency, basis]) Where, settlement-The settlement date of the security (ie. the date that the coupon is purchased) maturity -The maturity date of the security (ie. the date that the coupon expires) rate - The security's annual coupon rate pr -The security's price per $100 face value redemption - The security's redemption value per $100 face value frequency -The number of coupon payments per year. This must be one of the following: 1-Annually 2-Semi-Annually 4-Quarterly [basis] -An optional integer argument which specifies the financial day count basis that is used by the security. Possible values are: [basis] Day Count Basis 0 (or omitted) US (NASD) 30/360 1 actual/actual 2 actual/360 3 actual/365 4 European 30/360 The financial day count basis rules are explained in detail on the Wikipedia Day Count Convention page Note that the settlement and maturity arguments should be supplied to the function as either: References to cells containing dates or Dates returned from formulas Warning: -If you attempt to input the settlement and maturity dates as text, these can be interpreted differently, depending on the date system and date interpretation settings on your computer. Page 79
  • 80.
    -Although you caninput the dates as serial numbers, this is not recommended, as date serial numbering varies across different computer systems Example: The following example shows the Excel Yield function used to calculate the yield on a coupon purchased on 01-Jan-2010, with Maturity date 30-Jun-2015 and a rate of 10%. The price per $100 face value is $101 and the redemption value is $100. Payments are made quarterly and the US (NASD) 30/360 day count basis is used: A B 1 Settlement Date: 01-Jan-2010 2 Maturity Date: 30-Jun-2015 3 =YIELD( B1, B2, 10%, 101, 100, 4 ) Calculates the yield to be 9.76%. Note that, in the above example, the [basis] argument has been omitted, so the default US (NASD) 30/360 day method is used. Note also that, as recommended, the date arguments have been input as references to cells containing dates Page 80
  • 81.
    ============== OLD ============== Formula and Functions: http://www.excelfunctions.net/ExcelFunctions.html Formula: You will use formulas to calculate values stored in your worksheet. Function: Functions are predefined formulas that performs specific calculations, such as finding an average or future value. Functions require arguments – the data to be calculated. NOTE: Before any formula and Functions, you should put an “is equal to” sign (=) before it. There are different types of functions in Excel. Date and Time Function: 1. Date : Returns a date, from a user-supplied year, month and day. Syntax : =Date(year, month, day) 2. Time: Returns a time, from user – supplied hour, minute and second. Syntax: =Time(Hour, Minute, Second) 3. Today( ) : It returns the current date. Syntax: =Today() 4. Now() : It returns the current date and time. Syntax: =now() Text Function: 1. upper(): It converts the text in uppercase. Syntax: =upper(argument) Example: =upper(“ashish”) 2. lower(): It converts the text in lowercase. Page 81
  • 82.
    3. left(): Returnsa specified number of characters from the start of a supplied text string. Syntax: =left(text, number) Example: =left(“Ashish Computer Center”,8) 4. right(): returns a specified number of characters from the end of a supplied text string. 5. mid(): returns a specified number of characters from the middle of a supplied text string. Syntax: =mid(text, start_num, num) Example: =mid(“ashish computer center”, 5,9) 6. len(): it returns a length of a specified text string. Syntax: =len(text) Example: =len(“ashish”) 7. rept(): it will print a text or a character more than one time. Syntax: =rept(text, number times) Example: =rept(“@ “,10) 8. concatenate(): it joins together two or more text strings. Syntax: = concatenate(text1, text2, ….) Example: =concatenate(“Ashish “,”Patel”) 9. code (): It returns the numeric value (ASCII value)for the first character of a supplied string. Syntax: =code(text) Example:=code(“A”) 10. char(): it returns the character that corresponds to a supplied numeric value. Syntax: =char(number) Example: =char(100) Calculation Function (Mathematical Function): 1. sum(): it returns the sum of a supplied list of numbers. Example: =sum(A1:A5) 2. product(): returns the product of a supplied list of numbers. Page 82
  • 83.
    Example: =product(A1:A5) 3.subtraction: it returns the subtracted value of a supplied list of numbers. Example: = A1 – A2 4. mod : It returns the remainder from a division between two supplied numbers. 5. average(): it returns the average of the supplied list of numbers. Example: =average(A1:A5) 6. count(): Returns the number of numerical values in a supplied set of cells or values. Example: =count (A1:A5) 7. max() : Returns the largest value from a list of supplied numbers. Example: =max(A1:A5) 8. min(): returns the smallest value form a list of supplied numbers. 9. Division: It is used to divide two or more list of supplied numbers. 10. http://spreadsheets.about.com/od/excelfunctions/qt/quotient_funct.htm Functions: The QUOTIENT function can be used to divide numbers in Excel. Unlike regular division, however, the QUOTIENT function only gives you the whole number as an answer - not the remainder. The syntax for the QUOTIENT function is: =QUOTIENT ( numerator , denominator ) Page 83
  • 84.
    11.  AddingUp You've seen how to add up in Excel. You either used individual cells to add up, like this: = A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 Or you have used a range of cells with the Sum function. Like this: = Sum(A1:A4) Either way you get the same answer. But you can combine the two to add up. For example, if you wanted to add up cells A1 to A4 and cell A10, you'd do it like this: = Sum(A1:A4) + A10 You can also use the Sum function alone. Like this: = Sum(A1:A4, A10) Page 84
  • 85.
    Here we haveentered a range of cells in the brackets - A1:A4. But after that, we added a comma then the final cell we wanted to add up. If we also wanted to add cells A12 and A14 to our sum, we just add a comma then the cell reference. Like this: = Sum(A1:A4, A10, A12, A14) Try using this Sum function yourself by doing these exercises: Exercise 1 On a new spreadsheet, enter the number 3 in the following cells: A1, B1, C1, D1. Enter the number 3 in the cell A2. Use only the Sum function to add up the values in the cells. Display the answer in cell A4. In other words, the spreadsheet should look like the one below: In the picture above, cell A4 displays the answer. Only a Sum function was used. Multiplying You saw how to multiply two numbers together. Just use the asterisk symbol with the cell references. Like this: = A1 * A2 But what if you wanted to multiply a long range of values together? You might want to multiply all the numbers in the cells A1 to A10. Surely you don't have do this = A1 * A2 * A3 * A4 * A5, etc? You'd be right - you don't have to enter all the cell references. You can do the same as in the Sum Function, just use A1:A5. But instead of using the word Sum you use the word Product. Like this: =Product(A1:A5) If you look back at Exercise 2, the number 3 was in the cells A1 to E1. We then added them up. If you wanted to multiply them all instead, use Product. To further illustrate what Product does, this is what we wanted to multiply: = 3 * 3 * 3 * 3 * 3 Page 85
  • 86.
    So 3 times3 = 9. Multiply the 9 by the third 3 to give 27. Multiply the 27 by the fourth 3 to give 81. Multiply the 81 by the fifth 3 to give 243. And that's what Product does: Multiplies a range of cells together. Just like the Sum function, you can add other cells after a comma. Like this: = Product(A1:E1, A3) In the above function, our answer of 243 will be multiplied by whatever is in cell A3. Try using Product yourself with these exercises: Exercise 3 In the cells A1 to E1 enter the following values: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Use Product to multiply them all together. Display your answer in cell A3. So your spreadsheet will look like this: Subtraction To subtract one value from another, you just use the minus sign in between your cell references. Like this: = A1 - A2 Below is an image from a spreadsheet showing a subtraction formula: Cell A3 is where the answer is displayed, and where we entered the formula. If you want to subtract more than two cells you can do it like this: = A1 - B1 - C1 Subtraction is fairly straightforward in spreadsheets, and shouldn't cause you too many problems. Page 86
  • 87.
    Division If youwant to divide one number by another the symbol to use is this one: / That's the forward slash, and can be found just to the right of the full stop on your keyboard. You use it like this: = A1 / C1 There are a number of times when you would want to divide, but wouldn't need the divider symbol at all. For example, you use division to calculate Averages, but you wouldn't need the divider symbol here because Excel has a separate Average function. Likewise, if you wanted to calculate monthly payments, you wouldn't need to use the divider symbol because Excel had quite a number of financial functions you can use. (We'll meet some of these later in the course.) The answer you should have got was 150. Notice the brackets in the formula. The brackets group part of your sum together. Without them, Excel will normally calculate from left to right. But it does some calculation before others. Excel sees multiplication as more important than adding up. To see what happens without the brackets, do this: · Click on cell A5 · Click inside the formula bar at the top · Delete both the brackets from the formula · Press the return key on your keyboard to see the answer Now the answer is different! This time you should have gotten 125. Here are the picture versions of both formulas: With Brackets Without Brackets You might think the second one is wrong. But it's not. It's just the way Excel works things out. Because it sees multiplication as more important than adding up, it will multiply cell A2 by cell A3 first. That gets the answer of 100. Excel will then add this answer to cell A1, which gives the answer 125. Page 87
  • 88.
    With the bracketsin, you force Excel to work things out your way. You're saying "Do the sum in brackets first, then multiply". When you do the brackets first, you get a different answer. A1 + A2 = 75. Multiply 75 by cell A3 and you get the answer 150. The moral is: take care when you are grouping operators together. And force Excel to work things out your way by using brackets to group your sums. Example 2 Substitute the asterisk symbol from example 1 with the forward slash. So the formula will be changed from this: = (A1 + A2) * A3 to this: = (A1 + A2) / A3 Press the Return key on your keyboard to reveal the answer. It should be 37.5. Now take the brackets out and try again. Again, you get a different answer. The total will now be 50! Again the same process is at work. Excel sees division as more important than adding up, so it does that first. So it will divide 50 by 2 to get 25. Then it will add the contents of cell A1 to get 50. With the brackets, we force Excel to do the adding up first, then divide by the cell A3. Example 3 This time, enter the following formula for cell A5: = (A1 * A2) / A3 Press the Return key on your keyboard to reveal the answer. It should be 625. Remove the brackets and try again. The answer should be 625 again. This is because Excel sees Multiplication and division as being of equal importance. When all things are equal, Excel calculates from left to right. Likewise, Excel sees addition and subtraction as being of equal importance. So it will calculate from left to right if you use addition and subtraction in the same formula. As an example, study this formula below: Page 88
  • 89.
    As you cansee, the formula in cell A5 is = A1 + A2 - A3. Now does that mean this: = (A1 + A2) - A3 Or this: = A1 + (A2 - A3) Ques: Diffrence between sorting and filtering: Ans: Sorting  When you enter data into your worksheet it is often unorganized making it difficult to examine.  When analyzing the information in your spreadsheet, you may need to rearrange the data in different ways to answer different questions.  Excel's sorting feature can help your rearrange your data so you can use it more efficiently. Note: If your spreadsheet contains formulas, be careful when using the sort feature. Formulas rely on cell references to perform their calculations and moving the data with the sort feature may destroy these references. Page 89
  • 90.
    Steps To sorta list of data: (1)Select a single cell in the column containing the data you want to sort. (2) Click on Data Menu (3) Select Sort option. (4) Select Ascending and Descending order. (5) Click on OK button. Note: If you select an entire column, Excel will sort only that column and will mismatch the data contained in the other columns. Filtering Filtering is a way that you can use Excel to quickly extract certain data from your spreadsheet. Unlike sorting, filtering doesn't just reorder the list. It actually hides the rows or columns containing data that do not meet the filter criteria you define. Excel has an AutoFilter feature that makes it very easy to extract data from your spreadsheet. To use the AutoFilter: · Click on any cell in your spreadsheet. · Select the Home tab. · Under the Editing group, press the Sort and Filtering button and select the Filter button. · Drop-down menus will appear next to each cell heading. · Clicking on any drop-down menu will provide you with options for sorting or filtering. Page 90
  • 91.
    Examples: Sorting refersto taking a list of items and putting them in some type of order, like alphabetical. For example, take this list: dog cat flower If you sort it alphabetically, it would become: cat dog flower Filtering refers to showing just a portion of the list of items. For example, if you took this list: dog cat flower and filtered it to only show animals, the resulting filtered list would be: dog cat ------------- http://wiki.answers.com/Q/Explain_the_different_types_of_charts_used_in_excel Explain the different types of charts used in excel? Answer: Page 91
  • 92.
    · An areachart emphasizes the magnitude of change over time. By displaying the sum of the plotted values, an area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a whole. · A Column Chart shows data changes over a period of time or illustrates comparisons among items. Categories are organized horizontally, values vertically, to emphasize variation over time. Stacked column charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. The 3-D perspective column chart compares data points along two axes. · A Bar Chart illustrates comparisons among individual items. Categories are organized vertically, values horizontally, to focus on comparing values and to place less emphasis on time. Stacked bar charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. · A Line Chart shows trends in data at equal intervals. · A Pie Chart shows the proportional size of items that make up a data series to the sum of the items. It always shows only one data series and is useful when you want to emphasize a significant element. To make small slices easier to see, you can group them together as one item in a pie chart and then break down that item in a smaller pie or bar chart next to the main chart. · Like a pie chart, a Doughnut Chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole, but it can contain more than one data series. Each ring of the doughnut chart represents a data series. · The High-Low-Close Chart is often used to illustrate stock prices. This chart can also be used for scientific data, for example, to indicate temperature changes. You must organize your data in the correct order to create this and other stock charts. A stock chart that measures volume has two value axes: one for the columns that measure volume, and the other for the stock prices. You can include volume in a high-low-close or open-high-low-close chart. · An XY (Scatter) Chart either shows the relationships among the numeric values in several data series or plots two groups of numbers as one series of xy coordinates. This chart shows uneven intervals - or clusters - of data and is commonly used for scientific data. When you arrange your data, place x values in one row or column, and then enter corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns. · A Bubble Chart is a type of xy (scatter) chart. The size of the data marker indicates the value of a third variable. To arrange your data, place the x values in one row or column, and enter corresponding y values and bubble sizes in the adjacent rows or columns. · In a Radar Chart, each category has its own value axis radiating from the center point. Lines connect all the values in the same series. A radar chart compares the aggregate values of a number of data series. In this chart, the data series that covers the most area, Brand A, represents the brand with the highest vitamin content. · A Surface Chart is useful when you want to find optimum combinations between two sets of data. As in a topographic map, colors and patterns indicate areas that are in the same range of values. http://office.microsoft.com/en-in/excel-help/available-chart-types-HA010342187.aspx Page 92
  • 93.
    Available chart types Microsoft Excel supports many types of charts to help you display data in ways that are meaningful to your audience. When you create a chart or change the type of an existing chart in Microsoft Excel or other Microsoft Office programs such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Outlook, you can select one of the following chart types. Important This article describes the chart types that you can use. For information about how to create a chart, see Quick start: Chart your data or Create a chart from start to finish. In this article · Column charts · Line charts · Pie charts · Bar charts · Area charts · XY (scatter) charts · Stock charts · Surface charts · Doughnut charts · Bubble charts · Radar charts Column charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a column chart. Column charts are useful for showing data changes over a period of time or for illustrating comparisons among items. In column charts, categories are typically organized along the horizontal axis and values along the vertical axis. Column charts have the following chart subtypes: Page 93
  • 94.
    · Clustered columnand clustered column in 3-D Clustered column charts compare values across categories. A clustered column chart displays values in 2-D vertical rectangles. A clustered column in 3-D chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not used. You can use a clustered column chart type when you have categories that represent: · Ranges of values (for example, item counts). · Specific scale arrangements (for example, a Likert scale with entries, such as strongly agree, agree, neutral, disagree, strongly disagree). · Names that are not in any specific order (for example, item names, geographic names, or the names of people). Note To present data in a 3-D format that uses three axes (a horizontal axis, a vertical axis, and a depth axis) that you can modify, use a 3-D column chart subtype instead. · Stacked column and stacked column in 3-D Stacked column charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole, comparing the contribution of each value to a total across categories. A stacked column chart displays values in 2-D vertical stacked rectangles. A 3-D stacked column chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not used. Tip You can use a stacked column chart when you have multiple data series and when you want to emphasize the total. · 100% stacked column and 100% stacked column in 3-D 100% stacked column charts and 100% stacked column in 3-D charts compare the percentage that each value contributes to a total across categories. A 100% stacked column chart displays values in 2-D vertical 100% stacked rectangles. A 3-D 100% stacked column chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not used. Page 94
  • 95.
    You can usea 100% stacked column chart when you have two or more data series and you want to emphasize the contributions to the whole, especially if the total is the same for each category. · 3-D column 3-D column charts use three axes that you can modify (a horizontal axis, a vertical axis, and a depth axis), and they compare data points along the horizontal and the depth axes. You can use a 3-D column chart when you want to compare data across the categories and across the series equally, because this chart type shows categories along both the horizontal axis and the depth axis, whereas the vertical axis displays the values. · Cylinder, cone, and pyramid Cylinder, cone, and pyramid charts are available in the same clustered, stacked, 100% stacked, and 3-D chart types that are provided for rectangular column charts, and they show and compare data the same way. The only difference is that these chart types display cylinder, cone, and pyramid shapes instead of rectangles. TOP OF PAGE Line charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a line chart. Line charts can display continuous data over time, set against a common scale, and are therefore ideal for showing trends in data at equal intervals. In a line chart, category data is distributed evenly along the horizontal axis, and all value data is distributed evenly along the vertical axis. Page 95
  • 96.
    You should usea line chart if your category labels are text, and are representing evenly spaced values such as months, quarters, or fiscal years. This is especially true if there are multiple series — for one series, you should consider using a scatter chart. You should also use a line chart if you have several evenly spaced numeric labels, especially years. If you have more than ten numeric labels, use a scatter chart instead. Line charts have the following chart subtypes: · Line and line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data values, or without, line charts are useful to show trends over time or ordered categories, especially when there are many data points and the order in which they are presented is important. If there are many categories or the values are approximate, use a line chart without markers. · Stacked line and stacked line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data values, or without, stacked line charts can be used to show the trend of the contribution of each value over time or ordered categories. Note Stacked charts add the data, which might not be the result you want. Also, because it is not easy to see that the lines are stacked, consider using a different line chart type or a stacked area chart instead. · 100% stacked line and 100% stacked line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data values, or without, 100% stacked line charts are useful to show the trend of the Page 96
  • 97.
    percentage each valuecontributes over time or ordered categories. If there are many categories or the values are approximate, use a 100% stacked line chart without markers. Tip For a better presentation of this type of data, consider using a 100% stacked area chart instead. · 3-D line 3-D line charts show each row or column of data as a 3-D ribbon. A 3-D line chart has horizontal, vertical, and depth axes that you can modify. TOP OF PAGE Pie charts Data that is arranged in one column or row only on a worksheet can be plotted in a pie chart. Pie charts show the size of items in one data series, proportional to the sum of the items. The data points in a pie chart are displayed as a percentage of the whole pie. Consider using a pie chart when: · You only have one data series that you want to plot. · None of the values that you want to plot are negative. · Almost none of the values that you want to plot are zero values. · You do not have more than seven categories. Page 97
  • 98.
    · The categoriesrepresent parts of the whole pie. Pie charts have the following chart subtypes: · Pie and pie in 3-D Pie charts display the contribution of each value to a total in a 2-D or 3-D format. You can pull out slices of a pie chart manually to emphasize the slices. · Pie of pie and bar of pie Pie of pie or bar of pie charts display pie charts with user-defined values that are extracted from the main pie chart and combined into a secondary pie chart or into a stacked bar chart. These chart types are useful when you want to make small slices in the main pie chart easier to distinguish. · Exploded pie and exploded pie in 3-D Exploded pie charts display the contribution of each value to a total while emphasizing individual values. Exploded pie charts can be displayed in 3-D format. You can change the pie explosion setting for all slices and individual slices, but you cannot move the slices of an exploded pie manually. Tip If you want to pull out the slices manually, consider using a pie or pie in 3-D chart instead. TOP OF PAGE Bar charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a bar chart. Bar charts illustrate comparisons among individual items. Page 98
  • 99.
    Consider using abar chart when: · The axis labels are long. · The values that are shown are durations. Bar charts have the following chart subtypes: · Clustered bar and clustered bar in 3-D Clustered bar charts compare values across categories. In a clustered bar chart, the categories are typically organized along the vertical axis, and the values along the horizontal axis. A clustered bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not display the data on three axes. · Stacked bar and stacked bar in 3-D Stacked bar charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. A stacked bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not display the data on three axes. · 100% stacked bar and 100% stacked bar in 3-D This type of chart compares the percentage that each value contributes to a total across categories. A 100% stacked bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not display the data on three axes. Page 99
  • 100.
    · Horizontal cylinder,cone, and pyramid These charts are available in the same clustered, stacked, and 100% stacked chart types that are provided for rectangular bar charts. They show and compare data the same way. The only difference is that these chart types display cylinder, cone, and pyramid shapes instead of horizontal rectangles. TOP OF PAGE Area charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in an area chart. Area charts emphasize the magnitude of change over time, and can be used to draw attention to the total value across a trend. For example, data that represents profit over time can be plotted in an area chart to emphasize the total profit. By displaying the sum of the plotted values, an area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a whole. Area charts have the following chart subtypes: · 2-D area and 3-D area Whether they are shown in 2-D or in 3-D, area charts display the trend of values over time or other category data. 3-D area charts use three axes (horizontal, vertical, and depth) that you can modify. As a rule, you should consider using a line chart instead of a nonstacked area chart, because data from one series can be obscured by data from another series. Page 100
  • 101.
    · Stacked areaand stacked area in 3-D Stacked area charts display the trend of the contribution of each value over time or other category data. A stacked area chart in 3-D is displayed in the same way but uses a 3-D perspective. A 3-D perspective is not a true 3-D chart — a third value axis (depth axis) is not used. · 100% stacked area and 100% stacked area in 3-D 100% stacked area charts display the trend of the percentage that each value contributes over time or other category data. A 100% stacked area chart in 3-D is displayed in the same way but uses a 3-D perspective. A 3-D perspective is not a true 3-D chart — a third value axis (depth axis) is not used. TOP OF PAGE XY (scatter) charts Data that is arranged in columns and rows on a worksheet can be plotted in an xy (scatter) chart. Scatter charts show the relationships among the numeric values in several data series, or plot two groups of numbers as one series of xy coordinates. A scatter chart has two value axes, showing one set of numeric data along the horizontal axis (x-axis) and another along the vertical axis (y-axis). It combines these values into single data points and displays them in irregular intervals, or clusters. Scatter charts are typically used for displaying and comparing numeric values, such as scientific, statistical, and engineering data. Consider using a scatter chart when: · You want to change the scale of the horizontal axis. · You want to make that axis a logarithmic scale. · Values for horizontal axis are not evenly spaced. · There are many data points on the horizontal axis. Page 101
  • 102.
    · You wantto effectively display worksheet data that includes pairs or grouped sets of values and adjust the independent scales of a scatter chart to reveal more information about the grouped values. · You want to show similarities between large sets of data instead of differences between data points. · You want to compare many data points without regard to time — the more data that you include in a scatter chart, the better the comparisons that you can make. To arrange data on a worksheet for a scatter chart, you should place the x values in one row or column, and then enter the corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns. Scatter charts have the following chart subtypes: · Scatter with only markers This type of chart compares pairs of values. Use a scatter chart with data markers but without lines when you use many data points and connecting lines would make the data more difficult to read. You can also use this chart type when you do not have to show connectivity of the data points. · Scatter with smooth lines and scatter with smooth lines and markers This type of chart displays a smooth curve that connects the data points. Smooth lines can be displayed with or without markers. Use a smooth line without markers if there are many data points. Page 102
  • 103.
    · Scatter withstraight lines and scatter with straight lines and markers This type of chart displays straight connecting lines between data points. Straight lines can be displayed with or without markers. TOP OF PAGE Stock charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows in a specific order on a worksheet can be plotted in a stock chart. As its name implies, a stock chart is most often used to illustrate the fluctuation of stock prices. However, this chart may also be used for scientific data. For example, you could use a stock chart to indicate the fluctuation of daily or annual temperatures. You must organize your data in the correct order to create stock charts. The way stock chart data is organized in the worksheet is very important. For example, to create a simple high-low-close stock chart, you should arrange your data with High, Low, and Close entered as column headings, in that order. Stock charts have the following chart sub-types: · High-low-close The high-low-close stock chart is often used to illustrate stock prices. It requires three series of values in the following order: high, low, and then close. Page 103
  • 104.
    · Open-high-low-close Thistype of stock chart requires four series of values in the correct order (open, high, low, and then close). · Volume-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires four series of values in the correct order (volume, high, low, and then close). It measures volume by using two value axes: one for the columns that measure volume, and the other for the stock prices. · Volume-open-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires five series of values in the correct order (volume, open, high, low, and then close). TOP OF PAGE Page 104
  • 105.
    Surface charts Datathat is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a surface chart. A surface chart is useful when you want to find optimum combinations between two sets of data. As in a topographic map, colors and patterns indicate areas that are in the same range of values. You can use a surface chart when both categories and data series are numeric values. Surface charts have the following chart subtypes: · 3-D surface 3-D surface charts show trends in values across two dimensions in a continuous curve. Color bands in a surface chart do not represent the data series; they represent the difference between the values. This chart shows a 3-D view of the data, which can be imagined as a rubber sheet stretched over a 3-D column chart. It is typically used to show relationships between large amounts of data that may otherwise be difficult to see. · Wireframe 3-D surface When displayed without color on the surface, a 3-D surface chart is called a wireframe 3-D surface chart. This chart shows only the lines. Page 105
  • 106.
    Note A wireframe3-D surface chart is not easy to read, but this chart type is useful for faster plotting of large data sets. · Contour Contour charts are surface charts viewed from above, similar to 2-D topographic maps. In a contour chart, color bands represent specific ranges of values. The lines in a contour chart connect interpolated points of equal value. · Wireframe contour Wireframe contour charts are also surface charts viewed from above. Without color bands on the surface, a wireframe chart shows only the lines. Note Wireframe contour charts are not easy to read. You may want to use a 3-D surface chart instead. TOP OF PAGE Doughnut charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows only on a worksheet can be plotted in a doughnut chart. Like a pie chart, a doughnut chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole, but it can contain more than one data series. Page 106
  • 107.
    Note Doughnut chartsare not easy to read. You may want to use a stacked column or stacked bar chart instead. Doughnut charts have the following chart subtypes: · Doughnut Doughnut charts display data in rings, where each ring represents a data series. If percentages are displayed in data labels, each ring will total 100%. · Exploded Doughnut Much like exploded pie charts, exploded doughnut charts display the contribution of each value to a total while emphasizing individual values, but they can contain more than one data series. TOP OF PAGE Bubble charts Page 107
  • 108.
    Data that isarranged in columns on a worksheet so that x values are listed in the first column and corresponding y values and bubble size values are listed in adjacent columns, can be plotted in a bubble chart. For example, you would organize your data as shown in the following example. Bubble charts have the following chart subtypes: · Bubble or bubble with 3-D effect Both bubble chart types compare sets of three values instead of two. The third value determines the size of the bubble marker. You can choose to display bubbles in 2-D format or with a 3-D effect. TOP OF PAGE Radar charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a radar chart. Radar charts compare the aggregate values of several data series. Page 108
  • 109.
    Radar charts havethe following chart subtypes: · Radar and radar with markers With or without markers for individual data points, radar charts display changes in values relative to a center point. · Filled radar In a filled radar chart, the area covered by a data series is filled with a color. TOP OF PAGE ------------ http://wiki.answers.com/Q/Explain_the_different_types_of_charts_used_in_excel Explain the different types of charts used in excel? Answer: Page 109
  • 110.
    · An areachart emphasizes the magnitude of change over time. By displaying the sum of the plotted values, an area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a whole. · A Column Chart shows data changes over a period of time or illustrates comparisons among items. Categories are organized horizontally, values vertically, to emphasize variation over time. Stacked column charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. The 3-D perspective column chart compares data points along two axes. · A Bar Chart illustrates comparisons among individual items. Categories are organized vertically, values horizontally, to focus on comparing values and to place less emphasis on time. Stacked bar charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. · A Line Chart shows trends in data at equal intervals. · A Pie Chart shows the proportional size of items that make up a data series to the sum of the items. It always shows only one data series and is useful when you want to emphasize a significant element. To make small slices easier to see, you can group them together as one item in a pie chart and then break down that item in a smaller pie or bar chart next to the main chart. · Like a pie chart, a Doughnut Chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole, but it can contain more than one data series. Each ring of the doughnut chart represents a data series. · The High-Low-Close Chart is often used to illustrate stock prices. This chart can also be used for scientific data, for example, to indicate temperature changes. You must organize your data in the correct order to create this and other stock charts. A stock chart that measures volume has two value axes: one for the columns that measure volume, and the other for the stock prices. You can include volume in a high-low-close or open-high-low-close chart. · An XY (Scatter) Chart either shows the relationships among the numeric values in several data series or plots two groups of numbers as one series of xy coordinates. This chart shows uneven intervals - or clusters - of data and is commonly used for scientific data. When you arrange your data, place x values in one row or column, and then enter corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns. · A Bubble Chart is a type of xy (scatter) chart. The size of the data marker indicates the value of a third variable. To arrange your data, place the x values in one row or column, and enter corresponding y values and bubble sizes in the adjacent rows or columns. · In a Radar Chart, each category has its own value axis radiating from the center point. Lines connect all the values in the same series. A radar chart compares the aggregate values of a number of data series. In this chart, the data series that covers the most area, Brand A, represents the brand with the highest vitamin content. · A Surface Chart is useful when you want to find optimum combinations between two sets of data. As in a topographic map, colors and patterns indicate areas that are in the same range of values. Answer: A Chart is a Graphical representation of Data. A steps to Insert Chart is as follows: Page 110
  • 111.
    STEPS: (15)Select adata range. (16)Click on Insert menu (17)Click on chart option (18)Select a chart style (19)Select a sub type of a chart (20)Click on Next Button (21)Click on Next Button again (22)Give a name of X- axis and Y-axis and Title of a chart (23)Set a position of a Legend (24)If you want to show a value in a chart then click on Data label (25)Click on ( tick a check box) Show value option. (26)Click on Next button (27)Select a radio button according to requirement, if you want to put a chart in that spreadsheet or a new worksheet (28)Click on FINISH button http://office.microsoft.com/en-in/excel-help/available-chart-types-HA010342187.aspx Available chart types Microsoft Excel supports many types of charts to help you display data in ways that are meaningful to your audience. When you create a chart or change the type of an existing chart in Microsoft Excel or other Microsoft Office programs such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Outlook, you can select one of the following chart types. Important This article describes the chart types that you can use. For information about how to create a chart, see Quick start: Chart your data or Create a chart from start to finish. Page 111
  • 112.
    In this article · Column charts · Line charts · Pie charts · Bar charts · Area charts · XY (scatter) charts · Stock charts · Surface charts · Doughnut charts · Bubble charts · Radar charts  Column charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a column chart. Column charts are useful for showing data changes over a period of time or for illustrating comparisons among items. In column charts, categories are typically organized along the horizontal axis and values along the vertical axis. Column charts have the following chart subtypes: · Clustered column and clustered column in 3-D Clustered column charts compare values across categories. A clustered column chart displays values in 2-D vertical rectangles. A clustered column Page 112
  • 113.
    in 3-D chartdisplays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not used. You can use a clustered column chart type when you have categories that represent: · Ranges of values (for example, item counts). · Specific scale arrangements (for example, a Likert scale with entries, such as strongly agree, agree, neutral, disagree, strongly disagree). · Names that are not in any specific order (for example, item names, geographic names, or the names of people). Note To present data in a 3-D format that uses three axes (a horizontal axis, a vertical axis, and a depth axis) that you can modify, use a 3-D column chart subtype instead. · Stacked column and stacked column in 3-D Stacked column charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole, comparing the contribution of each value to a total across categories. A stacked column chart displays values in 2-D vertical stacked rectangles. A 3-D stacked column chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not used. Tip You can use a stacked column chart when you have multiple data series and when you want to emphasize the total. · 100% stacked column and 100% stacked column in 3-D 100% stacked column charts and 100% stacked column in 3-D charts compare the percentage that each value contributes to a total across categories. A 100% stacked column chart displays values in 2-D vertical 100% stacked rectangles. A 3-D 100% stacked column chart displays the data by using a 3-D perspective only. A third value axis (depth axis) is not used. Page 113
  • 114.
    You can usea 100% stacked column chart when you have two or more data series and you want to emphasize the contributions to the whole, especially if the total is the same for each category. · 3-D column 3-D column charts use three axes that you can modify (a horizontal axis, a vertical axis, and a depth axis), and they compare data points along the horizontal and the depth axes. You can use a 3-D column chart when you want to compare data across the categories and across the series equally, because this chart type shows categories along both the horizontal axis and the depth axis, whereas the vertical axis displays the values. · Cylinder, cone, and pyramid Cylinder, cone, and pyramid charts are available in the same clustered, stacked, 100% stacked, and 3-D chart types that are provided for rectangular column charts, and they show and compare data the same way. The only difference is that these chart types display cylinder, cone, and pyramid shapes instead of rectangles.  Line charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a line chart. Line charts can display continuous data over time, set against a common scale, and are therefore ideal for showing trends in data at equal intervals. In a line chart, category data is distributed evenly along the horizontal axis, and all value data is distributed evenly along the vertical axis. Page 114
  • 115.
    You should usea line chart if your category labels are text, and are representing evenly spaced values such as months, quarters, or fiscal years. This is especially true if there are multiple series — for one series, you should consider using a scatter chart. You should also use a line chart if you have several evenly spaced numeric labels, especially years. If you have more than ten numeric labels, use a scatter chart instead. Line charts have the following chart subtypes: · Line and line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data values, or without, line charts are useful to show trends over time or ordered categories, especially when there are many data points and the order in which they are presented is important. If there are many categories or the values are approximate, use a line chart without markers. · Stacked line and stacked line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data values, or without, stacked line charts can be used to show the trend of the contribution of each value over time or ordered categories. Note Stacked charts add the data, which might not be the result you want. Also, because it is not easy to see that the lines are stacked, consider using a different line chart type or a stacked area chart instead. · 100% stacked line and 100% stacked line with markers Displayed with markers to indicate individual data values, or without, 100% stacked line charts are useful to show the trend of the percentage each value contributes over time or ordered categories. If there are many categories or the values are approximate, use a 100% stacked line chart without markers. Tip For a better presentation of this type of data, consider using a 100% stacked area chart instead. Page 115
  • 116.
    · 3-D line3-D line charts show each row or column of data as a 3-D ribbon. A 3-D line chart has horizontal, vertical, and depth axes that you can modify.  Pie charts Data that is arranged in one column or row only on a worksheet can be plotted in a pie chart. Pie charts show the size of items in one data series, proportional to the sum of the items. The data points in a pie chart are displayed as a percentage of the whole pie. Consider using a pie chart when: · You only have one data series that you want to plot. · None of the values that you want to plot are negative. · Almost none of the values that you want to plot are zero values. · You do not have more than seven categories. · The categories represent parts of the whole pie. Pie charts have the following chart subtypes: · Pie and pie in 3-D Pie charts display the contribution of each value to a total in a 2-D or 3-D format. You can pull out slices of a pie chart manually to emphasize the slices. Page 116
  • 117.
    · Pie ofpie and bar of pie Pie of pie or bar of pie charts display pie charts with user-defined values that are extracted from the main pie chart and combined into a secondary pie chart or into a stacked bar chart. These chart types are useful when you want to make small slices in the main pie chart easier to distinguish. · Exploded pie and exploded pie in 3-D Exploded pie charts display the contribution of each value to a total while emphasizing individual values. Exploded pie charts can be displayed in 3-D format. You can change the pie explosion setting for all slices and individual slices, but you cannot move the slices of an exploded pie manually. Tip If you want to pull out the slices manually, consider using a pie or pie in 3-D chart instead.  Bar charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a bar chart. Bar charts illustrate comparisons among individual items. Consider using a bar chart when: · The axis labels are long. · The values that are shown are durations. Page 117
  • 118.
    Bar charts havethe following chart subtypes: · Clustered bar and clustered bar in 3-D Clustered bar charts compare values across categories. In a clustered bar chart, the categories are typically organized along the vertical axis, and the values along the horizontal axis. A clustered bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not display the data on three axes. · Stacked bar and stacked bar in 3-D Stacked bar charts show the relationship of individual items to the whole. A stacked bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not display the data on three axes. · 100% stacked bar and 100% stacked bar in 3-D This type of chart compares the percentage that each value contributes to a total across categories. A 100% stacked bar in 3-D chart displays the horizontal rectangles in 3-D format; it does not display the data on three axes. · Horizontal cylinder, cone, and pyramid These charts are available in the same clustered, stacked, and 100% stacked chart types that are provided for rectangular bar charts. They show and compare data the same way. The only difference is that these chart types display cylinder, cone, and pyramid shapes instead of horizontal rectangles. Page 118
  • 119.
     Area charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in an area chart. Area charts emphasize the magnitude of change over time, and can be used to draw attention to the total value across a trend. For example, data that represents profit over time can be plotted in an area chart to emphasize the total profit. By displaying the sum of the plotted values, an area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a whole. Area charts have the following chart subtypes: · 2-D area and 3-D area Whether they are shown in 2-D or in 3-D, area charts display the trend of values over time or other category data. 3-D area charts use three axes (horizontal, vertical, and depth) that you can modify. As a rule, you should consider using a line chart instead of a nonstacked area chart, because data from one series can be obscured by data from another series. · Stacked area and stacked area in 3-D Stacked area charts display the trend of the contribution of each value over time or other category data. A stacked area chart in 3-D is displayed in the same way but uses a 3-D perspective. A 3-D perspective is not a true 3-D chart — a third value axis (depth axis) is not used. Page 119
  • 120.
    · 100% stackedarea and 100% stacked area in 3-D 100% stacked area charts display the trend of the percentage that each value contributes over time or other category data. A 100% stacked area chart in 3-D is displayed in the same way but uses a 3-D perspective. A 3-D perspective is not a true 3-D chart — a third value axis (depth axis) is not used.  XY (scatter) charts Data that is arranged in columns and rows on a worksheet can be plotted in an xy (scatter) chart. Scatter charts show the relationships among the numeric values in several data series, or plot two groups of numbers as one series of xy coordinates. A scatter chart has two value axes, showing one set of numeric data along the horizontal axis (x-axis) and another along the vertical axis (y-axis). It combines these values into single data points and displays them in irregular intervals, or clusters. Scatter charts are typically used for displaying and comparing numeric values, such as scientific, statistical, and engineering data. Consider using a scatter chart when: · You want to change the scale of the horizontal axis. · You want to make that axis a logarithmic scale. · Values for horizontal axis are not evenly spaced. · There are many data points on the horizontal axis. · You want to effectively display worksheet data that includes pairs or grouped sets of values and adjust the independent scales of a scatter chart to reveal more information about the grouped values. · You want to show similarities between large sets of data instead of differences between data points. · You want to compare many data points without regard to time — the more data that you include in a scatter chart, the better the comparisons that you can make. To arrange data on a worksheet for a scatter chart, you should place the x values in one row or column, and then enter the corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns. Page 120
  • 121.
    Scatter charts havethe following chart subtypes: · Scatter with only markers This type of chart compares pairs of values. Use a scatter chart with data markers but without lines when you use many data points and connecting lines would make the data more difficult to read. You can also use this chart type when you do not have to show connectivity of the data points. · Scatter with smooth lines and scatter with smooth lines and markers This type of chart displays a smooth curve that connects the data points. Smooth lines can be displayed with or without markers. Use a smooth line without markers if there are many data points. · Scatter with straight lines and scatter with straight lines and markers This type of chart displays straight connecting lines between data points. Straight lines can be displayed with or without markers. Page 121
  • 122.
     Stock charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows in a specific order on a worksheet can be plotted in a stock chart. As its name implies, a stock chart is most often used to illustrate the fluctuation of stock prices. However, this chart may also be used for scientific data. For example, you could use a stock chart to indicate the fluctuation of daily or annual temperatures. You must organize your data in the correct order to create stock charts. The way stock chart data is organized in the worksheet is very important. For example, to create a simple high-low-close stock chart, you should arrange your data with High, Low, and Close entered as column headings, in that order. Stock charts have the following chart sub-types: · High-low-close The high-low-close stock chart is often used to illustrate stock prices. It requires three series of values in the following order: high, low, and then close. · Open-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires four series of values in the correct order (open, high, low, and then close). Page 122
  • 123.
    · Volume-high-low-close Thistype of stock chart requires four series of values in the correct order (volume, high, low, and then close). It measures volume by using two value axes: one for the columns that measure volume, and the other for the stock prices. · Volume-open-high-low-close This type of stock chart requires five series of values in the correct order (volume, open, high, low, and then close).  Surface charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a surface chart. A surface chart is useful when you want to find optimum combinations between two sets of data. As in a topographic map, colors and patterns indicate areas that are in the same range of values. You can use a surface chart when both categories and data series are numeric values. Page 123
  • 124.
    Surface charts havethe following chart subtypes: · 3-D surface 3-D surface charts show trends in values across two dimensions in a continuous curve. Color bands in a surface chart do not represent the data series; they represent the difference between the values. This chart shows a 3-D view of the data, which can be imagined as a rubber sheet stretched over a 3-D column chart. It is typically used to show relationships between large amounts of data that may otherwise be difficult to see. · Wireframe 3-D surface When displayed without color on the surface, a 3-D surface chart is called a wireframe 3-D surface chart. This chart shows only the lines. Note A wireframe 3-D surface chart is not easy to read, but this chart type is useful for faster plotting of large data sets. Page 124
  • 125.
    · Contour Contourcharts are surface charts viewed from above, similar to 2-D topographic maps. In a contour chart, color bands represent specific ranges of values. The lines in a contour chart connect interpolated points of equal value. · Wireframe contour Wireframe contour charts are also surface charts viewed from above. Without color bands on the surface, a wireframe chart shows only the lines. Note Wireframe contour charts are not easy to read. You may want to use a 3-D surface chart instead.  Doughnut charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows only on a worksheet can be plotted in a doughnut chart. Like a pie chart, a doughnut chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole, but it can contain more than one data series. Page 125
  • 126.
    Note Doughnut chartsare not easy to read. You may want to use a stacked column or stacked bar chart instead. Doughnut charts have the following chart subtypes: · Doughnut Doughnut charts display data in rings, where each ring represents a data series. If percentages are displayed in data labels, each ring will total 100%. · Exploded Doughnut Much like exploded pie charts, exploded doughnut charts display the contribution of each value to a total while emphasizing individual values, but they can contain more than one data series. Page 126
  • 127.
     Bubble charts Data that is arranged in columns on a worksheet so that x values are listed in the first column and corresponding y values and bubble size values are listed in adjacent columns, can be plotted in a bubble chart. For example, you would organize your data as shown in the following example. Bubble charts have the following chart subtypes: · Bubble or bubble with 3-D effect Both bubble chart types compare sets of three values instead of two. The third value determines the size of the bubble marker. You can choose to display bubbles in 2-D format or with a 3-D effect.  Radar charts Data that is arranged in columns or rows on a worksheet can be plotted in a radar chart. Radar charts compare the aggregate values of several data series. Page 127
  • 128.
    Radar charts havethe following chart subtypes: · Radar and radar with markers With or without markers for individual data points, radar charts display changes in values relative to a center point. · Filled radar In a filled radar chart, the area covered by a data series is filled with a color. ----------------- How to use Goal Seek in Excel We're not going go too deeply into Goal Seek, because it can get quite complicated. We'll stick with a basic outline, and an example, of just what it is. Page 128
  • 129.
    Goal Seek GoalSeek is used when you know what answer you want, but don't know the exact figure to input for that answer. For example, you're quite certain that 8 multiplied by something equals 56. You just not sure what that missing number is. Is it 8 multiplied by 6? Or Is it 8 multiplied by 7? Goal Seek will tell you the answer. We'll test that example out right now. So start a new spreadsheet, and create one the same as in the image below: Before you can use Goal Seek, Excel needs certain things from you. First it needs some sort of formula to work with. In the image above we have the simple formula =B1 * B2. We've put this in cell B3. But the answer is wrong for us. We had a Goal of 56 (8 times something). We want to know which number you have to multiply 8 by in order to get the answer 56. We tried 8 times 6, and that gave the answer of 48. So we have to try again. Instead of us puzzling the answer out, we can let Goal Seek handle it. So do the following: · From the Excel menu bar, click on Tools · From the drop down menu, click on Goal Seek · A dialogue box pops up like the one below: The dialogue box needs a little explaining. "Set cell" is the answer you're looking for, this is the Goal. Set cell needs a formula or function to work with. Our formula is in cell B3, so if your "Set cell" text box does not say B3, click inside it and type B3. "To Value" is the actual answer you're looking for. With "Set cell", you're just telling Excel where the formula is. With "To Value" you have to tell Excel what answer you're looking for. We wanted an answer of 56 for our formula. So click inside the "To Value" text box and type 56. Page 129
  • 130.
    "By Changing Cell"is the missing bit. This is the part of the formula that needs to change in order to get the answer you want. In our formula we have an 8 and a 6. Clearly, the 6 is the number that has to go. So the cell that needs to change is B2. So go ahead and enter B2 in the "By Changing Cell" text box. Your dialogue box should now look like this: Click OK when your dialogue box looks like the one above. Excel will then Set the cell B3 to the Value of 56, and change the figure in cell B2. You'll also get a dialogue box like the one below: Click OK on the dialogue box. Your new spreadsheet will look like this one: So Goal Seek has given us the answer we wanted: it is 7 that when times by 8 equals 56. Increase your profits with Goal Seek To give you a more practical example of what Goal Seek does, consider this problem. You have a business that generates 25 thousand pounds worth of profit. You currently sell 1000 items at 25 pounds each. You want to increase your profit to 35 thousand pounds. Assume that you're still going to sell 1000 items. By how much does the price of each item have to increase by in order to generate the new profit total? Page 130
  • 131.
    We'll work itout together using Goal Seek. And then you can have a try yourself with an exercise. First, here's a new spreadsheet for you to download: Download the Goal Seek Spreadsheet When you open the spreadsheet, you'll notice that the Current Sales Figures and the Future Sales Figures are exactly the same. The formula in Cells B4 and E4 are = B2 * B3 and = E2 * E3 We can use Goal Seek to solve our problem. What we want to know is, What should be the new Price Per Item in order to generate Profits of 35 thousand? · So, from the Excel menu bar, click on Tools · From the drop-down menu, click Goal Seek · The Goal Seek dialogue box appears This time, our formula is in cell E4. So we want to Set the cell to the cell that has our formula. So type E4 into the "Set cell" text box. The "To Value" text box will hold our new Profits. The Goal we are aiming for is 35 thousand. So type in 35000 in the "To value" text box. The cell we want to change is the Price Per item figure. So in the "By changing cell" text box, type in E3. Click OK when you're done. Excel will give you this dialogue box: The dialogue box is telling you that Goal Seek has found a solution. Click OK. Your spreadsheet will already have changed. The new Future Sales Figures will be displayed. Your spreadsheet should look something like the one below: Page 131
  • 132.
    Goal Seek hasgiven us the answer of 35 pounds. So the cost of each item has to increase by 10 pounds if we want a profit of 35 thousand. And now it's your turn. Try this exercise. Exercise You've had a board meeting. It has been decided that the Price Per Item will remain the same - 25 pounds. But you still want to generate Profits of 35 thousand. Use Goal seek to work out how many Items will now have to be sold in order to reach your target. ------------- http://www.psexam.com/Notes-for-Computer-Science/word-2007-mail-merge-with-an-example. html Types of Cell Addresses in Excel 1. Relative Cell Address 2. Absolute Cell Address 3. Mixed Cell Address There are two major types of references used in Microsoft Excel which is an Absolute Reference and a Relative Reference. On a day-to-day basis, the relative and absolute reference doesn't really affect the operations of your spreadsheet. Where it does become a noticeable issue is when you start copying formulas from one cell to another. Page 132
  • 133.
    Lets investigate thedifference between the two … A Relative Reference is one that when copied from one position to another will adjust the formula cell address to suit the position it is in. For example if you have a formula in cell address C4 that was =B4*C1 and then copied the formula into say C5 what you will notice is that the cell addresses of the formula will change to =B5 * C2. The reason this has occurred is that the cell addresses are in fact relative addresses. That is the cell address is relative to its current position. To change a cell address from being relative to being absolute we simply add dollars signs to the cell address in this way - $C$5. What this address is now saying to us is that we must absolutely refer to column C and absolutely refer to Row 5. This means that if we apply the dollar symbols to our previous formula in cell C4 which is =$B$4 * $C$4 and then copy our formula to cell address C5 you will notice this time round that the cell addresses didn't change. The reason is that by adding the $ symbols to the cell address we are telling the formula that regardless of where you place the formula you must absolutely refer to Column B and Row four thus we have $B$4. There are many reasons why you may use Relative References over Absolute references and vice versa. One of the most common one for using absolute references is when you have a specific value you want to refer to in a formula. For example, lets say you are building a mortgage calculator and you need to refer to an Interest Rate. To ensure you are always referring to the right cell that has the interest rate value you may set an absolute value. In Microsoft Excel there is also a reference called a mixed reference. Essentially what this means is that only either the Column or the Row has the dollar symbol, for example $C3. What this is telling us is that in the formula you must absolutely refer to column C but the value in the row is relative to the position of the formula. There are a number of ways that you can enter Relative and Absolute values into a formula. One technique is that you can simply type the $ symbols next to the Row or the Column. However there is an alternative. Once you have typed in the Cell address like C4 you can move back into the cell address and then use the F4 key to toggle the cell reference from Relative to Absolute to a Mixed References. Absolute and relative references are extremely important in Microsoft Excel and they ensure that the formulas you are creating actually refer to the correct cells. Remember one simple rule, if the cell addresses have a $ symbol next to it, it means you must absolutely refer to either the column or the row. OR Relative vs. Absolute Cell References in Spreadsheets Page 133
  • 134.
    In working withspreadsheets, you need to know about relative vs. absolute cell references. Here is the issue: when you COPY A FORMULA that contains cell references, what happens to the cell references? Usually the CELL REFERENCES will CHANGE! If you copy a formula 2 rows to the right, then the cell references in the formula will shift 2 cells to the right. If you copy a formula 3 rows down and 1 row left, then the cell references in the formula will shift 3 rows down and 1 row left. These are called "relative" cell references, since they change relative to where you copy the formula. If you do not want cell references to change when you copy a formula, then make those cell references absolute cell references. Place a "$" before the column letter if you want that to always stay the same. Place a "$" before a row number if you want that to always stay the same. For example, "$C$3" refers to cell C3, and "$C$3" will work exactly the same as "C3", expect when you copy the formula. Note: when entering formulas you can use the F4 key right after entering a cell reference to toggle among the different relative/absolute versions of that cell address. The trick in creating spreadsheets is deciding before you copy a formula what cell references in the formula you want to be relative and what you want to be absolute. If some cell references refer to input cells in the spreadsheet, you usually want those cells to be absolute. The article below gives further instruction in absolute vs. relative cell references. Relative & Absolute Cell References by Karyn Stille Excel uses two types of cell references to create formulas. Each has its own purpose. Read on to determine which type of cell reference to use for your formula. Relative Cell References This is the most widely used type of cell reference in formulas. Relative cell references are basic cell references that adjust and change when copied or when using AutoFill. Example: =SUM(B5:B8), as shown below, changes to =SUM(C5:C8) when copied across to the next cell. Page 134
  • 135.
    Absolute Cell References Situations arise in which the cell reference must remain the same when copied or when using AutoFill. Dollar signs are used to hold a column and/or row reference constant. Example: In the example below, when calculating commissions for sales staff, you would not want cell B10 to change when copying the formula down. You want both the column and the row to remain the same to refer to that exact cell. By using $B$10 in the formula, neither changes when copied. Page 135
  • 136.
    A more complicatedexample: Let's pretend that you need to calculate the prices of items in stock with two different price discounts. Take a look at the worksheet below. Examine the formula in cell E4. By making the first cell reference $C4, you keep the column from changing when copied across, but allow the row to change when copying down to accommodate the prices of the different items going down. By making the last cell reference A$12, you keep the row number from changing when copied down, but allow the column to change and reflect discount B when copied across. Confused? Check out the graphics below and the cell results. Copied Across Copied Down Page 136
  • 137.
    Now, you mightbe thinking, why not just use 10% and 15% in the actual formulas? Wouldn't that be easier? Yes, if you are sure the discount percentages will never change - which is highly unlikely. It's more likely that eventually those percentages will need to be adjusted. By referencing the cells containing 10% and 15% and not the actual numbers, when the percentage changes all you need to do is change the percentage one time in cell A12 and/or B12 instead of rebuilding all of your formulas. Excel would automatically update the discount prices to reflect your discount percentage change. Summary of absolute cell reference uses: $A1 Allows the row reference to change, but not the column reference. A$1 Allows the column reference to change, but not the row reference. $A$1 Allows neither the column nor the row reference to change. There is a shortcut for placing absolute cell references in your formulas! When you are typing your formula, after you type a cell reference - press the F4 key. Excel automatically makes the cell reference absolute! By continuing to press F4, Excel will cycle through all of the absolute reference possibilities. For example, in the first absolute cell reference formula in this tutorial, =B4*$B$10, I could have typed, =B4*B10, then pressed the F4 key to change B10 to $B$10. Continuing to press F4 would have resulted in B$10, then $B10, and finally B10. Pressing F4 changes only the cell reference directly to the left of your insertion point. I hope this tutorial has made these cell reference types "absolutely" clear! ----------- Page 137
  • 138.
    POWER POINT MicrosoftPower Point is a product of Microsoft Company. It is window based application software. We can create an effective slide based presentation in MS Power Point. Presentation consists of a number of slides. Each slide can have text and graphics. A default name for a power point file is Presentation -1. A file extension for power point is .ppt. Presentation: Presentation is the practice of showing and explaining the content of a topic to an audience or leaner. A presentation program, such as MS power point, is often used to generate the presentation content.  INSERT MENU  New Slide (Ctrl + M) With the help of this option you can insert a slide in your presentation. STEPS: (1) Click on insert menu (2) Click on new slide option (3) Select any slide layout (4) Click on Apply button.  Text Box With the help of this option you can insert a text box in your presentation. STEPS: (1) click on insert menu (2) click on textbox option (3) Set your mouse position in the slide where you want to put a textbox. (4) Enter a text in your test box. (5) click outside of your textbox. Slide No: With the help of this option you can insert a slide no in your presentation. STEPS: (1) Click on Insert menu (2) Click on Slide no.  Duplicate: With the help of this option you can create a duplicate slide of a selected slide. STEPS: (1) Click on insert menu (2) Select Duplicate option  FORMAT MENU  Background  Layout Apply Design Template With the help of this option you can insert a design in your slide background STEPS: Page 138
  • 139.
    (1) click onFormat Menu (2) Click on Apply Design template Option (3) Select Any one design (4) Click on Apply Button  EDIT MENU:  Delete Slide With the help of this option you can delete a selected slide from your presentation. STEPS: 1)select a slide which you want to delete (2) click on Edit menu (3) Select delete option  VIEW MENU:  Normal With the help of this option you can view a slide in a normal layout  Slide Sorter With the help of this option you can view all slide of our presentation together in a thumbnail size. Slide show With the help of this option you can see your presentation in a full screen.  SLIDE SHOW MENU (Alt + S)  Slide Transition: With the help of this option you can set a time duration between slides of your presentation, so that your slides displayed automatically. STPS: (1) click on slide show menu (2) Select Slide Transition option (3) Select any effect you want to apply in your slide (4) Select Speed (5) unselect on mouse over box (6) select (check) Automatically after option (7) If you want to apply the effects to all slides of you presentation then click on apply to all button or click on apply button only.  Custom Animation With the help of this option you can apply effects on your texts, graphics, objects etc,. What is Custom Animation?  Custom Animation is a feature in Microsoft Office PowerPoint.  It contains a list of effects that you can apply to objects to have them animate during the slide show.  Custom animation is a set of effects which can be applied to objects in PowerPoint so that they will animate in the Slide Show.  PowerPoint 2000 and earlier versions introduced basic effects such as Appear, Dissolve, Fly In and so forth. Page 139
  • 140.
     In PowerPoint2002/XP and later versions, the Custom Animation feature was improved, adding new animation effects grouped into four categories: Entrance, Emphasis, Motion and Exit Paths. STEPS: (1) click on slide show menu (2) Select Custom Animation Option (3) Select picture or a text on which you want to apply effect (4) Select any effect (5) Click on Introduce text option and choose any one option from it. (6) click on apply button  Set up show With the help of this option you can set your slide show in continue manner STEPS: (1) click on slide show menu (2) select setup show option (3) Select loop continue until Esc check box (4) click on OK button --------------- http://www.ischool.utexas.edu/technology/tutorials/office/ppt03/02ppt_starting.html http://office.microsoft.com/en-in/powerpoint-help/about-powerpoint-views-HP005194974.aspx About PowerPoint views Microsoft PowerPoint has three main views: (1) normal view (a) Outline tab (b) Slides tab (c) Slide pane (d) Notes pane (2) slide sorter view (3) slide show view. It has also some more additional views. (4) Reading view and (5) Notes Page view You can select a view, based on these main views, to be your default view in PowerPoint. (1)Normal view Normal view is the main editing view, which you use to write and design your presentation. The view has three working areas: on the left, tabs that alternate between an outline of your Page 140
  • 141.
    slide text (Outlinetab) and your slides displayed as thumbnails (Slides tab); on the right, the slide pane, which displays a large view of the current slide; and on the bottom, the notes pane . (notes pane: The pane in normal view in which you type notes that you want to accompany a slide. You print these notes as notes pages or have them display when you save a presentation as a Web page.). Outline tab Showing your slide text in outline form, this area is a great place to start writing your content — to capture your ideas, plan how you want to present them, and move slides and text around. Slides tab Switch to this tab to see the slides in your presentation as thumbnail-sized images while you edit. The thumbnails make it easy for you to navigate through your presentation and to see the effects of your design changes. You can also rearrange, add, or delete slides. Slide pane With the current slide shown in this large view, you can add text, insert pictures. (picture: A file (such as a metafile) that you can ungroup and manipulate as two or more objects, or a file that stays as a single object (such as bitmaps).) , tables, charts, drawing objects, text boxes, movies, sounds, hyperlinks, and animations. Notes pane Add notes that relate to each slide's content, and use them in printed form to refer to as you give your presentation, or create notes that you want your audience to see either in printed form or on a Web page. The Outline and Slides tabs change to display an icon when the pane becomes narrow, and if you only want to see the current slide in the window as you edit, you can close the tabs with a Close box in the right corner. Page 141
  • 142.
    Drag the splitterbar to narrow the pane; the tab names turn into icons. You can adjust the size of the different panes in normal view by dragging the pane borders. (2) Slide sorter view Slide sorter view is an exclusive view of your slides in thumbnail form, helpful for rearranging the order of your slides. When you are finished creating and editing your presentation, slide sorter gives you an overall picture of it — making it easy to reorder, add, or delete slides and preview your transition and animation effects. In the Slide Sorter view, you see a miniature of each slide. The Slide Sorter view not only gives you a great view of your presentation as a whole, but it also lets you rearrange and hide your slides. You can view the slides in this view with formatting either shown or hidden. If you wish to increase or decrease the view of the slides, you can also adjust the view by zooming in and out as necessary. (3) Slide show view Slide show view takes up the full computer screen, like an actual slide show presentation. In this full-screen view, you see your presentation the way your audience will. You can see how your graphics, timings, movies, animated elements, and transition effects will look in the actual show. (animate: To add a special visual or sound effect to text or an object. For example, you can have your text bullet points fly in from the left, one word at a time, or hear the sound of applause when a picture is uncovered.) Additional Views: Page 142
  • 143.
    Slides view: Thisis a great place to view the slides in your presentation as thumbnail-sized images while you edit. The thumbnails make it easy for you to navigate through your presentation and to see the effects of any design changes. You can also easily rearrange, add, or delete slides here. Outline view: This is a great place to start writing your content, to capture your ideas, plan how you want to present them, and move slides and text around. The Outline tab shows your slide text in outline form. (4) Reading View: Use reading view to deliver your presentation not to an audience (via a large screen, for example), but instead to someone viewing your presentation on their own computer. Or, use Reading view on your own computer when you want to view a presentation not in full-screen Slide Show view, but in a window with simple controls that make the presentation easy to review. You can always switch from Reading view to one of the other views if you want to change the presentation. (5) Notes Page: The "Notes Page" view is an expanded version of the "Notes" pane in "Normal" view. This view allows you to use the full PowerPoint window to work on your notes. You can also use "Notes Page" view to prepare and print your notes in full-page format. ------ http://celt.cui.edu/CELT/PowerPoint/PP_Transitions.htm# b PowerPoint: Slide Transition and Custom Animation Transitions happen between slides. They can be disolve through black from one to the next, checkerboard pattern, etc. Custom Animation deals with putting your bullet points up on the screen one at a time, and how they enter. They can just appear, fly in from the side or bottom, etc. They don't necessarily add to the content of the presentation, but rather simply make the presentation a little more interesting to view, thus better keeping the attention of your audience. Slide Transitions | Custom Animation Page 143
  • 144.
    Slide Transitions 1 From the menu in the right column of the screen, select Slide Transitions. 2 The following menu will appear: Page 144
  • 145.
    Highlight one ofthe options, such as Box In, and you will see the slide preview what you selected. You do not have an Apply button to check; just highlighting the choice will apply it to the slide. If you want to use the same transition between all slides, click on the Apply to All Slides option. 3 If you go to the Slide Sorter view (View/Slide Sorter) or click on this icon near the lower left corner of the screen you will see your slides displayed in the following format: Page 145
  • 146.
    The littel starin the lower left corner indicates that a transition has been applied to that slide. Click on that star and you will see the animation previewed. 4 To remove a transition, you must be in the individual slide, not the Slide Sorter view. From the Slide Sorder view, double click on the slide you wish to change. If the program is not showing the Transitions in the right column, select Transitions (follow directions in step 1 above). Now slide the choice bar to No Transition at the top of the list of choices and the transition will be gone. Custom Animation 5 Page 146
  • 147.
    The following stepswill allow formatting so that individual bullets show one at a time. In the right hand column of PowerPoint, click on the down arrow and go to the Custom Animation option: 6 You will now see the menu below: Page 147
  • 148.
    7 Put yourcursor in the first bullet point. Click on Add Effect and you will see the options shown below. You can see that besides Entrance, you have several other options. This tutorial will focus on Entrance, but all work in a similar manner. The only one that is a little tricky is Page 148
  • 149.
    Motion paths. Ifyou are interested in this one, go to the Faculty Resources side of CELT. You will find a tutorial for Motion Paths there. 8 Here is an example of what you will see happening on the screen as the animation is applied: 9 You will notice that there are now numbers to the left of the bullet points. These numbers represent the order in which the animation will happen. Because we selected "on mouse click", the points will show only after you click the mouse when you show the presentation. See the illustration in step 10 below. 10 Page 149
  • 150.
    You can selectany of the animations and modify it. In the illustration, animation 3 is selected. You can use the Change button to change the style or the Remove button to eliminate this animation. As you can see, you also have options for when it starts, direction, and speed. If you use the Re-Order option, you can move this item up or down in the sequence using the green up/down arrows. 11 Bullet points are not the only feature that can have custom animation. You can add animation to the title at the top of the slide or to any graphic or picture you put into the slide. Page 150
  • 151.
    INTERNET What isInternet? Ans: ® The Internet, sometimes called simply "the Net," is a worldwide system of computer networks - ® It is a network of networks in which users at any one computer can, (if they have permission,) get information from any other computer (and sometimes talk directly to users at other computers).  What is web browser? Give any two examples of web browser. Ans: ® Defi 1: The web browsers are software application which allow the customers to open and read HTML, PHP and other scripting languages on their computers. ® Defi 2: A web browser is a software application for retrieving, presenting, and traversing information resources on the World Wide Web. The major web browsers are Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Internet Explorer, Opera, and Safari. ® Defi 3: A web browser is a software application which enables a user to display and interact with text. Images , videos , music , games and other information typically located on a web page at a website on the WWW or a LAN.  Give the full form of URL, SMTP, POP, TCP, HTTP and DNS. Ans: ® URL: uniform resource locator( previously Universal Resource Locator): It is the unique address for a file that is accessible on the Internet. ® SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol: It is an Internet standard for electronic mail (e-mail) transmission across Internet Protocol (IP) networks. ® POP: Post Office Protocol: It is an application-layer Internet standard protocol used by local e-mail clients to retrieve e-mail from a remote server. ® TCP: Transmission Control Protocol : It is one of the core protocols of the Internet Protocol Suite. ® HTTP: Hypertext Transfer Protocol : is an application protocol for distributed, collaborative, hypermedia information systems. ® DNS: Domain Name System : It is a hierarchical distributed naming system for computers, services, or any resource connected to the Internet or a private network.  What is E-mail? Ans: ® The full form of e-mail is electronic mail. It is a protocol(rule) for receiving and sending, and storing electronic messages.  What is an IP Address? Page 151
  • 152.
    Ans: ® "IP"stands for Internet Protocol, so an IP address is an Internet Protocol address. An IP address is a unique number that every computer connected to the internet is assigned.  What is CUI and GUI? Ans: What is CUI? CUI stands for Character User Interface, it means that u have to type commands to interact with ur computer. It means you have to take help of a keyboard to type commands to interact with the computer. e.g. - In DOS for every thing we type the commands. You can only type text to give commands to the computer as in MS DOS or command prompt. There are no images or graphics on the screen and it is a primitive type of interface. In the beginning, computers had to be operated through this interface and users who have seen it say that they had to contend with a black screen with white text only. In those days, there was no need of a mouse as CUI did not support the use of pointer devices. CUI’s have gradually become outdated with the more advanced GUI taking their place. However, even the most modern computers have a modified version of CUI called CLI (Command Line Interface). What is GUI? GUI stands for Graphical User Interface, it means that u no need to type commands to interact with your computer instead u have to click with the help of mouse on the icons of readymade commands. e.g. - Windows GUI is what most modern computers make use of. This is an interface that makes use of graphics, images and other visual clues such as icons. This interface made it possible for a mouse to be used with a computer and interaction really became very easy as the user could interact with just a click of the mouse rather than having to type every time to give commands to the computer.  What is the Difference between CUI and GUI? CUI GUI 1. Stands for Character User Interface 1. GUI stands for Graphical User Interface 2. There is only text in case of CUI 2. There are Graphics and other visual clues in case of GUI 3. DOS is an example of CUI 3. Windows is an Example of GUI 4. CUI is not much easier to navigate. 4. GUI is much easier to navigate. 5. Only keyboard is used in this type of interface, no pointer device is used in it. 5. Both keyboard and mouse is used in this type of interface.  What is the protocol? Ans: ® A standard set of regulations and requirements that allow two electronic items to connect to and exchange information with one another. ® Protocols control data transmission among devices as well as within a network of linked devices through both error control and specifying which data compression method to use. Page 152
  • 153.
    ® In particular,protocols decide: the method of error checking, how to compact data (if required), how the transmitting device signals that it has concluded sending data, and how the receiving device signals that it has completed receiving data. ® Among the most common Internet protocols are FTP (File Transfer Protocol), HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol), TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol), and SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol). OR 2nd Definition ® A uniform set of rules that enable two devices to connect and transmit data to one another. ® Protocols determine how data are transmitted between computing devices and over networks. ® They define issues such as error control and data compression methods. ® The protocol determines the following: type of error checking to be used, data compression method (if any), how the sending device will indicate that it has finished a message and how the receiving device will indicate that it has received the message. ® Internet protocols include TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol), HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol), FTP (File Transfer Protocol), and SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol).  Which protocol is required for email? Ans: ® SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is used to send and receive an email. but we preferred POP(Post office Protocol) or IMAP(International Mail Access Protocol).  Write a note on IP Address. Ans: ® Every computer connected to the internet has an unique Internet Protocol or IP address. It is used to identify the computer on the internet. In the currently most widely used version of the Internet Protocol is - version 4. IP addresses are 4 bytes long(32-bit) and they are expressed in the form nn.nn.nn.nn. Each nn is a number between 0 and 255. (in the form of ‘octets’ in a “dotted decimal Number”). A typical IP Address is look like this: 216.27.61.137 ® The four numbers in an IP address are called octets because they can have values between 0 and 255, which is 28 possibilities per octet. ® Every machine on the Internet has a unique IP address. A server has a static IP address that does not change very often. ® When you connect to a web server to browse a web page, the DNS name of the web server, e.g. www.facebook.com, is automatically translated by the software in your machine to an IP address in the nn.nn.nn.nn form. This address is then used to connect to the actual web server. ® For example, the IP address of the server hosting fogbugz.bitvise.com at the time of this writing is 70.85.217.69. Our primary website, on the other hand, is hosted on several servers, and their IP addresses are 207.155.248.18, 207.155.248.31, 207.155.248.122 and 207.155.252.47. Page 153
  • 154.
    ® A homemachine that is dialing up through a modem often has an IP address that is assigned by the ISP when the machine dials in. That IP address is unique for that session -- it may be different the next time the machine dials in. This way, an ISP only needs one IP address for each modem it supports, rather than for each customer. ® As far as the Internet's machines are concerned, an IP address is all you need to talk to a server. For example, in your browser, you can type the URL http://209.116.69.66 and arrive at the machine that contains the Web server for HowStuffWorks. On some servers, the IP address alone is not sufficient, but on most large servers it is -- keep reading for details. ® If you are working on a Windows machine, you can view an Internet information for your machine, including your current IP address and hostname, with the command WINIPCFG.EXE (IPCONFIG.EXE for Windows 2000/XP). On a UNIX machine, type nslookup at the command prompt, along with a machine name, like www.gmail.com -- e.g. "nslookup www.gmail.com" -- to display the IP address of the machine, and you can use the command hostname to learn the name of your machine. ® In a Windows Command Prompt session, you can discover the IP addresses associated with DNS names using the nslookup command: e.g. 'nslookup www.bitvise.com'.  What is TCP/IP? Ans: ® TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is the basic communication language or protocol of the Internet. It can also be used as a communications protocol in a private network (either an intranet or an extranet). ® When you are set up with direct access to the Internet, your computer is provided with a copy of the TCP/IP program just as every other computer that you may send messages to or get information from also has a copy of TCP/IP. ® TCP/IP is a two-layer program. The higher layer, Transmission Control Protocol, manages the assembling of a message or file into smaller packets that are transmitted over the Internet and received by a TCP layer that reassembles the packets into the original message. The lower layer, Internet Protocol, handles the address part of each packet so that it gets to the right destination. ® Each gateway computer on the network checks this address to see where to forward the message. ® Even though some packets from the same message are routed differently than others, they'll be reassembled at the destination.  What is DNS? Ans: ® IP addresses are difficult to remember, so the internet provides a translation service which translates memorable names into associated IP addresses. This facility is called the Domain Name System or DNS. ® You use DNS implicitly every time you type in an address such as 'www.bitvise.com' - your browser asks your operating system for translation into an IP address, and the operating system either returns a cached result, or inquires with a DNS server operated Page 154
  • 155.
    by your ISP.This server in turn either returns a cached result or inquires with another DNS server. ® Because most people have trouble remembering the strings of numbers that make up IP addresses, and because IP addresses sometimes need to change, all servers on the Internet also have human-readable names, called domain names. ® For example, www.howstuffworks.com is a permanent, human-readable name. It is easier for most of us to remember www.howstuffworks.com than it is to remember 209.116.69.66. ® The name www.howstuffworks.com actually has three parts: 1. The host name ("www") 2. The domain name ("howstuffworks") 3. The top-level domain name ("com") ® There are so many types of domain extensions: .org (A top-level domain name for organizational Internet sites in the United States), .com (A top-level domain name used for commercial Internet sites in the United States), .gov (A top-level domain name used for a U.S. government site on the Internet), .net (A top-level domain name used for Internet administrative sites in the United States), .in (India), .uk (United Kingdom), .biz (Business Organizations)  Domain Name System ® Domain Name System(DNS) is a protocol within the set of standards(principles) for how computers exchange data on the Internet (and on many private networks, known as the TCP/IP protocol suite). Its basic job is to turn a user-friendly domain name like "facebook.com" into an Internet Protocol (IP) address like 70.42.251.42 (that computers use to identify each other on the network). ® Domain names within the ".com" domain are managed by the registrar called VeriSign. VeriSign also manages ".net" domain names. Other registrars (like RegistryPro, NeuLevel and Public Interest Registry) manage the other domains (like .pro, .biz and .org). VeriSign creates the top-level domain names and guarantees that all names within a top-level domain are unique. VeriSign also maintains contact information for each site and runs the "whois" database. The host name is created by the company hosting the domain. "www" is a very common host name, but many places now either omit it or replace it with a different host name that indicates a specific area of the site. For example, in encarta.msn.com, the domain name for Microsoft's Encarta encyclopedia, "encarta" is designated as the host name instead of "www."  Name Servers ® A set of servers called DNS Server (Name Server / domain name servers), it maps the human-readable names to the IP addresses. Page 155
  • 156.
    ® These serversare simple databases that map names to IP addresses, and they are distributed all over the Internet. Most individual companies, ISPs (Internet Service Provider) and universities maintain small name servers to map host names to IP addresses. There are also central name servers that use data supplied by VeriSign(is US based company that provides an authentication, like ISO in India) to map domain names to IP addresses. ® If you type the URL "http://www.howstuffworks.com/web-server.htm" into your browser, your browser extracts the name "www.howstuffworks.com," passes it to a domain name server, and the domain name server returns the correct IP address for www.howstuffworks.com. A number of name servers may be involved to get the right IP address. ® Without DNS servers, the Internet would shut down very quickly. But how does your computer know what DNS server to use? Typically, when you connect to your home network, Internet service provider (ISP) or WiFi network, the modem or router that assigns your computer's network address also sends some important network configuration(setting, pattern, design) information to your computer or mobile device. That configuration includes one or more DNS servers that the device should use when translating DNS names to IP address. ® For example, in the case of www.howstuffworks.com, the name server for the "com" top-level domain will know the IP address for the name server that knows host names, and a separate query to that name server, operated by the HowStuffWorks ISP, may deliver the actual IP address for the HowStuffWorks server machine. ® On a UNIX machine, you can access the same service using the nslookup command. Simply type a name like "www.howstuffworks.com" into the command line, and the command will query the name servers and deliver the corresponding (related) IP address to you. ® So here it is: The Internet is made up of millions of machines, each with a unique IP address. Many of these machines are server machines, meaning that they provide services to other machines on the Internet. You have heard of many of these servers: e-mail servers, Web servers, FTP servers, Gopher servers and Telnet servers, to name a few. All of these are provided by server machines.  Define Terms Speaker Notes and Handouts: Ans: (i) Speaker Notes: Ans: Speaker notes are simply that... notes for a speaker! They are short notes of key points to be used as a reminder while giving a speech.For example... if using PowerPoint, make a note of the main points of each slide to remind yourself of what you are going to say when you are presenting it. They are used ONLY for short notes / comments, NOT a script of the whole presentation / speech. (ii) Handouts: Ans: Page 156
  • 157.
    It's simply apiece of paper with limited important points that form the basis of the information you used for your presentation. Give them out at the end, and tell your audience this before you start so they needn't make extensive notes. It also means they'll pay attention, but by giving it out afterwards, they won't be tempted to look at them as your presentation is ongoing.  What is POP? Ans: ® Stands for "Post Office Protocol." . it is a simple, standardized method of delivering e-mail messages. A POP mail server receives e-mails and filters them into the appropriate user folders. When a user connects to the mail server to retrieve his mail, the messages are downloaded from mail server to the user's hard disk. ® When you configure your e-mail client, such as Outlook (Windows) or Mail (Mac OS X), you will need to enter the type of mail server your e-mail account uses. This will typically be either a POP or IMAP server. IMAP mail servers are a bit more complex than POP servers and allow e-mail messages to be read and stored on the server. Many "webmail" interfaces use IMAP mail servers so that users can manage all their mail online. ® Still, most mail servers use the POP mail protocol because it is simple and well-supported. You may have to check with your ISP or whoever manages your mail account to find out what settings to use for configuring your mail program. If your e-mail account is on a POP mail server, you will need to enter the correct POP server address in your e-mail program settings. Typically, this is something like "mail.servername.com" or "pop.servername.com." Of course, to successfully retrieve your mail, you will have to enter a valid username and password too.  Write a note on application of Internet. Ans: ® The Internet is a worldwide network of computers connecting thousands and thousands of computers across the globe. It is formed by the joining of many smaller networks around the world to form the largest network in the world. The computers of the Internet are connected through telephone lines, satellite links, modem and through many other means. ® The Internet consists of following applications : # World Wide Web # E-Mail #Chatting # Video Conferencing # Searching for information #Online Shopping and Trade #Education and Research Page 157